V1 CDMA Network Overview

Title page
CDMA | Release 35.0 and later

Network Overview
401-610-102
Issue 5.1
November 2011
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contents
About this document
xxi
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
Scope
.............................................................................................................................................................................................. xxi
xxi
Supported software releases
................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
Reason for reissue for Issue 5.1 ........................................................................................................................................... xxii

xxii
Reason for reissue for Issue 5
.............................................................................................................................................. xxii
xxii
To obtain technical support, documentation, and training or submit feedback

How to comment
1
................................................. xxv
....................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv
Interactive diagrams
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Interactive diagram 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC) ............................................................. 1-2
1-2
Interactive diagram CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC) ................................................................................ 1-3
1-3
Network architecture
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
About wireless networks
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-4
Conceptual view of a wireless network ............................................................................................................................ 2-5
2-5
Network-related terms used in this chapter ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
About call flows ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2-16
Alcatel-Lucent service-specific networks
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2-17
3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network ............................................................................................................................. 2-18

2-18
TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network ............................................................................................................................. 2-21
2-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
iii
401-610-102 Release 35.0 and later
Issue 5.1 November 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network
.............................................................................................................................. 2-24
2-24
9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network ...................................................................................................................... 2-27

2-27
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Backhaul Networks
Master Diagram
3
................................................................................................. 2-31
2-31
...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2-33
Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
MSC defined ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2
MSCs offered by Alcatel-Lucent ......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-3
About the I-MSC ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-4
About the MPC .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-6
Documentation and training .................................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3-9
Access Managers
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Mobility Manager Compact v4
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-4
About the MMCv4
................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4-5
About the MMCv4 hardware ................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

4-6
About the MMCv4 software ................................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4-8
MMCv4 connections to other network elements ........................................................................................................ 4-10
4-10
MMCv4 user interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-12
4-12
Documentation and training
............................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4-13

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4-15
About the MMCv2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-16

4-16
About the MMCv2 hardware ............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4-17
About the MMCv2 software
.............................................................................................................................................. 4-19
4-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
iv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-21
4-23
............................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4-24

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4-26
About the MMCv1 ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-27

4-27
About the MMCv1 hardware ............................................................................................................................................. 4-28
4-28
.............................................................................................................................................. 4-29
4-29

4-31
4-33
............................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4-34
9290 MM-based Access Manager

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4-36
About the 9290 MM .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-37

4-37
About the 9290 MM-APCC hardware ............................................................................................................................ 4-38
4-38
About the 9290 MM software ............................................................................................................................................ 4-42
4-42
9290 MM-APCC connections to other network elements
...................................................................................... 4-44
4-44
9290 MM user interfaces ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-46

4-46
............................................................................................................................................... 4-47
4-47
About the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-50
4-50
About the ECPC
..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-51
4-51
Components of the ECPC
................................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4-53
About the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) ........................................................................................................... 4-54

4-54
About the CNI/IMS ring ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4-56
About the ECPC software
................................................................................................................................................... 4-57
4-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
v
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECPC connections to other network elements ............................................................................................................. 4-58

4-58
For further information ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-59
4-59
Comparing the Access Managers
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-60
4-60
Comparison of the Access Managers .............................................................................................................................. 4-61

4-61
Applications that can be run on each Access Manager ............................................................................................. 4-65
4-65
OMP versions per Access Manager ................................................................................................................................. 4-69
4-69
5
CDMA Mobility Server (CMS)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
About the CMS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2
About the MMCv2
.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5-3
9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface ................................................................................................................ 5-5

5-5
6
9281 Packet Switches

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
About the 9281 Packet Switch
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3
Basics of the 9281 Packet Switch ....................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-4
About the 9281 Packet Switch hardware
Administrative Module (AM)
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6-7
Communications Module (CM)

Switching Module (SM)
About the PSm
......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-6
.......................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6-8
...................................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6-10
....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6-14
About the 9281 Packet Switch software ........................................................................................................................ 6-18

6-18
9281 Packet Switch connections to other network elements .................................................................................. 6-19
6-19
9281 Packet Switch user interfaces
................................................................................................................................. 6-22
6-22
............................................................................................................................................... 6-23
6-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
vi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-25
Basics of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc) ..................................................................................................... 6-26

6-26
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact hardware .................................................................................................... 6-28
6-28
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact hardware .................................................................................................... 6-29
6-29
About the AWS hardware .................................................................................................................................................... 6-30
6-30
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact software ..................................................................................................... 6-31
6-31
Connections to other network elements ......................................................................................................................... 6-32
6-32
9281 Packet Switch Compact user interfaces
.............................................................................................................. 6-35
6-35
............................................................................................................................................... 6-36
6-36
Packet Switch Gateway (PSG)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-38
6-38
About the Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) ..................................................................................................................... 6-39

6-39
About the H.248 interface ................................................................................................................................................... 6-40
6-40
About the PSG hardware ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-41
6-41
PSG connections to other network elements ................................................................................................................ 6-42
6-42
User interfaces ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-43
6-43
For further information ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-44
6-44
Special supported features
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-45
6-45
Support for Frame Relay Backhaul
................................................................................................................................. 6-46
6-46
Support for IP Backhaul ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-47

6-47
Support for Ethernet Backhaul .......................................................................................................................................... 6-49
6-49
Support for IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO) ............................................................................................................................. 6-50
6-50
Support for the PCF on PHE2 feature
............................................................................................................................ 6-51
6-51
Support for the SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling Gateway (SG) feature .................................................................. 6-53
6-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
vii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Base stations
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
About Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations .................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2
Commonly-used base station acronyms
........................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-6
About base station hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 7-7

7-7
About base station software ................................................................................................................................................ 7-10
7-10
Base station connections to other network elements ................................................................................................. 7-11
7-11
Base station user interfaces ................................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7-13
8
............................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7-14
CDMA 3G1X Packet Data Service

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
About the PCF on PHE2 feature on the Packet Switch packet data option
About the PCF on the PHE2 feature .................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8-2
Hardware for the PCF on PHE2 feature
.......................................................................................................................... 8-4
8-4
PCF on PHE2 user interface ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5

8-5
Documentation and training .................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8-6
9
9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-1
9271 EV-DO RAS
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9-3
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9-4
9271 EV-DO RAS deployment options ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
9-6
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network ................... 9-7
9-7
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network ............................................................................................... 9-10
9-10
System components of the 9271 EV-DO RAS ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9-13
About 1xEV-DO Base Stations
........................................................................................................................................ 9-16
9-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
viii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) ................................................................................................. 9-17

9-17
9271 EV-DO RAS connections to other network elements .................................................................................... 9-18
9-18
9271 EV-DO RAS user interfaces .................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9-20
............................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9-21
About the 9271 EV-DO RNC

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-23
9-23
............................................................................................................................................ 9-24
9-24
Processors .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-25

9-25
UNAC with ATCA chassis .................................................................................................................................................. 9-26
9-26
UNC with Netra servers ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-29
9-29
R1SR frame with Netra servers ......................................................................................................................................... 9-31
9-31
Software architecture
10
............................................................................................................................................................ 9-34
9-34
9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
About the 9256 OMPv4

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-3
About the 9256 OMPv4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

10-4
Differences from the OMPv2 ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6
10-6
About the 9256 OMPv4 hardware
................................................................................................................................... 10-8
10-8
About the 9256 OMPv4 software ..................................................................................................................................... 10-9

10-9
9256 OMPv4 connections to other network elements ............................................................................................ 10-10
10-10
9256 OMPv4 user interfaces ............................................................................................................................................ 10-11
10-11
Documentation and training ............................................................................................................................................. 10-12
10-12
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-13
10-13
About the 9256 OMPv2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
ix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9256 OMPv2 hardware ................................................................................................................................. 10-15

10-15
Impact of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet
About the 9256 OMPv2 software
.............................................................................................................. 10-17
10-17
.................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10-18
9256 OMPv2 connections to other network elements ............................................................................................ 10-19

10-19
OMP versions per Access Manager ............................................................................................................................... 10-21
10-21
9256 OMPv2 user interfaces
........................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10-22

10-23
11
9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
About the 9253 OMC-RAN
............................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11-3
About the 9253 OMC-RAN hardware ............................................................................................................................ 11-4

11-4
About the OMC-RAN Solution ......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11-5
About the 9253 OMC-RAN software
............................................................................................................................. 11-6
11-6
9253 OMC-RAN connections to other network elements ....................................................................................... 11-7

11-7
9253 OMC-RAN user interfaces
...................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11-8

11-10
12
9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN
Compact)
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact ............................................................................................................................ 12-3

12-3
9254 OMC-RAN Compact compared with the 9253 OMC-RAN ....................................................................... 12-4
12-4
About the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet
...................................................................................................................... 12-5
12-5
Configurations of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet
................................................................................................ 12-8
12-8
About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact hardware ...................................................................................................... 12-10

12-10
About the OMC-RAN Solution ...................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12-13
About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact software
....................................................................................................... 12-14
12-14
9254 OMC-RAN Compact connections to other network elements ................................................................. 12-15

12-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
x
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9254 OMC-RAN Compact user interfaces ................................................................................................................. 12-16

12-16
12-18
13
Local Maintenance Terminal

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
About the LMT
....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13-2

14
............................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13-4
Remote Maintenance Terminal

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
About the RMT
....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14-2
Documentation and Training .............................................................................................................................................. 14-4

14-4
15
9259 Over-The-Air-Function (9259 OTAF)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
About 9259 OTAF
................................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15-2
Components of the OTA Network .................................................................................................................................... 15-4

15-4
About the 9259 OTAF hardware
...................................................................................................................................... 15-7
15-7
About the 9259 OTAF software ........................................................................................................................................ 15-9

15-9
9259 OTAF connections to other network elements ............................................................................................... 15-10
15-10
9259 OTAF user interfaces ............................................................................................................................................... 15-12
15-12
15-13
16
9980 Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation (PAEC)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
About the 9980 PAEC application
................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16-2
About traditional acoustic echo cancellation ................................................................................................................ 16-4

16-4
How the 9980 PAEC application works for EVRC and EVRC-B traffic .......................................................... 16-5
16-5
How the 9980 PAEC application works for G.711u traffic ..................................................................................... 16-8
16-8
About the 9980 PAEC
....................................................................................................................................................... 16-10
16-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware requirements for the 9980 PAEC application
....................................................................................... 16-14
16-14
9980 PAEC application connections to other network elements ........................................................................ 16-17

16-17
9980 PAEC application user interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 16-18
16-18
16-19
17
Connections between network elements

Network interconnections
18
................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
CDMA features
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
About Alcatel-Lucent CDMA features

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-2
18-2
Features defined ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-3

18-3
Obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features and additional capacity
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18-4
FAF and QFAF method ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-5

18-5
LKDI software license generation and delivery method
......................................................................................... 18-9
18-9
9281 Packet Switch method ............................................................................................................................................. 18-16

18-16
19
CDMA Backhaul Networks

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
About 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Backhaul Networks

3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Backhaul Networks .................................................................................................. 19-2
19-2
Frame Relay Backhaul
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19-5
About Frame Relay Backhaul ............................................................................................................................................ 19-6

19-6
IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul ................................................................................................................................................................. 19-8
19-8
Hardware for IP Backhaul
................................................................................................................................................ 19-12
19-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software for IP Backhaul .................................................................................................................................................. 19-13

19-13
User interfaces for IP Backhaul ...................................................................................................................................... 19-14
19-14
Documentation and training for IP Backhaul
............................................................................................................ 19-15
19-15
Ethernet Backhaul
About Ethernet Backhaul .................................................................................................................................................. 19-16
19-16
Basic EBH configuration
.................................................................................................................................................. 19-18
19-18
About EBH network architecture ................................................................................................................................... 19-19

19-19
Hardware for Ethernet Backhaul .................................................................................................................................... 19-20
19-20
Software for Ethernet Backhaul
..................................................................................................................................... 19-21
19-21
Ethernet Backhaul connections to other network elements .................................................................................. 19-22

19-22
User interfaces for Ethernet Backhaul
......................................................................................................................... 19-23
19-23
Documentation and training for Ethernet Backhaul ................................................................................................ 19-24

19-24
A
Quick reference guide to connections between network elements

Network interconnections ..................................................................................................................................................... A-1
A-1
History of revisions
Revisions to this document ................................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-1
Quick reference guide to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA and 1xEV-DO base stations

Guide to CDMA base stations ............................................................................................................................................. C-1
C-1
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xiii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xiv
List of tables
4-1
General documentation on the MMCv4
......................................................................................................... 4-13
4-2
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent MMCv2 ........................................................................... 4-24
4-3
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent MMCv1 ........................................................................... 4-34
4-4
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9290 MM-APCC
4-5
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network 9290 Mobility Manager training
4-6
Comparison of AP hardware types
4-7
Applications per Access Manager ..................................................................................................................... 4-65
4-8
Customer documentation for each application
4-9
OMP versions per Access Manager in Release 37.0
7-1
Base station component acronyms
11-1
9253 OMC-RAN interfaces and their functions
12-1
9254 OMC-RAN Compact interfaces and their functions
16-1
Technical specifications of 9980 PAEC chassis
17-1
Connections between network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network ............................... 17-3
18-1
Documentation on software licensing
A-1
Connections between network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
C-1
Guide to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations
......................................................... 4-47
...................................................... 4-48
................................................................................................................... 4-61
............................................................................................. 4-67
.................................................................................. 4-69
..................................................................................................................... 7-6
.......................................................................................... 11-8
.................................................................... 12-16
........................................................................................ 16-12
........................................................................................................... 18-14
................................ A-1
............................................................................................... C-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xv
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xvi
List of figures
1-1
3G1X CDMA & EVDO Network
....................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2
CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC)
2-1
Conceptual view of a wireless network ............................................................................................................. 2-6
2-2
3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (I-MSC)
2-3
3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC) ............................................................................................... 2-20
2-4
TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network (I-MSC)
2-5
3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data handled by PCF on PHE2 (I-MSC)
2-6
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network with
3G1X CDMA Network (I-MSC) ................................................................................................................... 2-29
2-7
Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network
2-8
Master Diagram of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC)
3-1
Components of the I-MSC
3-2
Components of the MPC ......................................................................................................................................... 3-6
4-1
Minimum/maximum cabinet configuration for the MMCv4
4-2
MMCv4 software architecture
4-3
MMCv4 connections .............................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4-4
MMCv2 UNC frame
4-5
MMCv2 software architecture ............................................................................................................................ 4-19
4-6
MMCv2 connections .............................................................................................................................................. 4-22
4-7
MMC software architecture
4-8
MMCv1 connections
4-9
9290 MM base frame ............................................................................................................................................. 4-39
4-10
Base Universal Network Cabinet
4-11
Growth Universal Network Cabinet ................................................................................................................. 4-41
............................................................................................................. 1-3
........................................................................................... 2-19
........................................................................................... 2-22
....... 2-25
..... 2-30
............................ 2-34
..................................................................................................................................... 3-4
................................................................... 4-6
.............................................................................................................................. 4-8
.............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
................................................................................................................................ 4-29
............................................................................................................................................ 4-32
..................................................................................................................... 4-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xvii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12
9290 MM software architecture ......................................................................................................................... 4-42
4-13
9290 MM connections ........................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4-14
ECP Complex control of network operations
6-1
9281 Packet Switch ................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6-5
6-2
9281 Packet Switch Communications Module
6-3
SM-XC shelf layout
6-4
Hardware components of the PSm
6-5
9281 Packet Switch architecture and interfaces ........................................................................................... 6-19
6-6
9281 Packet Switch Compact architecture and interfaces
....................................................................... 6-27
6-7
9281 Packet Switch Compact architecture and interfaces
....................................................................... 6-32
6-8
PCF on PHE2 as part of the MSC ..................................................................................................................... 6-52
7-1
Conceptual view of base stations and cells
7-2
9228 Base Station Macro outdoor cabinet ........................................................................................................ 7-7
7-3
9228 Base Station Macro Outdoor Cabinet, with labels
7-4
9228 Base Station Macro Indoor Cabinet Layout, with labels
8-1
3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data handled by the PCF on PHE2
9-1
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network used
with 3G1X CDMA Network .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
9-2
Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network
9-3
9271 EV-DO RAS system reference diagram
9-4
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS network connections
9-5
9271 EV-DO RNC on ATCA chassis
9-6
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) used for 9271 EV-DO RNC
9-7
R1SR frame used for 9271 EV-DO RNC
9-8
9271 EV-DO RNC and BSOC software
10-1
9256 OMPv2
11-1
Sun Netra 1280 server used for the 9253 OMC-RAN
............................................................................................... 4-52
............................................................................................... 6-8
............................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6-12
................................................................................................................... 6-16
...................................................................................................... 7-3
............................................................................. 7-8
................................................................. 7-9
..................... 8-3
..... 9-11
.............................................................................................. 9-15
................................................................................. 9-19
............................................................................................................... 9-26
.......................................................... 9-30
..................................................................................................... 9-32
......................................................................................................... 9-34
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-16
10-16
....................................................................... 11-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xviii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-2
9253 OMC-RAN software architecture
.......................................................................................................... 11-6
12-1
9254 OMC Compact Cabinet
12-2
Contents of the OMC-RAN Compact Cabinet with both 9256 OMP and 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact .................................................................................................................................................................. 12-9
12-9
12-3
Sun Netra 440 server used for the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, front view
............................. 12-11
12-4
Sun Netra 440 server used for the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, back view
............................. 12-12
12-5
9254 OMC-RAN Compact software architecture
15-1
The OTASP/OTAPA Network (OTA Network)
15-2
9259 OTAF hardware
15-3
9259 OTAF cluster connections
16-1
Traditional acoustic echo cancellation
16-2
Where packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for inter-MSC traffic
.............................................. 16-6
16-3
Where packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for intra-MSC traffic
.............................................. 16-7
16-4
Processing of target and reference packets in a G.711u call flow
16-5
Parts of the 9980 PAEC
16-6
Chassis diagram for 9980 PAEC application .............................................................................................. 16-14
17-1
18-1
Traditional FAF architecture
18-2
Traditional FAF process ........................................................................................................................................ 18-7
18-3
Software license key activation and management process
19-1
19-2
Converged IP Backhaul Network
19-3
Ethernet Backhaul basic transport configuration
............................................................................................................................. 12-6
.................................................................................... 12-14
........................................................................................... 15-4
............................................................................................................................................ 15-8
...................................................................................................................... 15-11
............................................................................................................ 16-4
......................................................... 16-9
...................................................................................................................................... 16-11
............................ 17-2
............................................................................................................................... 18-6
.................................................................... 18-12
............................ 19-4
................................................................................................................... 19-10
...................................................................................... 19-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xix
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xx
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This information product gives you a high-level tour of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network and of all the network elements in this network. From here on in this
document, the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network will be called the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network.
After reading this book you should be able to:
Describe the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network

Identify the network elements that make up the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
State the functionality of each network element
State where to find information on the protocols and physical connections between all
network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
Scope
This document is a high-level introduction to the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. In-depth
descriptions of individual components of network elements are not included here. For
readers who need more detailed information, references to related customer documents
are given throughout the document.
Supported software releases
In accordance with the CDMA Software Support Policy (401-005-100), CDMA Release
34.0 is declared as Discontinued Availability as of October 2011.
Information supporting Release 34 and earlier is no longer maintained and may be
removed from documents and the OLCS website.
If you are supporting MSCs using Release 34 or earlier, we recommend that you retain
the documents for that release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxi
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reason for reissue for Issue 5.1
Technical information that is added or changed for Issue 5.1 of this document is identified
in the following table.
Feature Feature Name or
ID
Reason for
(FID)
Changes
New or changed material
NA
In Release 37.0 the interactive diagrams do not work in the

epub version of the document. This document was corrected
to state that only the webdocs version of the interactive
diagrams work in Release 37.0.
To correct a
technical error
Reason for reissue for Issue 5
Technical information that is added or changed for Issue 5 of this document is identified
in the following table.
ID
Reason for
(FID)
Changes
NA
Interactive Network
Element Diagrams
To help you find network element descriptions more quickly,

two interactive diagrams have been added to this document.
For more on this, see Chapter 1, Interactive diagrams.
12092.0
Gigabit IP Backhaul
(NAR)
To support IP Backhaul on the PHE4, the following was

updated: Features (p. 6-47)
12092.1
Gigabit IP Backhaul
(INTL)
12092.2
Gigabit IP Backhaul
- Long Lead (NAR)
12092.3
Gigabit IP Backhaul
- Long Lead (INTL)
14300.81 ECP/DCS Interface

Over SCTP (FPS)
(NAR only)
14300.82 ECP/DCS Interface
Over SCTP (AM)
These features support the MMCv4/Packet Switch

SCTP/IP/Ethernet connection. The SCTP/IP/Ethernet
connection is needed because with the MMCv4 there is no
SS7 F-link between the Access Manager and the Packet
Switch, as there is with earlier Access Managers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ID
Reason for
(FID)
Changes
15616.1
In Release 37.0 the 9290 MMC was migrated to a new

hardware platform, the ATCA chassis, and called MMCv4.
14300.0
CDMA
Mobility
Server
Migrate
FMM/MMCv1/
MMCv2 AP to
ATCA platform
The following parts of this document have been added or

changed to describe the MMCv4:
new section: Mobility Manager Compact v4 (p. 4-4)
New material on the MMCv4 in the rest of Chapter 4,

Access Managers
Alcatel-Lucent now
has several MSC
offerings:
To explain the MPC and its relationship to the other MSCs,

the following material was revised or added:
Chapter 3, Mobile Switching Center (MSC)
I-MSC
Chapter 4, Access Managers
MPC (NEW)
Chapter 5, CDMA Mobility Server (CMS)
BSOC
Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) (p. 6-38)
See also the following changed graphics, which show the

differences between a 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network
using the I-MSC and a 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network
using the MPC:
14300.20 SIGTRAN M3UA

SG on ALU 9281
PS (INTL)
Figure 2-2, 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network

(I-MSC) (p. 2-19)
Figure 2-3, 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network

(MPC) (p. 2-20)
This feature implements the SIGTRAN M3UA PH on the

9281 PS so that the 9281 PS can perform as a signalling
gateway.
For more on this, see Support for the SIGTRAN M3UA
Signaling Gateway (SG) feature (p. 6-53).
15669.1
OMP Migration to
ATCA Platform
Co-resident with
ATCA MMCv4
In Release 37.0 the 9256 OMP was migrated to a new

hardware platform, the ATCA chassis, which resides with the
MMCv4 in the same Universal Network ATCA Cabinet
(UNAC).
The new version of the 9256 OMP is called the 9256 OMPv4.
The following parts of this document have been added or
revised for the 9256 OMPv4:
About the 9256 OMPv4 (p. 10-3)
OMP versions per Access Manager (p. 4-69)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxiii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ID
Reason for
(FID)
Changes
20000.0
In a Release 36.0 SU the EVDO RNC was migrated to a new

hardware platform, the ATCA chassis and called the ATCA
RNC.
Introduction of
ATCA-based EVDO
RNC
Introduction of the ATCA RNC caused the following changes

to this document:
updates to this section: 9271 EV-DO RAS (p. 9-3)
this new section: About the 9271 EV-DO RNC

(p. 9-23)
NA
The OMP EMS GUI

is discontinued in
Release 37.0. A
command-based
OMP tool is
provided for AP
Frame
Configuration on
OMPv2 and
OMPv4.
This document has been updated to state that the OMP EMS
is not available from Release 37.0 on.
NA
To remove mention
of the 9270 1X
RNC
All information about the 9270 1X RNC was removed, since

the 9270 1X RNC is not available in Release 37.0.
NA
NA
The 9900 Wireless Network Guardian (WNG) is not

considered part of the CDMA network so all mention of the
9900 WNG has been removed from this document.
NA
To reflect all the

enhancements and
changes in this
release
The definitions in Network-related terms used in this

chapter (p. 2-7) have been updated.
The network diagrams in Chapter 2, Network architecture
and throughout the document have been updated.
The glossary has been updated.

NA
New functionality
To reflect new functionality, Multiple AEC boards and

additional codecs of EVRC-B and G.711u, Chapter 16, 9980
Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation (PAEC) was updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxiv
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To obtain technical support, documentation, and training or submit feedback
The Online Customer Support (OLCS) web site, http://support.alcatel-lucent.com,

provides access to technical support, related documentation, related training, and
feedback tools. The site also provides account registration for new users.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxv
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
xxvi
1
Overview
Purpose
This topic contains two interactive diagrams. Use the diagrams to find information on any
of the network elements shown in the diagrams.
webdocs version is interactive
The diagrams work interactively if you are viewing this document through webdocs
(HTML).
PDF and eReader versions is not interactive
The diagrams will not work interactively if you are viewing this document in PDF form
or in an eReader format.
Contents
Interactive diagram 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC)
1-2
Interactive diagram CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC)
1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
1-1
Interactive diagram 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network

(I-MSC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interactive diagram 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network

(I-MSC)
Open in webdocs (html)
To use an interactive version of this document, open the document in webdocs, the online
html version.
I-MSC version
Click on any network element in the following diagram to access information about that
network element.
Note: To get back to the diagram from the information page, click on your browser's
Back button.
Figure 1-1 3G1X CDMA & EVDO Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
1-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open in webdocs (html)
To use an interactive version of this document, open the document in webdocs, the online
html version.
MPC version
Click on any network element in the following diagram to access information about that
network element.
Note: To get back to the diagram from the information page, click on your browser's
Back button.
Figure 1-2 CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
1-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
1-4
2
Overview
Purpose
This document describes the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, the network
elements that make up that network, and the service-specific networks within the 3G1X
and 1xEV-DO Network.
One network
Alcatel-Lucent has one Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) wireless network, the
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, hereafter called the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network. The 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network is described in this document.
Many network elements
Many network elements are described in this document. All the network elements
described in this document belong to the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
Multiple services
To meet the growing and diversified needs of wireless customers, Alcatel-Lucent has
enriched its CDMA wireless network by offering a variety of wireless services, including
packet voice and packet data services. Though the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network remains
one physical network, the network can be configured to provide many different services.
This is done by creating service-specific networks within the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network.
What is a service-specific network?
A service-specific network is a set of network elements of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO

Network that have been configured to provide a specific service. All Alcatel-Lucent
service-specific networks described in this document, however, are still CDMA-based
and are still part of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is a network element?
A network element (NE) is a unique entity within the network. Each NE consists of
multiple physical and logical resources, which can be configured and monitored
separately, or as a group. For example, a single base station would be considered a
network element.
Shared network elements
The service-specific networks use a variety of network elements. Some network elements,
such as base stations, are shared between all the service-specific networks. Other network
elements are only used by one service-specific network. Other network elements are used
by several service-specific networks.
Regardless of whether the network elements are shared between service-specific networks
or not, all of the network elements presented in this document are part of the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network.
Benefits of the service-specific network approach
The use of service-specific networks within one physical network provides the following
benefits for the service provider:
The sharing of network elements between Alcatel-Lucent service-specific networks

reduces capital expenses for the service provider.
The use of common OA&M platforms reduces the cost of training and saves time that
would be spent in learning new user interfaces.
Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes the functions of a wireless network, gives a basic description of a
wireless network, and then provides an overview of the service-specific networks within
the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
Purpose of this document
The rest of this document gives an overview of the many network elements provided by
Alcatel-Lucent that work together to make these service-specific networks possible.
Contents
2-4
Conceptual view of a wireless network
2-5
Network-related terms used in this chapter
2-7
About call flows
2-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-2
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-17
3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network
2-18
TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network
2-21
2-24
9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network
2-27
2-31
Master Diagram
2-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-3
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section explains the basic components and basic functionality of every wireless
network.
Contents
2-5
2-7
About call flows
2-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is a wireless network?
In this document the term wireless network is defined as all the facilities that make
wireless service possible.
Three functions
Any wireless network, regardless of the company that provides the wireless network,
must carry out the following three functions:
Bearer function
Control function
OA&M function
What is the bearer function?
The bearer function is carried out by network elements that provide a physical
transmission path for the wireless call. The bearer function is shown in red in Figure 2-1,
Conceptual view of a wireless network (p. 2-6), and lines that carry bearer information
are shown with a solid red line.
What is the control function?
The control function is carried out by network elements that ensure that the wireless call
is routed, connected, tracked, and charged for. The control function is shown in blue in
Figure 2-1, Conceptual view of a wireless network (p. 2-6), and lines that carry control
information are shown with a blue dashed line.
What is the OA&M function?
The OA&M function is carried out by network elements that provide Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) support for the wireless network. OA&M
NEs provide interfaces that are used by the service provider personnel who maintain the
wireless network. The OA&M function is shown in yellow in Figure 2-1, Conceptual
view of a wireless network (p. 2-6), and lines that carry OA&M information are shown
with a dot and dash yellow line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conceptual view
Figure 2-1 Conceptual view of a wireless network
Legend:
Call Control hardware
Network elements performing the call control function
Bearer hardware
Network elements performing the bearer function
Switching and Switching

hardware
Network elements performing the switching function
Dot and dash line, yellow
OA&M function
Dash line, blue
Control function
Solid line, red
Bearer function
Double solid line, black
Two or three of the functions combined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Network-related terms used in this chapter are defined here. Note that the glossary
contains these and other network-related terms.
1xEV-DO Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is using the 1xEV-DO air interface.

A base station is a transmission and reception station in a fixed location that is used to
handle cellular traffic and consists of one or more receive/transmit antennas, microwave
dishes, and electronic circuitry. The base station serves as a bridge between all mobile
users in a cell and connects mobile units to the Mobile Switching Center.
For more information on base stations, see Chapter 7, Base stations.
1xEV-DO Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)
A scaled-back version of the Access Manager that provides configuration and fault
management for cell equipment. The BSOC performs the role of an Access Manager,
excluding CDMA call processing, and eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet
Switch. The BSOC is used only in the Standalone version of the 9271 EV-DO RAS.
For more information on the BSOC, see Chapter 9, 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System
(9271 EV-DO RAS).
3G1X CDMA Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is using the 3G1X CDMA air interface.
3G1X (Frame Relay) Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is using the 3G1X CDMA air interface and supports
Frame Relay Backhaul.
9253/9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253/9254 OMC-RAN)
A comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)-based Operations, Administration and

Maintenance (OA&M) platform that provides enhanced OA&M capabilities for the 3G1X
and 1xEV-DO Network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on the 9253 OMC-RAN, see Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN).
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact is a scaled-back version of the 9253 OMC-RAN that can
be co-located with the 9256 OMP in a 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet. For more
information about the 9254 OMC Compact, refer to Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact).
A version of the Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) that has been altered
slightly to hold both the 9256 OMP and 9254 OMC-RAN Compact in the same frame.
9256 OMP
A required OA&M component that serves as a user interface and back-end OA&M
processing platform for Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also
hosts special tools such as Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits
and software updates, service measurement collection, and so forth.
For more information on the 9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and
Management Platform (9256 OMP).
9281 Packet Switch (PS)
Network element that provides wireless network switching for voice and data calls to and
from the wireless subscriber. The 9281 Packet Switch also provides a wireless interface
into the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet
Switch was formerly called the 5ESS Switch.
For more information on the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch, see Chapter 6, 9281
Packet Switches.
9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface
Network entity in the CMS that supports connection control and provides all the network
signalling (ISUP, SIP-I, IS-41) and media gateway control interfaces (H.248) for the
CMS.
For more information on the 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface, see 9290
Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (p. 5-5).
9290 Mobility Manager Compact (9290 MMC)
Access manager used within the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Access Manager
A network element that controls the operation of a wireless network and is responsible for
mobility management, call processing, network maintenance, technician interfaces, and
network integrity.
For more information on Access Managers and on the Access Managers provided by
Alcatel-Lucent, see Chapter 4, Access Managers.
Access Terminal (AT)
Originally, the data terminal used for sending packet data calls over the air interface.
Now, the term also includes equipment for sending and receiving voice calls, and has
come to have the same meaning as Mobile Unit.
Aggregation Router (AR)
A network element that performs route aggregation, also known as supernetting.

Supernetting forms a network from a combination of two or more networks (or subnets)
with a common Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) prefix. The new prefix for the
combined network aggregates the prefixes of the constituent networks.
ANSI-41 Network
Public network that operates according to the ANSI-41 standard. ANSI-41 is a standard
for identifying and authenticating users and routing calls on mobile phone networks. The
standard also defines how users are identified and calls are routed when the user is
roaming across different networks.
Backhaul Network
The transport network used to connect the base stations to the Access Manager and/or to
the 9271 EV-DO RNC.
For more information on Alcatel-Lucent backhaul networks, see Chapter 19, CDMA
Backhaul Networks.
Base station
A transmission and reception station in a fixed location that is used to handle cellular
traffic and consists of one or more receive/transmit antennas, microwave dishes, and
electronic circuitry. The base station serves as a bridge between all mobile users in a cell
and connects mobile units to the Mobile Switching Center.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A next-generation soft switch that hosts all network signalling in the Mobile Packet Core
(MPC). CMS supports a variety of call models and connection control mechanisms to
support current and future service provider applications. In the MPC, the CMS fills the
function of the Mobile Switching Center evolved (MSCe). The CMS is made up of two
components: the 9290 MMC and the 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface.
Circuit Service Network
Network that conveys voice data.

Ethernet Backhaul (EBH)
A solution that allows CDMA applications to be transported using Internet Protocol over
Ethernet facilities. EBH is a native Ethernet solution that takes advantage of the Ethernet
connectivity within the MSC, introduced with IP Backhaul (IPBH), and extends it to the
cell site and within the base stations.
For more information on the Alcatel-Lucent Ethernet Backhaul network, see Chapter 19,
CDMA Backhaul Networks.
Uses the LAPD protocol to support circuit voice, TrFO/RTO, and 1X packet data
services. Frame Relay backhaul cannot provide the flexibility that IP backhaul provides.
Integrated MSC (I-MSC)
The traditional Alcatel-Lucent MSC. The I-MSC contains all of the control and switching
elements for the wireless network. The I-MSC also performs bearer and call control and
OA&M for the wireless network.
For more information on the I-MSC, see About the I-MSC (p. 3-4).
Inter-MSC/RNC Control Network
Network that handles communications between Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs) and
Radio Network Controllers (RNCs).
IP Backhaul (IPBH)
IP Backhaul refers to using Internet Protocol (IP) as a standardized network layer for
transferring signalling and bearer traffic between network elements, such as the Base
Transceiver Stations (BTSs), 9281 Packet Switch, Radio Network Controller (RNC) and
Access Manager, within the Radio Access Network (RAN).
For more information on the Alcatel-Lucent IP Backhaul network, see Chapter 19,
CDMA Backhaul Networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Core
Service Provider's core IP network.

IP/MPLS Network
Service Provider Network that provides both label-based switching (MPLS) and non-label
based switching (IP) of packets.
See also MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS).
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
An architectural framework, designed by the 3GPP standards body, that is a platform for
delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based multimedia Internet-like services to
end-users. The IMS platform provides a common set of functions and procedures for
session control, bearer control, policy, and charging. When these functions and
procedures are used by an application the application is said to be IMS-enabled.
MCC/TLWS
Master Control Center (MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station (TLWS), which is the user
interface for the 9281 Packet Switch.
Media Gateway (MGW)
A network element that provides a gateway between disparate networks such as Public
Switch Telephone Networks (PSTNs), Next Generation Networks (NGNs), and Public
Branch eXchanges (PBXs).
Mixed-Mode base station (BS)
Alcatel-Lucent base station that supports both the 3G1X CDMA air interface and the
1xEV-DO air interface.
Mobile Packet Core (MPC)
An enhanced MSC. The MPC combines the rich feature set and reliability of the
Integrated MSC (I-MSC) with the introduction of the 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling
Interface and the addition of the PSG configuration and application option to the 9281
Packet Switch (PS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on the MPC, see About the MPC (p. 3-6).
Network element that contains all of the control and switching elements for the wireless
network. The MSC performs bearer, control and OA&M functions for the wireless
network.
For more information on the MSC, see Chapter 3, Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
Mobile units
Handheld (portable) units that provide a standardized interface between the user and the
base station. When they are turned on (powered up) mobile units maintain radio
communication with the base stations, even when not in use. Mobile units are now often
called Access Terminals (ATs) and in addition to being simple voice-only units can also
be laptop computers, hand-held devices such as Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs), or
multi-mode mobile phones that support several wireless air interfaces.
Multi-Layer Switch (MLS)
A hardware-based switch that acts as a router. An MLS combines layer 2, 3, and 4

switching technologies and provides high-speed scalability with low latency. The MLS
accomplishes this combination of high-speed scalability with low latency by using huge
filter tables based on the criteria designed by the network administrator.
MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS)
MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS) provides connection-oriented (label based)

switching in the same network where IP provides connectionless IP forwarding by
providing a set procedures for augmenting network layer packets with label stacks
thereby turning them into labeled packets. The fundamental MPLS building blocks are:
1) the label-swapping based forwarding (label switching) in conjunction with the network
layer routing, 2) the assignment and the distribution of label bindings for the
establishment of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) using the control-driven model, 3) the
separation of the control and label-swapping based forwarding (label switching)
components.
Network element
A unique entity within the network. Each NE consists of multiple physical and logical
resources, which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The NE and
the NEs physical and logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an element
or network management system. An example of a single network element is a single base
station.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA&M Network
A private Internet Protocol Wide Area Network (IP-WAN) that links the service provider's
Central Offices (COs) together and is used by the service provider for OA&M of service
provider equipment.
OA&M Platform
Management tools that typically provide Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

(OA&M) support for a single Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
For more information on Alcatel-Lucent user interfaces, see Guide to all user interfaces
(p. 3-9) and Training on all user interfaces (p. 3-9). See also Chapter 10, 9256
Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP), Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN), Chapter 13, Local
Maintenance Terminal , and Chapter 14, Remote Maintenance Terminal .
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
Generic name given to functions such as technical interfaces, diagnostics, service

measurements, and status reports. OA&M tasks include such areas as fault, configuration,
accounting, performance, and security management. These capabilities are often referred
to as FCAPS (after the first letter of each word).
For more information on Alcatel-Lucent user interfaces, see Guide to all user interfaces
(p. 3-9) and Training on all user interfaces (p. 3-9). See also Chapter 10, 9256
Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP), Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN), Chapter 12, 9254
Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN
Compact), Chapter 13, Local Maintenance Terminal , and Chapter 14, Remote
Maintenance Terminal
Other Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs)
The MSC is the network element that contains all of the control and switching elements
for the wireless network. The MSC performs bearer, control and OA&M functions for the
wireless network.
MSCs link to other MSCs, which may or may not be inside the service provider's
network.
For more information on the MSC, see Chapter 3, Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
Packet Core Network
An IP network established and operated by a service provider to interconnect the service

provider's MSCs and other wireless systems. The Packet Core Network is used to
interconnect MSCs for Transcoder Free Operation/Remote Transcoding Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(TrFO/RTO) calls and for Soft Handoff Networks. TrFO/RTO requires additional
switching and routing equipment and signalling interfaces beyond what is shown in this
chapter. For more on TrFO/RTO, see TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network (p. 2-21).
Packet Data Network (PDN)
A network established and operated by a service provider for the specific purpose of
providing data transmission services for the public. This network is used to interconnect
the MSC, Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN), and other data systems for packet data
calls. Note that 3G1X CDMA packet data and 1xEV-DO packet data both go through the
same Packet Data Network.
Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN)
Network element that acts as the connection point between the RAN and IP networks.
The PDSN is responsible for managing the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) between the
service provider's core IP network and the mobile unit or Access Terminal (AT).
Packet Service Network
Network that conveys packet data.

A configuration and application option to the 9281 Packet Switch (PS) that includes an
H.248 interface to the MM-SI. The PSG is used in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC) Access
Manager. The PSG supports basic Media Gateway functions as well as supporting
wireless backhaul and features via the H.248 interface.
For more information on the Packet Switch Gateway, see Packet Switch Gateway
(PSG) (p. 6-38).
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Network that provides public telephone service. In other words, the portion of the total
network that provides the capability to interconnect any home or office in the country
with any other.
Router
A device that connects two or more networks and can direct traffic based on addresses.
SHO Transport Network
Network that performs soft handoff (SHO) transport.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stand Alone Home Location Register (S-HLR)
A stand-alone network element that serves as the Home Location Register (HLR).
The Home Location Register (HLR) is a central database that contains information
required to allow service provider access and support services on a wireless network.
Note that the Home Location Register (HLR) can be integrated into the call control
function instead of being a separate network element.
T1/E1 Concentrator
A piece of circuit-switched network equipment that allows lower-level Time Division

Multiplex (TDM) bit streams, such as DS0 bit streams, to be rearranged and
interconnected among higher-level TDM signals, such as DS1 bit streams.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-15
About call flows
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About call flows

What is a call flow?
A call flow is a detailed description of how a call progresses through a network, from the
origination of the call to the call completion. A call flow is sometimes called a voice path.
Though studying call flows is a good way to learn how a network operates, it is outside
the scope of this document to provide detailed descriptions of call flows through the
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. For call flow information for the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, see the sources listed below.
CDMA Circuit Voice call flows
For a detailed explanation of call flows for the CDMA Circuit Voice network, see the
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Wireless Network Overview class, CL1000C/W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-16
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
What types of service-specific wireless networks does Alcatel-Lucent currently offer?

What are these networks used for? These and other questions about the Alcatel-Lucent
current wireless networks offerings are answered in this section.
Contents
2-18
2-21
2-24
2-27
2-31
Master Diagram
2-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is CDMA?
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a digital wireless air interface and networking
standard based on the principle of spread-spectrum techniques, which allows multiple
users to access the network simultaneously on the same carrier frequency.
What is a circuit voice network?
In traditional telephony, a circuit voice network is a circuit-switching network that carries

voice only traffic and carries it over a dedicated connection that is set up for the life of the
call and then disbanded.
What is circuit switching?
Circuit switching is a communications paradigm that sets up a constant bit rate and
constant delay connection between two nodes for their exclusive use for the duration of
the communication.
Circuit switching with wireless calls
For a wireless call, a CDMA circuit voice call is actually transmitted in packet form
between the mobile unit and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). However, the wireless
call goes out from the MSC as a circuit call and uses circuit switching between MSCs.
Network diagram (I-MSC)
The following diagram shows the version of the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network that
is based on the Integrated MSC (I-MSC). In the diagram the lines show logical data flows
between network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (I-MSC)
For definitions of network elements
The I-MSC and all of the network elements shown in the diagram are defined in
Network-related terms used in this chapter (p. 2-7).
Network diagram (MPC)
The following diagram shows the version of the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network that
is based on the Mobile Packet Core (MPC). In the diagram the lines show logical data
flows between network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC)
The MPC and all of the network elements shown in the diagram are defined in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is TrFO/RTO?
Transcoder Free Operation/Remote Transcoding Operation (TrFO/RTO) is an optional

feature that is used as the basis of the TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network. TrFO/RTO
eliminates the use of a vocoder or transcode process on a mobile-to-mobile call. Thus, the
TrFO/RTO feature provides more efficient transmission of voice calls within a service
provider's network and provides a perceptible improvement in voice quality for
mobile-to-mobile voice calls by eliminating unnecessary voice encoding and decoding
from the calls.
What is packet trunking?
Packet trunking stands for use of packet trunks. A packet trunk is an Ethernet connection
used for sending an IP-based voice media stream between two Mobile Switching Center
(MSCs) or between an MSC and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The
TrFO/RTO feature uses packet trunking to eliminate vocoding in mobile-to-mobile calls.
What is the TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network?
The TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network is a network that uses the TrFO/RTO feature to
provide packet trunking for the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network. This network does
not provide end to end packet data function, but it does provide for a smoother
transmission of information through the trunk part of the network and less delay because
less vocoding is used.
How it works
The TrFO/RTO feature provides the capability to transport compressed voice across the
service providers network. If the call is mobile-to-mobile with compatible codecs, the
network does not need to decode and re-encode the voice. If the call is between a mobile
and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or is a mobile-to-mobile call with
incompatible codecs, the decoding of the voice to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is done
only once, at the edge of the service providers network, instead of twice, as is done in a
typical 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network call.
Benefits
Benefits of the TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network include the following:
Fewer transmission facilities.

No need for vocoders.
Reduced future capital expenditure (CAPEX) and operations expenditure (OPEX)
cost.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A perceptible improvement in voice quality for mobile-to-mobile voice calls.

Eliminating voice encoding and decoding removes delay in the call, which the users
perceive as higher quality.
A more efficient transmission of voice calls within a service provider's network.

A time slot interchange (TSI) relief on the 9281 Packet Switch (PS) since the 9281
Packet Switch is not needed for packet terminations.
Network diagram
The following diagram shows the TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network. In the diagram
the lines show logical data flows between network elements.
Figure 2-4 TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network (I-MSC)
Important! TrFO/RTO requires additional switching and routing equipment and

signalling interfaces beyond what is shown in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For further information on TrFO/RTO
For further information on TrFO/RTO, see the TrFO/RTO Planning and Implementation
Guide , 401-710-093.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
One option is available to provide 3G1X CDMA packet data: Use of the PCF on PHE2
feature. This topic gives an overview of use of the PCF on PHE2 feature in the 3G1X
CDMA Packet Data Network.
What is the 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network?
The 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network is a network that provides wireless network
switching for data calls, and a wireless data interface into the PDSN.
Benefits
Benefits of the 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network include the ability to provide 1X
packet data services:
In areas where there is no 1xEV-DO coverage

In areas where 1xEV-DO coverage is available but the 1xEV-DO resource is in
overload
To older mobile units that do not support 1xEV-DO

To users who do not subscribe to 1xEV-DO service.
What is the PCF on PHE2 feature?
The Packet Control Function (PCF) on the Protocol Handler ETHERNET model 2
(PHE2) feature is an implementation of the PCF functionality on the PHE2 hardware
inside the 9281 Packet Switch. This implementation allows 3G1X CDMA data calls to be
processed within the 9281 Packet Switch and sent over Ethernet to the PDSN.
Diagram with PCF on PHE2
The following diagram shows the 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data
being handled by the PCF on the PHE2 inside the 9281 Packet Switch. In the diagram the
lines show logical data flows between network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data handled by PCF on
PHE2 (I-MSC)
For more information
For more information on the PCF on PHE2, see Chapter 8, CDMA 3G1X Packet Data
Service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Another option for packet data
Alcatel-Lucent provides another option for adding packet data processing to an existing
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network: the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO
RAS). The 9271 EV-DO RAS can co-exist in a service provider's network with the 3G1X
CDMA packet data options described here. For more information on the 9271 EV-DO
RAS see 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network (p. 2-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is 1xEV-DO?
1xEV-DO is an acronym that stands for 1x Evolutionary-Data Optimized.

1xEV-DO is typically used as the name of a CDMA standard that has been designed
specifically to provide packet data service.
When used to represent the Alcatel-Lucent 1xEV-DO product, this acronym is spelled
EV-DO and prefaced by the number 9271 to indicate the Alcatel-Lucent 1xEV-DO
product.
What is the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS)?
The 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) is a packet data access
network using the 1xEV-DO air interface that can connect to an IP-based network. The
Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO RAS provides a high-speed, high-capacity access solution
targeting the increased market demand for wireless data and Internet applications.
Benefits
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data
Network has the following benefits:
Adds a high-speed data technology that gives a higher throughput and is faster than
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Enhanced Data Rates For GSM Evolution
(EDGE), or Wideband CDMA (W-CDMA).
Adds a low-cost, overlay solution that is widely applicable and can be used to overlay
many different kinds of networks, including CDMA networks, non-CDMA networks,
and non-Alcatel Lucent networks.
Gives service providers the ability to move from circuit services to different services
such as Voice Over IP (VoIP), Broadcast/Multicast Services (BCMCS), and Quality of
Service (QoS).
Gives new revenue opportunities for service providers.

Makes possible a common transport from the base station to the MSC that can do both
voice and broadband data. This saves on operational expenses because there is a
single network that is managed as a single instance, as opposed to multiple networks
that have different OA&M interfaces and have to be managed separately.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When to use this network
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Network is a
cost-effective high-capacity solution for packet data traffic. The 9271 EV-DO RAS can be
used for data-intensive applications to increase revenue, such as e-mail of video clips,
streaming video, Push To Talk, voice over IP, video telephony, a broadcast service, or
high-speed data applications, such as downloading songs or video.
Deployment options
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network can be deployed as either of
the following options:
A 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network integrated with the 3G1X CDMA Circuit
Voice Network. This option is called the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data
Network.
A 1xEV-DO only system. This option is called the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS
Packet Data Network.
Note that these two deployment options are mutually exclusive. You cannot have both at
the same time.
How it works
The Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS typically is configured with shared signalling. The
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS typically has two separate backhaul networks, one for the
1xEV-DO network and one for the CDMA network, and uses Cisco High-Level Data
Link (cHDLC), Multi-Link Point-To-Point Protocol (MLPPP), or Ethernet for the
transport layer.
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network with a 3G1X CDMA Network
Figure 2-6, Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network with 3G1X CDMA Network (I-MSC) (p. 2-29) shows the Mixed-mode
9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network with a
3G1X CDMA Network. In the diagram the lines show logical data flows between
network elements.
Important! For simplification purposes, the diagram only covers IP Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-6 Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network with 3G1X CDMA Network (I-MSC)
All of the network elements shown in the diagram are defined in Network-related terms
used in this chapter (p. 2-7).
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network
Figure 2-7, Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network (p. 2-30) shows the Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271
EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network. The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data
Network uses IP signalling and has a single backhaul to the CDMA network with either
cHDLC, MLPPP, or Ethernet for the transport layer. In the diagram the lines show logical
data flows between network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-7 Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network
All of the network elements shown in the diagram are defined in Network-related terms
For more information on the 9271 EV-DO RAS
For more information on the 9271 EV-DO RAS, see Chapter 9, 9271 EV-DO Radio
Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is a backhaul network?
In telecommunications, backhauling is concerned with transporting traffic between

distributed sites and more centralized points of presence. In this document, backhaul
network is defined as the transport network used to connect the base stations to the MSC
and/or 9271 EV-DO RNC.
Types of backhaul
The following types of backhaul networks exist in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:
Ethernet Backhaul
IP Backhaul
1xEV-DO Backhaul
What is Frame Relay Backhaul?
Frame Relay Backhaul uses the LAPD protocol to support circuit voice, TrFO/RTO, and
1X packet data services. Frame Relay backhaul is an older technology that cannot provide
the flexibility that IP backhaul provides.
What is Ethernet Backhaul?
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) is a solution that allows CDMA applications to be transported

using Internet Protocol over Ethernet facilities. EBH is a native Ethernet solution that
takes advantage of the Ethernet connectivity within the MSC, introduced with IPBH, and
extends it to the cell site and within the base stations.
What is IP Backhaul?
IP Backhaul is defined as using Internet Protocol (IP) as a standardized network layer for
Transceiver Station (BTS), 9281 Packet Switch, Radio Network Controller (RNC) and
Access Manager, within the Radio Access Network (RAN).
What is 1xEV-DO Backhaul?
1xEV-DO Backhaul is a form of IP Backhaul that is used only by 1xEV-DO network

elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backhaul in the network
The types of backhaul in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network are shown in the four base
stations on the left side of Figure 2-8, Master Diagram of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC) (p. 2-34).
The top left base station is a 3G1X Base Station that uses Frame Relay Backhaul.
The second base station on the left is a 3G1X Base Station that uses IP Backhaul.
The third base station on the left-hand side is a Mixed-mode Base Station, which uses
Ethernet Backhaul for both 1xEV-DO and 3G1X at the same time.
The Fourth base station on the left-hand side is a 1xEV-DO Base Station, which uses
1xEV-DO Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-32
Master Diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master Diagram
About the Master Diagram
The following Master Diagram contains an overview of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network. In the diagram the lines show logical data flows between network elements.
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS not included
Note that the Master Diagram does not contain the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet
Data Network.
Diagram
The following figure shows the Master Diagram.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-33
Master Diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-8 Master Diagram of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
(I-MSC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
2-34
3 obile Switching Center

M
(MSC)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the concept of a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and describes the
two different MSCs offered by Alcatel-Lucent.
Contents
MSC defined
3-2
MSCs offered by Alcatel-Lucent
3-3
About the I-MSC
3-4
About the MPC
3-6
3-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-1
MSC defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MSC defined
What is a Mobile Switching Center (MSC)?
In a wireless system, the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) is the network element that
contains all of the control and switching elements for the system. Note that the MSC is an
example of a network element that contains other network elements.
Major functions of an MSC
An MSC consists of the following major functions:
Mobility management That group of tasks that controls the operation of a wireless
system, including call processing, system maintenance, technician interfaces, and
system integrity.
Typically an Access Manager provides this function.
Call control That group of tasks that provides all the wireless network switching
for calls to and from the wireless subscriber, and also provides an interface into the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
Typically a switch provides this function.
User interfaces A set of applications and interfaces that gives people access to
required services such as billing. User interfaces also give access to all the network
elements that make up a single MSC, so operational, maintenance and administrative
(OA&M) tasks can be done on those network elements.
Typically one or more OA&M platforms provide this function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Two MSCs available
Alcatel-Lucent offers the following two MSCs:
Integrated Mobile Switching Center (I-MSC)

Each is explained in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-3
About the I-MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the I-MSC

What is the I-MSC?
The Integrated MSC (I-MSC) is the traditional Alcatel-Lucent MSC. The I-MSC contains
all of the control and switching elements for the wireless network. The I-MSC also
performs bearer and call control and OA&M for the wireless network.
Figure 3-1 Components of the I-MSC
9253 OMCRAN/ 9254

Access Manager:
9290 MMCv4,
9290 MMCv2,
9290 MMCv1, or
9290 MM
OMC-RAN
Mobile
Unit
9256
OMP
I-MSC
Signaling
Link
MCC/TLWS
Base
Station
9281 Packet
Switch
PSTN
Landline
subscriber
Cell
Sites
Access Managers used by the I-MSC
A single I-MSC can use any of the Access Managers in the following list:
9290 Mobility Manager Compact (MMC) version 4 (MMCv4)

9290 MMC version 2 (9290 MMCv2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-4
About the I-MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9290 MMC version 1 (9290 MMCv1)

9290 Mobility Manager (9290 MM)
Note: There is no MMCv3. The reason for the skip to MMCv4 is so that the OMP,
OMC-RAN, and APs running on the ATCA hardware platform could all share the
label v4.
Switch used by the I-MSC
The I-MSC uses the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch (PS), which was formerly called
the 5ESS Switch.
Diagram
To see a network diagram of an AlcatelLucent 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network that
is based on the I-MSC, see Figure 2-2, 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (I-MSC)
(p. 2-19).
Software
For a list of the applications supported on the I-MSC, see Applications that can be run
on each Access Manager (p. 4-65).
OA&M platforms used by the I-MSC
The I-MSC uses the following OA&M platforms:
For the Access Manager, the I-MSC uses the following:

9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP), v2 and v4
For the switch, the Master Control Center (MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station
(TLWS)
For both the I-MSC and the switch, the 9253/9254 Operations and Maintenance
Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN), in the following versions
9253 OMC-RAN v1
9254 OMC-RAN Compact, v2

9253 OMC-RAN v3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-5
About the MPC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MPC

What is the MPC?
The Mobile Packet Core (MPC) is an enhanced MSC. The MPC combines the rich
feature set and reliability of the Integrated MSC (I-MSC) with the introduction of the
9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface and the addition of the PSG. The PSG is a
configuration and application option to the 9281 Packet Switch (PS).
The MPC contains a CMS and a switch.
Figure 3-2 Components of the MPC
9253 OMCRAN/ 9254
CMS
OMC-RAN
Access
Manager
MPC
MM-SI
Mobile
Unit
9256
OMP
Signaling
Link
MCC/TLWS
Base
Station
9281 Packet
Switch Gateway
PSTN
Landline
subscriber
Cell
Sites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-6
About the MPC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is the CMS?
The CDMA Mobility Server (CMS) is a next-generation soft switch that hosts all network
signalling in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC). CMS supports a variety of call models and
connection control mechanisms to support current and future service provider
applications. In the MPC, the CMS fills the function of the Mobile Switching Center
evolved (MSCe).
The CMS is made up of an Access Manager and the 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling
Interface (MM-SI).
Access Manager used by the MPC
For the Access Manager, the MPC uses the 9290 Mobility Manager Compact MMC
version 2 (MMCv2). The 9290 Mobility Manager Compact MMC version 2 (MMCv2) is
used within the CDMA Mobility Server (CMS) in the MPC.
MM-SI
The 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI) is a network element that acts
as the Media Gateway Controller (MGC) for the MPC. All SS7 and SIP signalling is
handled by the MM-SI.
Switch used by the MPC
The switch used within the MPC is the 9281 Packet Switch with the addition of the PSG
configuration and application option.
What is the PSG?
The Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) is a configuration and application option to the 9281
Packet Switch (PS) that includes an H.248 interface to the MM-SI. The PSG supports
basic Media Gateway functions as well as supporting wireless backhaul and features via
the H.248 interface.
Diagram
To see a network diagram of an AlcatelLucent 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network that
is based on the MPC, see Figure 2-3, 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network (MPC)
(p. 2-20).
Software
For a list of the applications supported on the MPC, see Applications that can be run on
each Access Manager (p. 4-65).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-7
About the MPC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA&M platforms used by the MPC
The MPC uses the following OA&M platforms:
For the Access Manager, the 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP)
For the MM-SI, the Management Interface (MI) service
For the switch, the Master Control Center (MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station
(TLWS)
For the MMC, the MM-SI and the switch, the 9253 Operations and Maintenance
Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN) v3 is also used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Documentation
For information on the following:
Access Managers available in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, see
Chapter 4, Access Managers.
Packet Switches available in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, see
Chapter 6, 9281 Packet Switches.
the OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP).
The 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253
OMC-RAN), see Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio
Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN).
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, see Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and Maintenance
Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact).
Guide to all user interfaces
The User Interface Guide, 401-662-113, is a guide to all user interfaces for the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network. For every user interface in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, the
User Interface Guide does the following:
Lists the user interface

Tells what network elements can be monitored from the user interface
Gives a procedure for accessing the user interface
Training
For training on the MSC, see the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Wireless Network Overview
class, CL1000C/W.
Training on all user interfaces
For training on all the user interfaces available in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, and
for several OA&M scenarios, see the Introduction to CDMA Wireless Networks
OA&M course, number CL1500C or CL1500W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
3-10
Access Managers
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the general-purpose Access Managers that can be used within the
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
What is an Access Manager?
An Access Manager is a set of hardware and software that controls the operation of a
wireless system and is responsible for mobility management, call processing, system
maintenance, technician interfaces, and system integrity.
Available Access Managers
The following general-purpose Access Managers are available for use with the
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:
9290 Mobility Manager Compact version 4 (MMCv4)based Access Manager


9290 Mobility Manager version (9290 MM)based Access Manager
Each of these Access Managers is described in this chapter.

Similarities
Most of the same applications run on all these Access Manager (with some exceptions)
and all these Access Managers use the same OA&M interfaces.
Use of the term Access Manager
In this document the term Access Manager will be used in cases where any of the
Alcatel-Lucent Access Managers can be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-1
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One Access Manager per MSC
Each MSC has just one Access Manager.

Support for mixed configurations
All of the general-purpose Alcatel-Lucent Access Managers support mixed

configurations.
What is a mixed configuration?
A mixed configuration is a configuration made up of multiple frames of different types of

AP hardware. For example, a common mixed configuration is to add an MMCv4 frame to
an Access Manager's existing 9290 MM frames as the first step in upgrading the
hardware.
Discussed separately
Although mixed configurations occur often at service provider sites, for the sake of
clarity, each type of Access Manager is discussed separately in this chapter.
Other, special-case Access Manager
An additional special-case Access Manager exists to work solely with the Standalone
version of the 1xEV-DO RAS. The Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) is a
scaled-back version of the Access Manager that provides configuration and fault
management for cell equipment. The BSOC eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet
Switch. The BSOC is used only in the Standalone version of the 9271 EV-DO RAS.
The BSOC is not described in this chapter because the BSOC is not an MSC, that is, it
does not provide call processing support. The BSOC is described in About the Base
Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) (p. 9-17).
Contents
4-4
About the MMCv4
4-5
About the MMCv4 hardware
4-6
4-8
MMCv4 connections to other network elements
4-10
MMCv4 user interfaces
4-12
4-13
4-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-2
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MMCv2
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-21
4-23
4-24
4-26
About the MMCv1
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-31
4-33
4-34
4-36
About the 9290 MM
4-37
About the 9290 MM-APCC hardware
4-38
About the 9290 MM software
4-42
4-44
9290 MM user interfaces
4-46
4-47
4-50
About the ECPC
4-51
4-53
About the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)
4-54
About the CNI/IMS ring
4-56
4-57
ECPC connections to other network elements
4-58
For further information
4-59
4-60
Comparison of the Access Managers
4-61
Applications that can be run on each Access Manager
4-65
OMP versions per Access Manager
4-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-3
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Access Manager that is based on the Mobility Manager
Compact version 4 (MMCv4).
For simplicity's sake, in the rest of this section this product will be referred to as the
MMCv4.
Contents
About the MMCv4
4-5
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-4
Access Managers
About the MMCv4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MMCv4

What is the MMCv4?
The Mobility Manager Compact v4 (MMCv4) is an all-IP Access Manager that uses an
ATCA hardware platform and Linux software platform.
The MMCv4 provides the following:
Support of 3G1X CDMA voice/data as well as circuit switched data

Support of both integrated HLR and stand-alone HLR configurations
Along with packet data network elements, support of base stations with mixed mode
CDMA and EVDO carriers
Benefits of the MMCv4
The MMCv4 offers increased processing capability, floor space reduction, and reduced
power needs over the earlier Access Managers: MMCv2, MMCv1, and MM.
Access Manager of choice
The MMCv4 is the Access Manager of choice for the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network.
Availability
The 9290 Mobility Manager Compact v4 is available in Release 37.0 and later.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-5
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware overview
The MMCv4 is based on the Alcatel-Lucent version of the Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) chassis and housed in the Alcatel-Lucent Universal
Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC).
Figure 4-1 Minimum/maximum cabinet configuration for the MMCv4
Note: Carrier Cards only apply to EV-DO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-6
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is ATCA?
Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture, also known as AdvancedTCA or ATCA, is a

scalable architecture capable of supporting high capacity, high availability, dense, telecom
systems with thermal capacity to utilize current higher power devices. ATCA is an open
industry specification for building high-performance communications systems.
AP blades
The MMCv4 is hosted on a Linux-based single blade computer (SBC) with a disk
developed by Alcatel-Lucent. This SBC is a multiprocessor blade made up of two
microprocessors with 6 cores each.
What is the UNAC?
The Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC) is a universal

Alcatel-Lucent cabinet.
UNAC components
The UNAC cabinet that houses the MMCv4 ships with the following:
2 Omni 6850 Ethernet switches (EFS) an edge/workgroup switch

2 ATCAv2 chassis platform for MMCv4 APs
4 Shelf controllers blades that provide the key switching functions for the ATCA
platform
2 FB032CD blades (MMCv4 AP) blades that host the Access Manager
applications
4 Shelf Management Module (SMM) controllers that supervise all elements of
the chassis
2 - FALARM resident alarm blade
Note that the UNAC can support up to 22 MMCv4 FB032CD (MMCv4 AP) blades.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-7
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multilayered architecture
The MMCv4 software architecture consists of the following layers:
Layer 1: MontaVista Linux OS

Layer 2: Wireless Common Network Platform (WCNP) middleware
Layer 3: MMC application platform
Layer 4: MMC application software
Figure 4-2 MMCv4 software architecture

Layer 2: Wireless Network Common Platform (WCNP) middleware
Layer 3: MMC application platform
Layer 4: MMC application software
Layered architecture
The MMCv4 supports a multi-layered software architecture.

The MontaVista Linux Operation System (OS) is loaded on each MMCv4 that is shipped
from the factory.
Layer 2: WCNP middleware
A bundle is a collection of software packages that are combined in a self-extracting file.

The MMC-AP bundle is a collection of packages that are essential for any application that
runs on an MMC-AP. These include:
Device drivers, such as those needed for Ethernet and serial interfaces
Utilities for setting up the profile and shell environment for MMC-AP users
Utilities for performing software updates and generic retrofits

Utility for MMC-AP performance monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-8
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layer 3: MMCv4 application platform
The MMCv4 application platform software includes the following:
Reliable Clustered Computing (fms_rcc) software package, which provides a

high-availability software infrastructure that works with the WatchDog to monitor,
troubleshoot and report status of applications that run on the MMC-APs
MMC-AP support (ngn_platform) software package, which provides a software
infrastructure that enables technician commands and reports status.
Layer 4: MMCv4 application software
For a list of the application software that resides on the MMCv4, see Applications that
can be run on each Access Manager (p. 4-65).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-9
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connections of MM-APs within a single MSC
The MMC-APs within the MMCv4 communicate over a dualrail LAN with all the other
MM-APs and MMC-APs within a single MSC.
Only IP/Ethernet backhaul
As with the MMCv2, the MMCv4 supports only IP and Ethernet backhaul to base
stations.
No Frame Relay (LAPD) backhaul support is provided by the MMCv2 or MMCv4. If
necessary, Frame Relay (LAPD) backhaul support can be provided by the MM or
MMCv1 in an office with a mixed configuration.
Connection to STPs
MMCv4 supports only SIGTRAN over Ethernet connections to STPs.

Therefore the MMCv4 does not provide SS7 over T1/E1 connections.
However, SS7 over T1/E1 connections to STPs can be provided by MM, MMCv1 or
MMCv2 APs in an office with a mixed configuration.
Connection to PS
The MMCv4 supports only SCTP over IP connections to the 9281 Packet Switch (PS).
Although the MMCv4 does not support SS7 over T1/E1 connections to the PS, SS7
connections over T1/E1 to the PS can be provided by MM, MMCv1 or MMCv2 APs in
an office with a mixed configuration.
Network elements connected to
The MMCv4 connects to most of the other network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, including the following:
9256 OMP
OMC-RAN v2
Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)

Base stations
9281 Packet Switch

Signal Transfer Points (STPs)
Standalone HLR (S-HLR).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-10
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows MMCv4 connections, both internally and to other network
elements.
Figure 4-3 MMCv4 connections
About S-HLR
Standalone HLR is optional in the network.

Integrated HLR (IHLR) functionality is used if an S-HLR is not implemented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-11
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
The following interfaces can be used to administer and monitor the MMCv4:
9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) v4

9253/9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (OMC-RAN).
Note that an OMC-RAN is required with the MMCv4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-12
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

General documentation
The following table lists all the general MMCv4 documentation.

Table 4-1
General documentation on the MMCv4
Document number
Document name
401-610-036
Database Update Guide
401-610-038
Text Recent Change and Verify Guide
401-710-216
ATCA-based Access Manager Platform Guide
401-710-227
Alcatel-Lucent 9290 Mobility Manager

Compact Applications Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance
401-710-215
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor

Cluster Complex (APCC) System Capacity
Monitoring and Engineering (SCME)
Guidelines
Application documentation
For a list of the documentation for each application that runs on the Access Manager, see
Applications that can be run on each Access Manager (p. 4-65).
9256 OMP documentation
For more about the 9256 OMPv4, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management
Platform (9256 OMP).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-13
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training on the MMCv4
For training on the MMCv4, see the following:
MMC Overview, CL5574

MMC OA&M, CL5575W
MMC OA&M Hands-On, CL5576
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-14
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
MMCv2.
Contents
About the MMCv2
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-21
4-23
4-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-15
Access Managers
About the MMCv2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MMCv2

What is the MMCv2?
The Mobility Manager Compact version 2 (MMCv2) is a multiprocessor-based Access

Manager that runs on a set of up to twelve MMC-APs and is housed in an Alcatel-Lucent
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) with a rear extension module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-16
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Components of the MMCv2
The MMCv2 uses the Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet with a rear extension
module that can hold up twelve MMC-APs (Sun Netra T5220s), two Ethernet
switches, the Power Distribution shelf (containing two ECBU2s) and the Frame Interface
Panel (FIP) hardware panel.
Universal Network Cabinet for MMCv2
The Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet serves as the frame in the MMCv2.
Figure 4-4 MMCv2 UNC frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-17
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Differences from the MMCv1
Hardware strengths in the MMCv2 (that the MMCv1 does not have) include the
following:
Enhancements to support multiple applications on a single AP, including support of

multiple T1/E1 I/O boards on a single AP
An enhanced Ethernet switch
New faster MMC-APs. The MMC-APs used for the MMCv2 are based on the Sun
Microsystems Netra T5220 server.
About the Netra T5220
The Netra T5220 is based on a multi-core processor (8 cores each with 8 processor
threads) while the Netra 240 is based on a single core processor. Since each processor
thread can be considered a virtual server, each T5220 server is equivalent to 64 virtual
servers. A Netra T5220 server does not consume less power than a single Netra 240
server, but it consumes much less than 64 Netra 240 servers.
Supports only IP backhaul
Unlike the MMCv1, the MMCv2 only supports IP backhaul connections to the base
stations.
For a detailed overview of the MMC hardware, see Chapter 1 in the 9290 MMC Platform
OA&M, 401-710-214.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-18
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The MMCv2 has a multi-layered software architecture.

Layer 1: Golden Image software
Layer 2: Mobility Manager Application Processor bundle

Layer 3: MMC-AP platform software
Layer 4: 9290 Mobility Manager application software
Figure 4-5 MMCv2 software architecture
Layer 1: Mobility Server (MS) Golden Image software
The Golden Image software includes the following components:
The appropriate Solaris operating system software

The operating system configuration and setup information, such as disk partitioning
and kernel parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-19
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layer 2: MMC-AP bundle software

Device drivers, such as those needed for Ethernet, serial, and T1/E1 interfaces
The MMC-AP platform software includes the following:

troubleshoot and report status of applications that run on the MMC-APs.
infrastructure that enables technician commands and reports status.
Layer 4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-20
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connections within the MMCv2
The MMC-APs within the MMCv2 communicate over a dualrail LAN with the other
MMC-APs.
External connections
The MMCv2 connects to most of the other network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, , including the following:
9256 OMP
9253/9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (OMC-RAN)
Base stations
9281 Packet Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-21
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows MMCv2 connections, both internally and to other network
elements.
Supports only IP Backhaul
The MMCv2 supports only IP and Ethernet backhaul connections to the base stations.
About S-HLR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-22
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP).

Note that the OMC-RAN is an optional interface.
Personal Computer (PC).
Personal Computer (PC)
A PC may be used for communication with the MMCv2. This PC, if used, must be
supplied by the service provider, and must be capable of running a terminal emulator, so
that you can use it to access the MMCv2. The PC must be able to host such programs as
telnet and ftp.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-23
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Table 4-2
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent MMCv2
Document number
Document name
401-610-036
401-610-038
401-710-214
9290 Mobility Manager Compact version 2Platform Operations, Administration, and

Maintenance
401-710-215

Guidelines.
401-710-227
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Applications

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
401-710-228
9290 Mobility Manager Compact - Site

Preparation
401-710-235
CDMA Network 9290 MMC and

MM(ECPless) Based Access Manager
Software Retrofit Procedures
For more about the 9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-24
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9253/9254 OMC-RAN documentation
For more about:
Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
CL5441W, Mobility Manager Compact Version 2 (MMCv2) Installation

CL5564, Mobility Manager Compact Version 2 (MMCv2) Hands-On OA&M
CL5570W, Mobility Manager Compact Version 2 (MMCv2) Overview
CL5571W, Mobility Manager Compact Version 2 (MMCv2) OA&M
CL5573W, Mobility Manager Compact Version 2 (MMCv2) MMCv2 and MM

Differences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-25
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
MMCv1.
Contents
About the MMCv1
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-31
4-33
4-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-26
Access Managers
About the MMCv1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MMCv1

What is the MMCv1?
The Mobility Manager Compact version 1 (MMCv1) is a single-processor-based Access

Manager that runs on a set of up to twelve MMC-APs and is housed in an Alcatel-Lucent
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC).
Differences from the MM
The MMCv1 allows some colocation of applications, which MM does not allow. In
addition, the MMCv1 has more processing power than the 400/410/800/810 based APs.
The MMCv1 is about equal in processing power to the MM AP with a CP2500 (Jade)
CPU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-27
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Components of the MMCv1
The MMCv1 uses the Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet which can hold up
twelve MMC-APs (Sun Netra 240S), two Ethernet switches, the Power Distribution
shelf (containing two ECBU2s) and the Frame Interface Panel (FIP) hardware panel.
For a detailed overview of the MMCv1 hardware, refer to Chapter 1 of the 9290 MMC
Platform OA&M, MMCv1, 401-710-226.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-28
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The MMCv1 has a multi-layered software architecture.

Layer 1: Golden Image software
Layer 2: Mobility Manager Application Processor bundle

Layer 4: 9290 Mobility Manager Compact (MMC) application software
Figure 4-7 MMC software architecture

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-29
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layer 2: MMC-AP bundle software

The MMC-AP platform software includes the following:

troubleshoot and report status of applications that run on the MMC-APs
infrastructure that enables technician commands and reports status
Layer 4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-30
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connections within the MMCv1
The MMC-APs within the MMCv1 communicate over a dualrail LAN with the other
MMC-APs.
External connections
The 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager connects to most of the other network elements
in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network, including the following:
9256 OMP
Base stations
9281 Packet Switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-31
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the MMCv1 connections, both internally and to other
network elements.
About S-HLR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-32
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP).

Note that the OMC-RAN is an optional interface.
Personal Computer (PC).
Personal Computer (PC)
A PC may be used for communication with the MMCv1. This PC, if used, must be
supplied by the service provider, and must be capable of running a terminal emulator, so
that you can use it to access the MMCv1. The PC must be able to host such programs as
telnet and ftp.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-33
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Table 4-3
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent MMCv1
Document number
Document name
401-610-036
401-610-038
401-710-215

Guidelines.
401-710-226
9290 Mobility Manager Compact version 1 Platform Operations, Administration, and

Maintenance
401-710-227
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Applications

401-710-235
CDMA Network 9290 MMC and

MM(ECPless) Based Access Manager
Software Retrofit Procedures
9253/9254 OMC-RAN documentation
For more about:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-34
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Version 1 Overview, CL5560C/W

9290 Mobility Manager Compact Version 1 OA&M , CL5561C/W
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Version 1 OA&M, CL5562
CL5001C/W 9290 Mobility Manager Compact Version 1 SCME
CL5001C/W 9290 Mobility Manager Compact Version 1 SCME
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-35
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Access Manager that is based on the 9290 Mobility Manager,
the 9290 MM.
Contents
About the 9290 MM
4-37
4-38
4-42
4-44
4-46
4-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-36
Access Managers
About the 9290 MM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9290 MM

What is the 9290 MM?
The 9290 MM is an Access Manager made up of the following two components:
The 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex (9290

MM-APCC)
An optional Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC), which consists of an
ECP, an IMS ring, and ring nodes
The 9290 MM-APCC and the ECPC are each explained in this chapter.
Note: The optional ECPC hardware configuration is available, but this is being
phased out of all systems.
What is an ECPless configuration?
A configuration that does not include the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) network
elements and the CNI/IMS ring is called an ECPless configuration. All currently-offered
Access Managers in the 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network are ECPless. Older
systems at a service provider's site may contain an ECP and IMS ring.
For more about the ECP, see About the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)
(p. 4-50).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-37
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Major hardware components of the 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster
Complex (9290 MM-APCC) are listed here.
Note: An optional ECPC may be present. For more on that ECPC, see About the
Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) (p. 4-50).
9290 MM-AP
The 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor (9290 MM-AP) Release 1 [formerly
called the Flexent Mobility Manager Application Processor Release 1 (FMM-AP)] is a
second-generation application processor that hosts 9290 Mobility Manager application
software. An application processor is a general purpose commercial processor that can
host a wide range of applications in a wireless network. An application processor provides
an integrated high-availability hardware and software platform that offers increased
reliability, availability and maintainability for its subtending network elements.
The R1 9290 MM-AP is based on the Sun Netra CT 400 and Netra CT 800 servers.
9290 MM-AP
The 9290 MM-AP Release 2 [formerly called the Flexent Mobility Manager Application
Processor Release 2 (FMM-AP)] is a second-generation application processor used by the
9290 Mobility Manager.
The R2 9290 MM-AP is based on the Sun CP2160 satellite CPU and Netra CT 410
and Netra CT 810 servers.
9290 MM-APF
A 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (9290 MM-APF) [formerly

called the Flexent Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (FMM-APF)] is the
cabinet that houses the 9290 MM-AP servers and several other hardware components in a
CDMA network.
Frame types
The 9290 MM AP frames comes in 3 models:
R1 frame
R1SR frame
Universal Network Cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-38
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-9 9290 MM base frame
9290 MM base frame
The 9290 MM has three models:
R1
R1SR
Universal
Each model comes in two types:
Base (houses two 810S servers and up to four 410S servers)

Growth (houses up to eight 410S servers)
9290 MM growth frame
The 9290 MM growth frames are no longer sold.

The configuration of the Base Universal Network Cabinet (Model 2120 cabinet) is the
same as the R1SR base frame. Six server drawers and up to 12 satellites are supported,
and the numbering and powering of the drawers is the same as the R1SR base frame. All
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-39
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APs (host and satellite) in the Base Universal Network Cabinet must be CP2500 CPUs.
The Base Universal Network Cabinet supports all the applications that are supported by
the R1SR base frame. The following figure shows the Base Universal Network Cabinet
and details the layout of the hardware components.
Figure 4-10 Base Universal Network Cabinet
Growth Universal Network Cabinet
The configuration of the Growth Universal Network Cabinet (Model 2220 cabinet) is the
same as the R1SR growth frame. Eight server drawers and up to 16 satellites are
supported, and the numbering and powering of the drawers is the same as the R1SR
growth frame. All APs (host and satellite) in the Growth Universal Network Cabinet must
be CP2500 CPUs. The Growth Universal Network Cabinet supports all the applications
that are supported by the R1SR base frame. The following figure shows the Growth
Universal Network Cabinet and details the layout of the hardware components.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-40
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-11 Growth Universal Network Cabinet
Universal Network Cabinet frame components
Both the Base Universal Network Cabinet and Growth Universal Network Cabinet are
equipped with the following:
The Cable Interface Panel (CIP) and the Frame Interface Panel (FIP) that provide the
cable demarcation function for all cables entering and leaving the frame.
The Power Distribution Shelf 2 (PDS2) that contains the Enhanced Circuit Breaker
Unit 2 (ECBU2). The ECBU2 provides cabinet safety power disconnects for all
cabinet hardware. The PDS2 also contains an alarm board that lights cabinet LEDs for
input power failures, circuit breaker trips, ECBU2 failures, and other component
failures detected by the drawer alarm blades.
The Extreme Networks Summit X450a-48tDC Gigabit Ethernet switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-41
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The 9290 MM has a multi-layered software architecture.

The 9290 MM-APCC software architecture consists of the following layers, as illustrated
in the following figure:

Layer 2: 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor (9290 MM-AP) bundle
Layer 3: 9290 MM-AP platform software
Layer 4: 9290 MM application software
Figure 4-12 9290 MM software architecture

Layer 1: MS Golden Image
Layer 2: MM Application Processor Bundle
Layer 3: MM Application Processor Platform
Layer 4: MM Application Software
Layer 1: MS Golden Image software
Layer 2: 9290 MM-AP bundle software

Packages include a set of related files and are installed by executing the bundle file. The
9290 MM-AP bundle is a collection of packages that are essential for any application that
runs on a 9290 MM-AP. These include:
Utilities for setting up the profile and shell environment for 9290 MM-AP users
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-42
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Utility for 9290 MM-AP performance monitoring
Layer 3: 9290 MM-AP platform software
The 9290 MM-AP platform software includes the following:

troubleshoot and report status of applications that run on the 9290 MM-APs
9290 MM-AP support (ngn_platform) software package, which provides a
software infrastructure that enables technician commands and reports status.
Layer 4: 9290 MM application software
For a list of the application software that resides on the 9290 MM, see Applications that
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-43
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connections within the 9290 MM-APCC
The 9290 MM-APs within the 9290 MM-APCC communicate over a dualrail LAN with
the other 9290 MM-APs.
What is the dual-rail LAN?
The dualrail LAN is a fault-tolerant LAN that is duplexed. Every 9290 MM-AP has a
connection to both LANs. The dualrail LAN is used for inter-MM AP communications
and for connections between frames in the 9290 MM-APCC. The 9256 OMP is also on
the dual-rail LAN.
Connections to other entities
The 9290 MM-APCC connects to most of the other network elements in the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network, , including the following:
9256 OMP
9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
or 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
Base stations
9281 Packet Switch
ECP Complex (ECPC)
The 9290 MM-APCC also connects to the S-HLR and to other MSCs through the IS41
Network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-44
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows 9290 MM-APCC connections, both internally and to other
network elements.
Figure 4-13 9290 MM connections
About S-HLR
Standalone HLR (S-HLR) is optional in the network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-45
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
User interfaces for the 9290 MM include the following:
9256 OMP
9253 OMC-RAN
9254 OMC-RAN Compact
Cannot be managed by both EMS and an OMC-RAN simultaneously
Important! In Release 35.0 and Release 36.0, a 9290 MM-AP may be managed by
either EMS or an OMC-RAN, but not by both simultaneously. It is also not
recommended to divide management of 9290 MM-APs for a single MSC between
EMS and an OMC-RAN, except during the brief period of migration. This is true for
both the 9253 OMC-RAN and the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact.
In Release 37.0 and later, the EMS is no longer supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-46
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table lists all the general 9290 MM-APCC documentation.
Table 4-4
General documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9290 MM-APCC
Document number
Document name
401-610-009

Cluster Complex and Executive Control
Processor (MM-APCC & ECP) System
Capacity Monitoring and Engineering
(SCME) Guidelines.
NOTE: Use this SCME for systems that
include an ECP and a ring.
401-610-036
401-610-038
401-710-215

Guidelines.
For a list of the documentation for each application that runs on the MM-APCC, see
LMT documentation
For more about the LMT, see Chapter 13, Local Maintenance Terminal .
9253 OMC-RAN documentation
For more about the 9253 OMC-RAN, see Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and Maintenance
Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-47
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9254 OMC-RAN Compact documentation
For more about the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, see Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact).
Training on the 9290 MM-APCC
Alcatel-Lucent training for the 9290 MM-APCC is listed in the following table.
Table 4-5
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network 9290 Mobility Manager training
Course number
Class
CL1000C/W
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network System

Overview
CL5500C
Mobility Server (FMS) Overview
CL5501

(9290 MM-AP) OA&M
CL5502
9290 Mobility Manager Read-Only Printer

(9290 MM-ROP) OA&M
CL5503
9290 Mobility Manager Database

Management System (9290 MM-DBMS)
OA&M
CL5504
9290 Mobility Manager 700K BHCA

Applications OA&M
CL5505C
Flexent 9290 Mobility Manager Signaling

System 7/Direct Link Node OA&M Overview
CL5508
9290 Mobility Manager Radio Cluster Server

(9290 MM-RCS) OA&M
CL5509
9290 Mobility Manager Call Processing and

Database Nodes (9290 MM-CDN) OA&M
CL5512
OAM Proxy OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-48
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-49
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Executive Cellular Processor Complex

(ECPC)
Overview
Purpose
This section briefly describes the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC).
Although the ECPC is not used in the current 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network,
some service provider networks still contain ECPCs. Therefore, this information is
retained here, to help those service providers.
Contents
About the ECPC
4-51
4-53
4-54
4-56
4-57
4-58
4-59
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-50
Access Managers
About the ECPC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the ECPC

What is the ECPC?
In earlier CDMA MSCs, the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) controlled
the operation of wireless systems and was responsible for mobility management, call
processing, system maintenance, technician interfaces, and system integrity. The ECPC
was comprised of the 3B21D computer and distributed processing nodes.
In the current 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network, all ECPC functions are being
performed on the APs in the Access Manager. The ECPC is allowed to remain in the
system but it is not performing any useful work and a plan should be put in place for
removing the ECPC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-51
Access Managers
About the ECPC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECPC in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
The following diagram shows an older MSC containing a 9290 MM-APCC and ECPC,
and also shows how the 9290 MM-APCC/ECPC connected to the wireless system.
Figure 4-14 ECP Complex control of network operations
Older technology
The ECPC is an older technology that is optional for MM APCCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-52
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware components
The major hardware components of the ECPC were the following:
Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)

Common Network Interface (CNI)/ Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) ring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-53
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)?
The Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) is the 3B21D computer that is the main
processor for the ECPC. The ECP is housed in one cabinet, the Processor Cabinet.
Processor Cabinet
The 3B21D Processor Cabinet houses two redundant, independent processors (one active
and one standby). These processors are known as Central Processor Units (CPUs).
Control Unit (CU)
The core of a 3B21D is the Control Unit (CU). The CU is a 32-bit processor used for the
execution of the software that controls the system.
Input/Output Processor (IOP)
The Input/Output Processor (IOP) is an independent processor used for control of the
other utility equipment. This equipment performs input/output functions as well as alarm
signalling and tape storage functions.
Disk File Controller (DFC)
The Disk File Controller (DFC) is an independent processor used for the control of the
disk units. The disk units perform the backup memory function. The DFC consists of the
Moving Head Disk (MHD), the Mag Tape (9-track) (MT), and the Digital Audio Tape
(DAT).
Port Switch Scanner Distributor Buffer (PSSDB)
The Port Switch and Scanner Distributor Buffer (PSSDB) switches the maintenance
terminal (MTTY) and the local Read-Only Printer (ROP) between the MTTY Controller
(MTTYC) circuit pack (TN983) in IOP0 and IOP1.
DAT tape drive
The DAT tape drive also resides in the processor cabinet.

Power Distribution Cabinet
A Power Distribution Cabinet (LPDC) is required to support the ECP. The Power
Distribution Cabinet contains power conditioning and distribution circuits as well as
circuit breakers.
If the ECP is co-located with the 9281 Packet Switch, then the ECP will be powered by
either the Global Power Distribution Frame (GPDF) or the Local Power Distribution
Cabinet (LPDC). If the ECP is not co-located with the 9290 MM-APCC then the ECP
must have its own GPDF or LPDC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-54
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auxiliary Cabinet
An Auxiliary Cabinet is also required to support the ECP. The Office Alarm Unit, which
is part of the ECP, is stored in the auxiliary cabinet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-55
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Definition
The Common Network Interface (CNI)/Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) ring is a

token ring that links the 3B21D computer to other processors (also called nodes) in the
network. All messages going between the 3B21D and other processors in the system will
travel on the ring to get to their destination.
Nodes on the ring
Many of the nodes on the ring have been removed because their functionality was moved
to the 9290 MM-APCC. The remaining nodes that are delivered with the CNI/IMS ring
are:
Important! Some other nodes are still supported for existing offices.
Direct Link Node (DLN)
Two Direct Link Nodes (DLNs) are required in the CNI/IMS architecture. The DLNs
provide central message routing functions for all CNI/IMS messages.
Ring Peripheral Controller Node (RPCN)
The two RPCNs connect the ECP to the CNI/IMS ring. For a diagram of this, see Figure
4-13, 9290 MM connections (p. 4-45).
Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE)
The Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) is a node on the ECP's Common Network
Interface (CNI)/Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) token ring that provides a
point-to-point Ethernet connection between a 9290 MM-AP and the ring. The EINE
processes CNI/IMS messages that travel from the 9290 MM-APCC to the ECPC and
back.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-56
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software
Most of the application software has been migrated off the ECPC and onto the 9290
MM-APCC. The remaining software on the ECPC includes:
Software on the CNI/IMS ring to control the remaining nodes

System Integrity Initialization & Recovery (SIIR) application
Various tools
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-57
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External network interfaces
The ECPC connects to the following other elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:
The ECPC connects directly to the 9256 OMP over a single, physical Dual Serial
Channel Computer Interface (DCI) link.
The ECPC connects to the 9281 Packet Switch through SS7 nodes in the CNI/IMS
ring. The SS7 nodes use duplicated 56 kbps data links.
The ECPC connects to the 9290 MM-AP processors over Ethernet connections in the
CNI/IMS ring called Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) nodes. All 9290
MM-APs have connectivity to an EINE to communicate with the ECP; some have
direct physical connections while some connect to other 9290 MM-APs that have a
direct physical connection.
Physical DCI link to 9256 OMP
The DCI physical interface between the physical 9256 OMP consists of a pair of dual
serial channel (DSCH) cables, with a maximum cable length of 100 feet. On the 9256
OMP side, both DSCH cables connect to two ports on the same Peripheral Control
Interface - DSCH Computer Interconnect (PCI-DCI) board. On the ECP side, each DSCH
cable is connected to a separate DSCH boardone associated with CU0, the other with
CU1.
Internal network interfaces
The ECPC connects to the CNI/IMS ring using the Ring Peripheral Controller Node
(RPCN). The RPCN is used to interface between the 3B21D and the CNI/IMS ring. There
are two RPCNs in every CNI/IMS ring. The CNI/IMS ring is a token ring, and the
protocol used to transport messages between CNI/IMS ring nodes is proprietary (that is,
nonstandard).
For a diagram of this, see Figure 4-13, 9290 MM connections (p. 4-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-58
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Engineering information
For engineering information about the ECPC, see the 9290 Mobility Manager Application
Processor Cluster Complex and Executive Control Processor (MM-APCC & ECP)
System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines, 401-610-009.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-59
Access Managers
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
The information in this section compares and contrasts the Access Managers that are
available for use in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network.
Contents
4-61
4-65
4-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-60
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Summary table
The following table compares and contrasts the Access Managers described in this
chapter.
Table 4-6
Component
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
Application
co-location
All applications can be

co-located.
All applications can be

co-located.
Some
applications can
be co-located
No co-location
of applications
is allowed.
Application
processors
(APs)
FB032CD compute blades
Sun Netra T5220
Sun Netra 240
MM varieties
in service:
410S and 810S
with CP2140
host CPUs, and
410S and 810S
with CP2500
host CPU
CP2160
satellite CPU
and the
CP2500
satellite CPU
Backhaul
support
IP backhaul (IPBH), and

Ethernet backhaul (EBH)
IP backhaul (IPBH),
and Ethernet backhaul
(EBH)
IP backhaul
(IPBH), Ethernet
backhaul (EBH),
and Frame
Relay/Link
Access Protocol
D (LAPD).
IP backhaul
(IPBH),
Ethernet
backhaul
(EBH), and
Frame
Relay/Link
Access
Protocol D
(LAPD).
BHCA
Capacity
Up to 7.5 million
Up to 7.5 million
Up to 7.5 million
Up to 7.5
million
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-61
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6
(continued)
Component
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
Cabinet
Universal Network ATCA

Cabinet (UNAC)
Universal Network
Cabinet (UNC) with
rear extension
Universal
Network Cabinet
(UNC)
9290 MM R1
or R1SR base
frame, 9290
MM R1 or
R1SR growth
frame, and
Universal
Network
Cabinet
cells supported
per MSC
Up to 4000 (if all APs have

16 GB or more of memory)
Up to 4000 (if all APs

have 16 GB or more
of memory)
999
999
memory per
hardware type
32 GB
16 GB
2GB
1GB or 2GB
maximum
number of cells
per AP pair
500 per pair
500 per pair
40 per pair
Console ports
One console port (RJ-45)

on each of the two
OmniSwitch 6850-U24X
Two
Two
Disk drives
One AMC disk drive on

each of the two Shelf
Controller 10 Z3 "Combo"
blades in the ATCA chassis
Two 146 GB hard

drives
One 73 GB hard
drive
DVD drives
Up to 4 DAT 160 drives are

available per MMCv4
cabinet. 2 are for AMA
backup and 1 for OMPv4
All servers
Only on the
B-servers
Note that the

R1 Servers
came with 1GB
but they are
upgradable to
2GB and the
R2s and
CP2500s all
come with
2GB.
40 per pair
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-62
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6
(continued)
Component
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
ECBU
Power Distribution Unit

(PDU): 19 inches, 3U
height, includes Alarm
board and manages up to 3
ATCA Shelf with 330W
per slot
ECBU2-HC
ECBU or
ECBU2-LC
ECBU or
ECBU2-LC
The Power
Distribution Shelf
2 with Low
Power
ECBU2-LCs
supports two
input power feeds
(one for A Bus
power and one for
B bus power),
each feed capable
of supporting 95
A through a
single input
power feed.
The Power
Distribution
Shelf 2 with
Low Power
ECBU2-LCs
supports two
input power
feeds (one for
A Bus power
and one for B
bus power),
each feed
capable of
supporting 95
A through a
single input
power feed.
The Power
Distribution Shelf 2
with High Power
ECBU2-HCs supports
four input power
feeds.
Uses connectorized
cable interface (Alarm
input/output and
cabinet LED control
circuitry) except for
the input.
The EMS GUI is

discontinued in R37.0. A
command-based OMP tool
is provided for AP Frame
Configuration on OMPv2
and OMPv4.
New icon for

MMCv2-APs
Ethernet ports
24
4 Ethernet ports
named e1000g0 and
e1000g1, e1000g2,
and e1000g3
4 Ethernet ports
named bge0 and
bge1, bge2, and
bge3
Ethernet
switches
OmniSwitch 6850-U24X
Extreme Networks
Summit X450a-48t
(1000 Mb)
Avaya 334T (100

Mb), or the Avaya
C364T Ethernet
switch. Both are
Fast Ethernet
switches (100
Mb/sec).
Avaya C364T
Ethernet switch
OMP access
Serial port and IP (for

redundancy)
Serial port and IP (for

redundancy)
Serial port and IP
Serial port and

IP
EMS
Status pages display

both T1/E1 cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-63
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6
(continued)
Component
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
Operating
System
The MMCv4 and OMPv4

run MontaVista. The
OMC-RAN runs Linux
RedHat.
Solaris 10
(applications are
Solaris 9 binaries) and
Oracle
Solaris 9 and
Oracle
Solaris 5.x and

Oracle
Processor type
multi-processors
multi-processors
uni-processors
uni-processors
Note: For actual co-location rules, see the appropriate SCME document:
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex and Executive

Control Processor (MM-APCC & ECP) System Capacity Monitoring and
Engineering (SCME) Guidelines, 401-610-009
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex (APCC) System
Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines, 401710215
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-64
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hosted applications
The following table lists the applications that can be run on each of the Access Managers
in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
Table 4-7
Applications per Access Manager
Hardware Platform
System Configurations
Application
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
I-MSC
MPC
BSOC
Access Manager
Message Service
(AMMS)
no
yes
no
no
no
yes
no
Access Manager
Message Service
(AMMS)-Packet
Switch (PS)
yes
no
no
no
yes
no
no
Alarm Scanning
(MM-AS)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
AMA
Teleprocessing
(MM-AMATPS)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
Automatic
Message
Accounting
(MM-AMA)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
Call Processing
and Database
Nodes
(MM-CDN)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
Database
Management
System
(MM-DBMS);
also called
MSCDMBS
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Home/Visitor
Location Register
(HLVR)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-65
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-7
(continued)
Hardware Platform
Application
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
I-MSC
MPC
BSOC
Home/Visitor
Location Register
Integrity Monitor
(HVLR-IM)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
IS
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
LICMGR
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
OAM Proxy
Northbound
Interface
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
ORCA NOTE 1
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
ORCA-PROV
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Radio Cluster
Server
(MM-RCS)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Read-Only
Printer
(MM-ROP)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Recent Change
and Verify
(RC/V)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Ring Data Base

Update
(MM-RDBU)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Signaling System
7 (MM-SS7)
noNOTE 2
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
SIGTRAN
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
SNMP Proxy
Forwarder (SPF)
Status Display
Process (MM-SP)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Technician
Interface
(MM-TI)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Translation
(MM-TR)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-66
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-7
(continued)
Hardware Platform
Application
MMCv4
MMCv2
MMCv1
MM
I-MSC
MPC
BSOC
Voice Channel
Administration
(MM-VCA)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
NOTE 1: ORCA is bundled with MM-SP. ORCA resides on the OAM Proxy APs if the
OMC-RAN is implemented.
NOTE 2: The MMCv4 is Ethernet-only and therefore cannot support SS7 over T1/E1 in
the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. For service providers who have
MMCv4s and need SS7 connections, SS7 over T1/E1 can be provided by the 9290 MM,
MMCv1 or MMCv2 in an office with a mixed configuration.
Documentation for each application
The following table lists the customer documentation that discusses each Access Manager
application.
Table 4-8
Application
Documentation
Access Manager Message Service

(AMMS)
Mobile Packet Core Overview, 401-710-600

MMC Applications OA&M, 401-710-227

(AMMS)-Packet Switch (PS)
Alarm Scanning (MM-AS)

9290 Mobility Manager Overview and Migration
Description, 401-710-200
AMA Teleprocessing (MM-AMATPS)
Automatic Message Accounting

(MM-AMA)
9290 Mobility Manager Automatic Message

Accounting Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance, 401-710-225
Call Processing and Database Nodes

(MM-CDN)
Database Management System

(MM-DBMS); also called MSCDMBS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-67
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-8
(continued)
Application
Documentation
Home/Visitor Location Register

(HLVR)
Home/Visitor Location Register

Integrity Monitor (HVLR-IM)
IS
Text Recent Change and Verify, 401610038
LICMGR
OAM Proxy Northbound Interface
OAM Proxy Operations, Administration, and

Maintenance, 401-710-212
ORCA
ORCA-PROV
Radio Cluster Server (MM-RCS)
Radio Cluster Server Operations, Administration and

Maintenance., 401-710-102
Read-Only Printer (MM-ROP)
9290 Mobility Manager Read-Only Printer

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance,
401-710-202
Recent Change and Verify (RC/V)
Text Recent Change and Verify, 401610038
Ring Data Base Update (MM-RDBU)

Signaling System 7 (MM-SS7)
9290 Mobility Manager Signaling System 7/Direct

Link Node OA&M, 401-710-205
SIGTRAN
SNMP Proxy Forwarder (SPF)
Status Display Process (MM-SP)
Technician Interface (MM-TI)
Translation (MM-TR)

Voice Channel Administration

(MM-VCA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-68
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The following table tells which version or versions of the OMP can be used with each
different Access Manager.
Table 4-9
OMP versions per Access Manager in Release 37.0
OMP version
Access Manager
I-MSC
MPC
BSOC
OMPv2
yes
yes
yes
OMPv3
no
no
no
OMPv4
yes
yes
yesNOTE 1
OMPv1 is no longer supported.

OMPv3 is no longer targeted for delivery.
NOTE 1: Before operators can use OMPv4 with the BSOC they must migrate to MMCv4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-69
Access Managers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
4-70
5 DMA Mobility Server

C
(CMS)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the CDMA Mobility Server (CMS) that is used by the Mobile
Packet Core (MPC).
Contents
About the CMS
5-2
About the MMCv2
5-3
5-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-1
About the CMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the CMS

What is the CMS?
The CDMA Mobility Server (CMS) is a next-generation soft switch that hosts all network
signalling in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC). The CMS supports a variety of call models
and connection control mechanisms to support current and future service provider
applications. In the MPC, the CMS fills the function of the Mobile Switching Center
evolved (MSCe).
External interface protocols
The CMS supports the following external interface protocols:
H.248
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

SIGTRAN
IS-41
What is H.248?
H.248 is an international standard for media gateway control, published by ITU and IETF.
The primary purpose of H.248 is to separate call control logic from media processing
logic in a gateway. The term H.248 is also used to refer to the use of H.248 as a Media
Gateway Standard that replaces the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP).
Benefits of the CMS
The CMS provides the following benefits:
Provides a single signalling end point per MPC for ISUP, SIP-I and IS-41
Provides evolution options that assure future proof investment
Components of the CMS
The CMS is made up of the following two separate network elements:
Mobility Manager Compact v2 (MMCv2)

Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI)
For further information about the CMS, see the Mobile Packet Core Overview,
401-710-600.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-2
About the MMCv2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the MMCv2

Introduction
This topic describes the MMCv2based Access Manager as used within the CMS.
What is the MMCv2?
The MMCv2 is the Alcatel-Lucent Access Manager used within the CMS.
Role
The MMCv2 allows service providers to offer the same suite of features on the CMS as
are present on MSCs already in their network. These features include voice
supplementary services such as Call Waiting, Three-Way Calling and others, Short
Message Service (SMS), and High Speed Packet Data.
Hardware configuration
When used with the CMS, the MMCv2 uses one of the following configurations:
MMCv2 only in a Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)

MMCv2 and OMC-RAN v3 in an Integrated Core Cabinet (ICC) within a UNC
CMS physical components
Various hardware configurations for the MMCv2 component of the CMS are supported.
The MMCv2 hardware can be configured as follows:
MMCv2 only -> in a Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)

MMCv2 and 9253 OMC-RAN v3 -> in an Integrated UNC (that is, a UNC with Rear
Extension)
The MM-SI hardware can be configured as follows:
MM-SI only -> in a UNAC
Applications mostly the same
The MMCv2 used within the CMS hosts the same applications as the Access Manager in
the Integrated MSC with one addition. The AMMS software application is added to the
MMCv2 when the MMCv2 is used as the Access Manager within the MPC.
Use of AMMS
The CMS hosts the Access Manager Message Service (AMMS) to provide a
communications path between the MMCv2 and the MM-SI. One AMMS application is
hosted on the MMCv2 on a pair of AMMS servers. The other AMMS application is
hosted on the MM-SI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-3
About the MMCv2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Further Information
For information about the MMCv2, see Mobility Manager Compact v2 (p. 4-15).
For more about the AMMS applications, see the following customer documents:

9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI) OA&M, 401-710-602
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface is a network element that acts as the
Media Gateway Controller (MGC) for the MPC. The MM-SI is based on the
Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control Platform (LCP), which is an Advanced
Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA)-based platform.
Role of the MM-SI
The MM-SI functions as a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) using H.248 to control
connections in the PSG.
MM-SI functions and network services
The MM-SI performs the following functions within the MPC:
Provides control of the overall connection topology for calls handled by the CMS
Functions as a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) using H.248 to control connections
in the PSG
Supports signalling to ISDN User Part (ISUP) networks
Supports signalling to Session Initiation Protocol for ISUP (SIP-ISUP) networks.
The MM-SI supports the following network services:
Service handover and access restrictions
Regulatory services
Emergency call service
Call setup
SMS
Hardware platform
The MM-SI component of the CMS is the state-of-the-art ATCA v2 platform, built upon
the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control Platform.
User interfaces
The MM-SI is managed at the network element level using the following user interfaces:
MI-Agent GUI
Provisioning GUI
Command Line Interface (CLI)
In addition, the 9290 MM-SI can be centrally managed by the 9253 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network v3 (9253 OMC-RAN v3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For further information on the MM-SI, see the following documents:
Mobile Packet Core Overview, 401-710-600

9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface Operations, Administration and
Maintenance OA&M, 401-710-602
MM-SI Alarm Dictionary, 401-710-603
MM-SI Performance Measurements User Guide, 401-710-604
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
5-6

6
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes following the different versions of the Alcatel-Lucent packet
switch, all of which are used in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:
9281 Packet Switch

9281 Packet Switch Compact
Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) application configuration
This chapter also describes the special features that are used on the Packet Switch to
support the CDMA 3G1X and 1xEV-DO network.
Contents
6-3
Basics of the 9281 Packet Switch
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-10
About the PSm
6-14
About the 9281 Packet Switch software
6-18
9281 Packet Switch connections to other network elements
6-19
6-22
6-23
6-25
Basics of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc)
6-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact hardware
6-28
6-29
About the AWS hardware
6-30
About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact software
6-31
Connections to other network elements
6-32
6-35
6-36
6-38
About the Packet Switch Gateway (PSG)
6-39
About the H.248 interface
6-40
About the PSG hardware
6-41
PSG connections to other network elements
6-42
User interfaces
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
Support for IP Backhaul
6-47
Support for Ethernet Backhaul
6-49
Support for IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO)
6-50
6-51
Support for the SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling Gateway (SG) feature
6-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-2

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch (PS), which was formerly
called the 5ESS Switch.
Contents
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-10
About the PSm
6-14
6-18
6-19
6-22
6-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9281 Packet Switch?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch provides the bearer switching resources of the
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 3G1X network. The 9281 Packet Switch interconnects the cell
sites of the CDMA network with voice, data and SMS core networks.
How the Packet Switch works
Calls to and from the telephone network, and mobile-to-mobile calls within different
service areas, pass through the 9281 Packet Switch. Calls from mobile to mobile within
the same service area need not enter the telephone network. Such calls are usually
switched by the 9281 Packet Switch via loop around trunks for completion over the cell
site radio links.
Benefits of the 9281 Packet Switch
The 9281 Packet Switch has many benefits. The 9281 Packet Switch:
Has a modular architecture. The Packet Switch can be deployed from the smallest to
the largest applications, with smooth easy growth (or even degrowth) between
deployments of any size. This protects equipment investment by allowing
cost-efficient upgrades.
Contains duplicated hardware and software to provide continuous availability and
reliability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 9281 Packet Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Components
The 9281 Packet Switch is made up of the following major components:
AM
CM
SM
Optical Interface Unit (OIU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Administrative Module?
The Administrative Module (AM) is a server to which a wide range of utility equipment
can be added. The AM consists of one required cabinet, known as the Processor Cabinet,
that contains duplexed units housed in the cabinet.
The AM supports maintenance and administration functions and the interface to external
Operations Support Systems. The AM performs the following high-level global functions:
Controls data storage and backup capabilities

Coordinates system maintenance
Provides human-machine interfaces
Supports external systems interfaces
Components
The AM consists of the following components:

Processor Cabinet
The Processor Cabinet houses the Control Unit (CU), Input/Output Processor (IOP), and
the Disk File Controller (DFC).
Control Unit
The Control Unit (CU) is a 32-bit processor used for the execution of the software that
controls the system. The CU also stores data and software that is directly needed.
Input/Output Processor
The Input/Output Processor (IOP) is an independent processor used for control of the
other utility equipment. This equipment performs input/output functions as well as alarm
signalling.
Disk File Controller
The Disk File Controller (DFC) is an independent processor used for the control of the
SCSI disk and tape units. The disk units perform the backup memory function. Data and
software that is not directly needed is stored on the disk units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Communications Module?
The Communications Module (CM) provides fiber-optic interconnections to the switch

modules (SMs), switches network data, voice, and control messages, and distributes
timing and synchronization.
The CM3 is capable of supporting PSU Based SS7 with up to 256k trunking capacity
with NxTMS.
Figure 6-2 9281 Packet Switch Communications Module
Message Switch
The Message Switch handles the distribution of messages between the AM and SMs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time Multiplexed Switch (TMS)
The Time Multiplexed Switch (TMS) provides the setup and connection of paths between
the SMs, and between the message switch and the SMs.
Quad Link Packet Switch (QLPS)
The Quad Link Packet Switch (QLPS) provides the setup and connection of paths
between SMs.
Communication Module Processor (CMP)
The Communication Module Processor (CMP) performs call routing, network time slot
hunting, trunk hunting, global resource allocation, and a significant part of the recent
change function.
Communication Module Control Unit (CMCU)
The Communication Module Control Unit (CMCU) is a processor unit that controls all
functions of the CM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Switching Module?
The Switching Module (SM) is a component of the 9281 Packet Switch that performs
various roles, such as call processing, routing, termination, and trunk management.
The SM terminates TDM circuit trunks and packet trunks.
The SM terminates and interconnects cell site backhaul to packet processing functions
such as frame selection, vocoding and echo cancellation, and provides interfaces to circuit
and packet circuit voice, packet voice, and packet data networks.
Within the SM the Packet Switch unit provides time division switching functions.
Switch Module Processor Units (SMPUs)
A variety of Switch Module Processor Units (SMPUs) are available for use within the
Packet Switch SM.
SMPU4
SMPU5
SMU6
SMPU5
The Switch Module Processor Unit version 5 (SMPU5) is an enhanced version of the
SMPU4 that contains a two-shelf unit that supports one service group per shelf. The
SMPU5 does the following:
Supports all SMPU4 functions

Integrates the DCS3 functions that resided in the digital service unit 3 (DSU3) in the
SMPU4
Combines the power converter and control/display (PC) boards in one board.
The SMPU5 supports the 50 MHz CORE60 processors with 64 MB of on-board memory,
or the 700 MHz CORE700 processors with 384 MB of on-board memory. The 700 MHz
CORE700 provides a much faster processor than the SMPU4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMU6 (SM-XC)
The SM-XC (also called the SMU6) is a next generation SM-2000. The SM-XC
significantly reduces footprint and power consumption while preserving the operational
software of the SM-2000. The SM-XC maintains the ability to support all the peripherals
that the SM-2000 supports (limiting the number of PIDB/PICB peripherals). Some key
engineering differences between the SM-XC and SM-2000 are as follows:
SM-XC hardware is packaged into a single, double-high shelf referred to as Switch

Module Unit 6 (SMU6)
TSIUCOM and TSIS0 functions are combined on a single pack
New TSI Slice pack (TSIS3X) with three times the port capacity, where each
equivalent TSIS partition on the TSIS3X can be individually grown via software as
needed
Single CI2 per SG
Single XDX per SG which reduces the number of PIDBs available

Two MH slots per SG (numbered MH0 and MH2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-3 SM-XC shelf layout
Packet Switching Unit (PSU)
The PSU handles CDMA traffic to and from the CDMA mobile unit through the cell site.
Digital Line Trunk Unit (DLTU)
A Digital Line Trunk Unit (DLTU) is housed in an LCP cabinet and used to concentrate
and terminate digital trunks.
PSm
The most commonly used configuration of the SM is the PSm. The PSm is described in
the next topic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-12

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information on other SM configurations
For information on other SM configurations, see the documentation listed at the end of
this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-13

About the PSm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the PSm

Common hardware
The 9281 Packet Switch shares common PSm hardware with the 9281 Packet Switch
Compact and with the PSG.
What is the PSm?
The PSm is a particular physical configuration of the Switching Module (SM). The PSm
indicates the single cabinet SM.
PSm components
The major components of the PSm include the following:
SM-XC (also called the SMU6) - a next generation SM-2000. The SM-XC reduces
footprint and power significantly while preserving the operational software of the
SM-2000. The SM-XC backplane is designed to simultaneously support both circuit
and packet fabrics and peripherals, providing a smooth evolution path to broadband
and next generation media gateway technologies.
CORE 970 Processor The latest generation of SM Core Processor that provides call
control and maintenance management of the PSm.
iPS The enhanced Packet Switch Unit that changes the PSU architecture from a hub
architecture to a switched Ethernet. The Packet Fanout 3 provides dedicated
bandwidth to each shelf (up to 1.6 Gbps per shelf) resulting in greater call handling
capacity. The iPS extends the PSU2e (enhanced Packet Switch Unit) to support
Gigabit Ethernet technology and gigabit intra-shelf communication.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-14

About the PSm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Interface Unit (OIU) provides an integrated highly efficient SONET OC-3
(SDH STM-1 for International) transmission facility interface and trunk side services
for PSTN/PTT interconnect. The OIU provides automatic protection switching
capability and is the densest trunking platform in a TDM switch. The OIU provides
95% footprint reduction and 90% power reduction over its predecessors.
Hardware diagram
Figure 6-4, Hardware components of the PSm (p. 6-16) shows a sketch of the PSm
containing the SMU6 (SM-XC) on the bottom, iPS shelves in the middle and iPS-2e
shelves on the top.
Note: Figure 6-4, Hardware components of the PSm (p. 6-16) shows just one
version of the PSm. Other versions have iPS-h front and back on the middle shelf
level, or just front side iPS-h shelf only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-15

About the PSm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-4 Hardware components of the PSm
Legend
Match the numbers in the list below to the numbers in the previous figure to understand
each hardware component of the PSm.
1. MFFU - The Modular Fuse/Filter Unit (MFFU) controls power for the oscillator
pack, which is an electronic circuit used to generate electrical signals at a desired
frequency.
2. iPS-2e shelves - Zero, one, or two medium-speed PSU shelves, each equipped with
the Packet Fanout version 3 (PF3) circuit boards used to distribute PSU packet traffic
to the PH cards on the shelf. The iPS-2e shelf supports the same PHs that are also
used in the PSU2e.
3. Fan Trays - Two shelves that hold 2 fans each (1 front, 1 back) for cooling of
surrounding equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-16

About the PSm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. One of the following:

The iPS-h shelves consist of 1 or 2 high-speed PSU shelves, each equipped with
the Packet Fanout version 4 (PF4) circuit boards used to distribute PSU packet
traffic to the PH cards on the shelf. Additionally, the iPS-h shelf is equipped with
the Control Fanout version 4 (CF4) that interconnects the iPS-h shelf/shelves and
the iPS-2e shelf/shelves. The iPS-h shelf supports PH cards, specifically designed
for the shelf, that operate at gigabit speeds.
i-OIU - The iOIU is an SM-XC/SMU6 peripheral trunk unit that terminates
OC-3/OC-3c facilities. The iOIU converts timeslotted subscriber data and
signalling to the Peripheral Control and Timing (PCT) link format. The iOIU
supports the Optical Carrier Level 3 (OC-3) or Optical Carrier Level 3
Concatenated (OC-3c) format.
5. SM-XC The Switching Module-XC (SM-XC)/Switching Module Unit Model 6
(SMU6) is a duplex processor unit that contains both the Module Controller (MC) and
Time Slot Interchanger (TSI) circuit packs.
Note: In the sketch, the iPS is (4), the iOIU is (5) and the SM-XC/SMU6 is (6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outside the scope of this document
A discussion of the software on the 9281 Packet Switch is outside the scope of this
document. For a detailed discussion of the software on the 9281 Packet Switch, see the
Packet Switch customer documentation listed at the end of this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network interfaces
Trunks and data links are used to interconnect network elements.

Diagram
The following diagram shows how network elements within the 9281 Packet Switch
connect to other network elements.
Figure 6-5 9281 Packet Switch architecture and interfaces
Access Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trunks
The 9281 Packet Switch uses various types of trunks to connect to the other network
elements in the wireless system:
Cell site trunks connect the cell site and the 9281 Packet Switch.
Loop-around trunks connect intra-PS mobile-to-mobile voice calls.
Network interface trunks provide voice paths between the Central Office (in the
PSTN/In-Building PRI) and the 9281 Packet Switch.
The Packet Control Function (PCF) on Protocol Handler for Ethernet Model 2
(PHE2) trunk extends the 9281 Packet Switch Wireless Network to a Packet Data
Serving Node (PDSN) over a 100 Mbps Ethernet Link.
Inter-vendor trunks provide clear channel voice and data paths to other vendors
systems.
Recorded announcement trunks connect calls to prerecorded announcement
equipment.
The Speech Handler trunks convert voice packets to and from pulse code modulation
(PCM).
Digital Trunks are facilities on the 9281 Packet Switch that terminate the IOU. The
IOU terminates on the OIU.
The CDMA 3G1X High Speed Packet Data (3G1X PD) trunk processes data packets
between the mobile and the packet network. Note that CDMA 3rd Generation First
Release Packet Data (3G1X PD) Service is synonymous with 3rd Generation (3G)
Packet Data.
What is the Global SM?
The Global SM serves as an interface point between the Packet Switch and the Service
Provider's signalling network. The Global SM contains the Global Signaling PSU.
What is the Signaling PSU?
One PSU within each Packet Switch provides all the signalling between the Packet
Switch and other network elements. This PSU is called the Signalling PSU. The
Signalling PSU handles all traffic to and from the Access Manager and the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
External Signaling PSU connections
The Signaling PSU connects to the PSTN via ISUP/SS7 signalling, for circuit-based calls,
and SIP signalling for packet-based call.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-20

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signaling PSU connection to MMCv2, MMCv1, and MM
The Signaling PSU connects to the MM, MMCv1 and MMCv2 -based 9290 Access
Managers via fully associated (F-link) SS7 data links. These duplicated SS7 data links
carry the ECP/DCS control messages between the 9290 Access Manager and the 9281
Packet Switch.
Signaling PSU connection to MMCv4
The Signaling PSU connects to an MMCv4-based 9290 Access Manager via an

SCTP/IP/Ethernet link. This link carries the ECP/DCS control messages between the
9290 Access Manager and the 9281 Packet Switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-21

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
The following interfaces can be used to administer and monitor the 9281 Packet Switch:
Master Control Center (MCC)

Trunk Line and Work Station (TLWS)
Read-only Printer (ROP)
The 9256 OMP, which provides cut-through capabilities for PS OA&M, including
RC/V, TLWS, MCC and ROP access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NAR documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch
For NAR versions of documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch, see the following:
Tools for the wireless 9281 Packet Switch, see the 5ESS Switch Release 5E15 and
Later System Maintenance Requirements and Tools, 235-105-110
The wireless 9281 Packet Switch, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance, 235-200-100
9281 Packet Switch input messages, see the 5ESS Switch Output Messages 5E15
and Later Software Release, 235-600-700
9281 Packet Switch output messages, see the 5ESS Switch Output Messages 5E15
MCC screens, see the 5ESS Switch Release 5E15 and Later System Maintenance
Requirements and Tools, 235-105-110
For a list of other 9281 Packet Switch customer documentation see the list of
DOCUMENT REFERENCES in the 235-200-100.
International documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch
For International versions of documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch, see the
following:
Administration Guidelines Manual, 5AG

Asserts Manual, 5AS
Application Audits Manual, 5AU

Commands and Reports Manual, 5CR
ECD/System Generation Data Base Manual, 5ES
Hardware Change Manual, 5HC
Hardware Description Manual, 5HD
Interface Specifications Manual, 5IS
Measurements Manual, 5MM

Maintenance Procedures Manual, 5MP
Operation Procedures Manual, 5OP
Processor Recovery Messages Manual, 5PR

Recent Change Manual, 5RC
Recovery Procedures Manual, 5RP
System Audits Manual, 5SA

System Functions Manual, 5SF
Subscriber Feature Procedures Manual, 5SP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation on the 9256 OMP and the OMC-RAN
For information on
The 9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256
OMP)
OMC-RAN) Compact, see Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and Maintenance Center
Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact)

Training on the 9281 Packet Switch
To find training on the 9281 Packet Switch, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the

following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search for 9281
Packet Switch.
9281 Packet Switch call flows
For an explanation of call flows (voice paths) for the 9281 Packet Switch, see the 5ESS
Switch Packet Switch for CDMA Network Operations, Administration, and Maintenance,
235-200-100.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-24

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc).
Contents
6-26
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-35
6-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-25

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9281 Packet Switch Compact?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc) is a reduced-size version of the
9281 Packet Switch that deliver the same dependable CDMA features in a greatly reduced
footprint.
How it works
Like the 9281 Packet Switch, the 9281 Packet Switch Compact uses the PSm for
switching. However, in the 9281 PSc, the AM and the CM are eliminated. Necessary AM
and CM software runs on a Sun server, the Administrative Work Station (AWS).
Supported iPS configurations
The 9281 PSc supports all Intelligent Packet Switch (iPS) configuration capabilities,
including the following:
All supported PHV types (PHV7 required for full capacity)

FastE or GigE IP Backhaul
FastE Packet Trunks (GigE)
FastE PCF for 3G1X data
OC3 ATM SHO and GigE IP SHO

Frame Relay PP Backhaul
Availability
The 9281 PSc is available both Internationally and in the North American Region (NAR).
Benefits of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact
The 9281 Packet Switch Compact has many benefits. The 9281 Packet Switch Compact:
Has a reduced cost, footprint and power consumption.

Provides high capacity and performance.
Is evolvable from circuit to packet network and to IMS/IP network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-26

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagram
The following diagram shows the architecture and interfaces of the 9281 Packet Switch
Compact. Note that the architecture and the interfaces shown in this diagram are the same
as for the 9281 Packet Switch.
Figure 6-6 9281 Packet Switch Compact architecture and interfaces
Access Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-27

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Major components
The major components of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact are the following:
Administrative Workstation (AWS)

Pedestal - Local Power Distribution Cabinet (Ped-LPDC)
Packet Switch Module (PSm)
What is the PSm?
The PSm is the switching component of the PSc. The PSm replaces all of the switching
components of the Packet Switch.
What is the Administrative Workstation (AWS)?
The Administrative Workstation (AWS) is a processor that runs AM and CM software and
supports administrative control for the PSc.
What is the Local Power Distribution Cabinet (LPDC)?
The Local Power Distribution Cabinet (LPDC) performs the same function as a single
panel Local Power Distribution Cabinet (LPDC). The Ped-LPDC is an alternative power
cabinet solution for very small applications that is comprised of a pedestal base and an
enclosure that replaces the full power cabinet. The Ped-LPDC houses a single power
panel (panel will be equipped with 24 fuse blocks for 25 Amp fuses per both A and B
bus), and a single alarm panel. The Ped-LPDC may be installed remotely up to 25 feet
away from the Switching equipment cabinets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-28

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common hardware
The 9281 Packet Switch Compact shares common PSm hardware with the 9281 PS and
with the PSG.
For a description of the PSm hardware, see About the PSm (p. 6-14).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workstation
The Administrative Work Station (AWS) is a Sun Netra 240 or Netra T5220. The
Sun Netra 240 is a powerful UNIX -based workstation.
About the Administrative Workstation (AWS)
The AWS contains those elements that support administrative control within the PSc. This
includes the following:
Mirrored disc functionality for improved reliability

An Ethernet port to interface with the PSm
Connections to the DAT drive unit
Low speed interface (LSI) card for data link connections

Terminal and printer connections
Administrative control for software download and software images.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-30

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The 9281 Packet Switch Compact software can be classified into the following
categories:
PSm software
AWS software
Function of the PSm software
The PSm software carries out the following functions:
Frame Selection (FS)

Frame Distribution (FD)
Packet Control Function (PCF)
Vocoder
Frame Selector pool

Message routing for trunks
Cell site backhaul Servers (IPBH)
Network Protocol Handler (NPH)
IP Soft Handoff
Function of the AWS software
The AWS software carries out the following functions
Emulating the Administrative Module (AM)

Emulating the Communication Module (CM)
Supporting administrative control for the PSc
For a detailed discussion of the software of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact, see the
customer documentation listed at the end of this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-31

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagram
The following diagram shows how network elements within the 9281 Packet Switch
Compact connect to other network elements.
Figure 6-7 9281 Packet Switch Compact architecture and interfaces
Access Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-32

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trunks
The 9281 Packet Switch uses various types of trunks to connect to the other network
elements in the wireless system:
Cell site trunks connect the cell site and the 9281 Packet Switch.
Loop-around trunks connect intra-PS mobile-to-mobile voice calls.
Network interface trunks provide voice paths between the Central Office (in the
PSTN/In-Building PRI) and the 9281 Packet Switch.
The Packet Control Function (PCF) on Protocol Handler for Ethernet Model 2
(PHE2) trunk extends the 9281 Packet Switch Wireless Network to a Packet Data
Serving Node (PDSN) over a 100 Mbps Ethernet Link.
Inter-vendor trunks provide clear channel voice and data paths to other vendors
systems.
Recorded announcement trunks connect calls to prerecorded announcement
equipment.
The Speech Handler trunks convert voice packets to and from pulse code modulation
(PCM).
Digital Trunks are facilities on the 9281 Packet Switch that terminate the IOU. The
IOU terminates on the OIU.
The CDMA 3G1X High Speed Packet Data (3G1X PD) trunk processes data packets
between the mobile and the packet network. Note that CDMA 3rd Generation First
Release Packet Data (3G1X PD) Service is synonymous with 3rd Generation (3G)
Packet Data.
What is the Global SM?
The Global SM serves as an interface point between the Packet Switch and the Service
Provider's signalling network. The Global SM contains the Global Signaling PSU.
What is the Signaling PSU?
One PSU within each Packet Switch provides all the signalling between the Packet
Switch and other network elements. This PSU is called the Signalling PSU. The
Signalling PSU handles all traffic to and from the Access Manager and the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The Signaling PSU is contained in the Global SM.
External Signaling PSU connections
The Signaling PSU connects to the PSTN via ISUP/SS7 signalling, for circuit-based calls,
and SIP signalling for packet-based call.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-33

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signaling PSU connection to MMCv2, MMCv1, and MM
The Signaling PSU connects to the MM, MMCv1 and MMCv2 -based 9290 Access
Managers via fully associated (F-link) SS7 data links. These duplicated SS7 data links
carry the ECP/DCS control messages between the 9290 Access Manager and the 9281
Packet Switch.
Signaling PSU connection to MMCv4
The Signaling PSU connects to an MMCv4-based 9290 Access Manager via an

SCTP/IP/Ethernet link. This link carries the ECP/DCS control messages between the
9290 Access Manager and the 9281 Packet Switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
The following interfaces can be used to administer and monitor the 9281 Packet Switch
Compact:
The Administrative Workstation

The 9256 OMP, which provides cut-through capabilities for PSc OA&M, including

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-35

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NAR documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch
For NAR versions of documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch, see the following:
Tools for the wireless 9281 Packet Switch, see the 5ESS Switch Release 5E15 and
Later System Maintenance Requirements and Tools, 235-105-110
The wireless 9281 Packet Switch, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance, 235-200-100
9281 Packet Switch input messages, see the 5ESS Switch Output Messages 5E15
9281 Packet Switch output messages, see the 5ESS Switch Output Messages 5E15
MCC screens, see the 5ESS Switch Release 5E15 and Later System Maintenance
Requirements and Tools, 235-105-110
International documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch
For International versions of documentation for the 9281 Packet Switch, see the
following:
Administration Guidelines Manual, 5AG

Asserts Manual, 5AS
Application Audits Manual, 5AU

Commands and Reports Manual, 5CR
ECD/System Generation Data Base Manual, 5ES
Hardware Change Manual, 5HC
Hardware Description Manual, 5HD
Interface Specifications Manual, 5IS
Measurements Manual, 5MM

Maintenance Procedures Manual, 5MP
Operation Procedures Manual, 5OP
Processor Recovery Messages Manual, 5PR

Recent Change Manual, 5RC
Recovery Procedures Manual, 5RP
System Audits Manual, 5SA

System Functions Manual, 5SF
Subscriber Feature Procedures Manual, 5SP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-36

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation on the 9256 OMP
For information on the 9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management

9281 Packet Switch Compact call flows
For an explanation of call flows (voice paths) for the 9281 Packet Switch Compact, see
the 5ESS Switch Packet Switch for CDMA Network Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance, 235-200-100.
Note that call flows are the same for the 9281 Packet Switch Compact, except that the
9281 Packet Switch Compact has only one SM, instead of the multiple SMs in the 9281
Packet Switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-37

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the application configuration of the 9281 Packet Switch that is
called the Packet Switch Gateway (PSG).
Contents
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
User interfaces
6-43
6-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-38

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the PSG?
The Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) is an application configuration of the 9281 Packet
Switch (PS) that includes an H.248 interface to the MM-SI.
The PSG supports basic Media Gateway functions as well as supporting wireless
backhaul and features via the H.248 interface.
Use of the PSG
The PSG is used in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC) Access Manager.
Does not support SS7 and SIP signalling
In the PSG, all SS7 and SIP signalling has been moved off the switch and onto the 9290
MM-SI.
Does not support Frame Relay Backhaul
The PSG does not support Frame Relay Backhaul.

Extra supported functions
In addition to the traditional media gateway functions, such as switching and transcoding,
the PSG supports functions typically found on a Media Resource Function Processor
(MRFP). These MRFP functions include the following:
Standard and customized tones and announcements

Conferencing
Digit collection
Other integrated bearer resource capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-39

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Function of H.248 interface
The H.248 interface controls all of the PSG capabilities.

The H.248 interface supports establishment of basic calls, supplementary services,
handover, and so forth, via the PSG, as well as supporting traditionally MRFP functions,
such as applying tones, announcements, prompt and collect, and conferencing via the
PSG.
What is H.248?
H.248 is an international standard for media gateway control, published by ITU and IETF,
primarily to separate call control logic from media processing logic in a gateway. The
term H.248 is also used to refer to the use of H.248 as a Media Gateway Standard that
replaces the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP).
Implemented in a Protocol Handler
The H.248 interface is implemented in the PSG as specialized software on an existing

PHE4 protocol handler.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Common hardware
The 9281 Packet Switch Compact shares common PSm hardware with the 9281 PS and
with the PSG.
For a description of the PSm hardware, see About the PSm (p. 6-14).
Additional protocol handlers
The PSG adds an active/standby pair of protocol handlers to support H.248 traffic.
Different configurations available
The PSG supported in this offer is a configuration consisting of an Administrative

Module (AM), a Communications Module 3 (CM3), and one or more SMs. Each SM can
either be a single frame PSm configuration or a multi-frame SM configuration. An
Optical Interface Unit (OIU) provides terminations for STM-1/OC-3 interfaces.
Must be full-sized switch
The PSG is built on a full-size 9281 Packet Switch (PS), since the 9281 Packet Switch
Compact (PSc) cannot be used within the MPC.
For further information on the PSG hardware, see the Mobile Packet Core (MPC)
Overview, 401-710-600.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-41

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mostly the same as 9281 PS
The PSG connections to other network elements are mostly the same as in the 9281 PS,
with one addition: an H.248 interface.
H.248 interface
An additional interface has been added to the PSG. The PSG directly communicates
directly with the 9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI) via H.248
protocol over this interface.
For more about the H.248 interface, see About the H.248 interface (p. 6-40).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-42

User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
User interfaces
The following interfaces can be used to administer and monitor the PSG:

The 9256 OMP, which provides cut-through capabilities for PS OA&M, including
The 9290 MM-SI for configuration management and for fault management (alarms
and connection status) involving the H.248 connection
The 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network v3 (9253
OMC-RAN v3), which provides limited access to key PSG information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-43

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To learn more about the PSG, see the Mobile Packet Core (MPC) Overview, 401-710-600.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-44

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes CDMA wireless features that are supported by the Alcatel-Lucent
packet switch in order to support the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
network.
Contents
6-46
6-47
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
To support Frame Relay Backhaul, a Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH) needs to be
created on the 9281 Packet Switch or 9281 Packet Switch Compact. The feature for this is
99-5E-7741, FRPH and IFRPH on PH22 Hardware.
Note: Frame Relay Backhaul is no longer available for purchase and is not supported
by the newer Access Managers.
What is the FRPH?
The FRPH is a software image on a Protocol Handler (PH) on the SM that is used to
terminate the packet pipes, containing voice packets, that go to and from cell trunk
facilities.
How it works
The FRPH, in the forward direction, receives traffic packets from the packet pipe (PP)
and routes them to a Speech Handler (SH) or Autoplex Data trunk (ADT) or High Speed
Packet Data (HSPD) Trunk. In the reverse direction, the FRPH receives traffic frames
from the SH or ADT or HSPD Trunk, and transmits the traffic frames on the PP to the
base station.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-46

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
To support IP Backhaul, a Backhaul Protocol Handler (BPH) needs to be created on the

9281 Packet Switch or 9281 Packet Switch Compact.
Features
For the PH3, the features are the following:
99-5E-8530, PHE3 for IP Backhaul PH

99-5E-8530, Protocol Handler for ETHERNET Model 3 (PHE3) for Internet
Protocol Backhaul (IPBH) feature
For the PH4, the features are the following:
12092.0, Gigabit IP Backhaul (NAR)
12092.1, Gigabit IP Backhaul (INTL)

12092.2, Gigabit IP Backhaul - Long Lead
(NAR) 12092.3, Gigabit IP Backhaul - Long Lead (INTL)
What is the BPH?
The Backhaul Protocol Handler (BPH) on the PSU in the SM supports IP transport
between the base stations and PSU. The IP Backhaul PHE3 (BPH) is a TN113 pack that
has a 100 Mbps ETHERNET paddleboard interface.
How it works
The Protocol Handler for ETHERNET Model 3 (PHE3) for Internet Protocol Backhaul
(IPBH) feature provides the PHE3 the ability to terminate bearer traffic from Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) base stations over IP (Internet Protocol) and transfer
them to target PHs in the PSU. The BPH (PHE3) supports a single Fast Ethernet
(100BaseT full duplex) interface to the external backhaul network. The BPH has software
and a Network Processor Field Programmable Gate Array (NP FPGA) that supports
traffic packet bundling and Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) compression using a
proprietary bundling layer call UDPMux. The BPH transports bearer traffic using a
proprietary application layer protocol named UDPMux over UDP and IP. The UDPMux
enables improved utilization of T1s/E1s by bundling several bearer traffic frames into a
single IP datagram.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-47

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the BPH
The BPH provides increased base station backhaul terminations density at the 9281
Packet Switch or 9281 Packet Switch Compact, reduces backhaul facility costs because
NxDS0 nail-ups through the switch are not used, and enables an increase in BHCA on the
iPS.
The IP Backhaul architecture also:
Reduces the need of Packet Pipes termination

Eliminates DS0 grooming
Simplifies backhaul facility engineering and provisioning to reduce administrative
overhead
Simplifies PSU engineering
Eliminates engineering and provisioning of base station signalling links
Increases SM-2000 call capacity by not using TSI resources that otherwise would be
used
Allows the separation of voice and data traffic
Can co-exist with FRPH
Prior to the introduction of IP Backhaul, the base station to PSU backhaul interface was
the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH). The IP Backhaul feature may reduce or
replace the need for FRPHs. However, BPHs and FRPHs will be allowed to coexist on the
same PSU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-48

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Same as for IP Backhaul
Ethernet Backhaul uses the same architecture used for IP Backhaul.

For information on the 9281 Packet Switch or 9281 Packet Switch Compact changes for
IP Backhaul, see Support for IP Backhaul (p. 6-47).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-49

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The IP Soft Handoff feature (IPSHO) provides the ability for PSU to PSU traffic to be
transported over an IP network. The feature for this is 12324.0, IP Soft Handoff
(99-5E-8688).
What is a soft handoff?
Soft Handoff is a CDMA term that describes the case where a cell phone is
simultaneously connected to two or more cells (or cell sectors) during a call.
What is IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO)?
IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO) provides the ability for PSU to PSU traffic to be transported
over an IP network using a Gigabit Ethernet Interface.
How it works
The IPSHO feature gives service providers a large transport pipe on the PSU to eliminate
the cumbersome ATM network administrative provisioning associated with the ATM
network administrative overhead.
Benefits
When IPSHO is deployed in networks with other IP-based applications such as IP

Backhaul, service providers can potentially use common network equipment for both IP
Backhaul and the IPSHO applications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-50

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Feature 99-5E-7868, the PCF on the PHE2 feature, provides an option to handle 3G1X
CDMA packet data within the 9281 Packet Switch or 9281 Packet Switch Compact.
What is the PCF?
The Packet Control Function (PCF) maintains the connection between the mobile unit
and the Packet Data Service Node (PDSN). The PDSN connects the mobile unit to the
WAN and provides for routing of packet data traffic.
What is the PHE2?
There are two types of PHE2:
The Protocol Handler for Ethernet Model 2 (PHE2) is a sub-platform in a PH31 with
a paddle board that terminates one IEEE 802.3 electrical fast Ethernet connection.
The Protocol Handler for Ethernet Model 2, Optical (PHE2O) is a sub-platform in a
PH31 with a paddle board that terminates one IEEE 802.3 optical fast Ethernet
connection.
Importance of the PHE2
The PHE2 interworks with other Packet Handlers (PHs) and provides Ethernet
connectivity for other PHs that do not have direct Ethernet connectivity, for example,
DPH (PHV5 loaded with the Packet Data Service application).
What is the PCF on PHE2 feature?
The Packet Control Function (PCF) on the Protocol Handler ETHERNET model 2
(PHE2) feature places the PCF functionality inside the 9281 Packet Switch and adds the
ETHERNET-link component (100 Mbps) to the Wireless overall network architecture.
The Packet Control Function Protocol Handler (PCFPH) terminates the Radio Packet
(R-P, also know as A10/A11) protocol. With this feature, service providers can choose
between the external option and the integrated option for the PCF. For the integrated
option, the PCF on PHE2 feature is required.
How it works
With the PCF on PHE2 feature, the PCF function moves into the 9281 Packet Switch. The
PCFPH function is to set up and tear down sessions between the mobile set and the
PDSN. The PCFPH connects to the PDSN via an open Radio Network-to-Protocol Data
Serving Node (R-P) interface over a 100Base TX full duplex Ethernet link. Once a
session is set up, the PCF simply relays data between the mobile and the PDSN. Open
sessions are either active or dormant. An open active session requires PHV/DPH, Packet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-51

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bus and PCFPH PDSN Ethernet connection resources for connecting a base station to
the PDSN for the session. A transition of an open active session to an open dormant
session releases these resources with the exception of the PCFPH PDSN Ethernet
connection. When a session is reactivated, the session transitions from the open dormant
state to the open active state. The PCFPH must maintain within its memory information
about a session when a session goes dormant to reactivate an open dormant session to the
open active session. An open session can have a number of these open active open
dormant transitions throughout the lifetime of the session.
Open interface
While the base station to Access Manager and 9281 Packet Switch call processing
proprietary call model is kept the same for the PCF on PHE2 feature, an open
multi-vendor R-P interface is introduced. The R-P interface consists of A11 signalling and
A10 bearer messages passed between the PCFPH and the PDSN. The open R-P interface
allows service providers to select PDSNs from third party vendors.
Diagram
The following figure shows a high-level view of the architecture when the PCF on PHE2
is part of the MSC.
Figure 6-8 PCF on PHE2 as part of the MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-52

Support for the SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling Gateway (SG)

feature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
To support the Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) option on the 9281 Packet Switch, a
method is needed to turn the PS into a Signaling Gateway.
Feature
Feature ID 14300.20, SIGTRAN M3UA SG on ALU 9281 PS (INTL), supplies the

capability to create the application configuration that turns a 9281 PS into a PSG.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-53
Support for the SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling Gateway (SG)

feature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
6-54
Base stations
7
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations that are used or can be
used in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
Contents
About Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations
7-2
7-6
About base station hardware
7-7
About base station software
7-10
Base station connections to other network elements
7-11
Base station user interfaces
7-13
7-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-1
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is a base station?
users in a cell and also connects mobile units to the Mobile Switching Center.
For smaller base stations, the term base station includes the prefabricated container that
the base station is in. For larger base stations, which are housed in buildings, the term
cell site is used to describe the building, the antennas and related equipment at the top
of the tower, plus the base station.
How it works
Each base station provides the radio functionality for a geographical area, known as a
cell, and handles cellular traffic within that cell. When a mobile unit moves to a
different geographic region, or cell, handling of the call is passed on to the base station
within the new cell.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-2
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-1 Conceptual view of base stations and cells
Same as Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
In Alcatel-Lucent customer documentation and in this document, the term Base

Transceiver Station (BTS) is used interchangeably with the term base station. Both refer
to the same network element.
What is a CDMA base station?
A CDMA base station carries out all the functions of a base station but does the work
using the CDMA air interface. Since the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network is a CDMA-based
network, all base stations that work with this network must be CDMA base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-3
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Differences
Alcatel-Lucent base stations are available for a number of different deployment

configurations. These configurations are based on:
Expected voice/data call load

Base station release
Where the base station is to be installed
Whether or not the base station has integrated power
The software in each base station differs somewhat, to support each base station's
different capabilities.
Similarities
All current offerings of Alcatel-Lucent base stations, though they vary in size and planned
location, share certain key similarities:
They are CDMA base stations.

They share the same OA&M interfaces.
They share the same basic centralized design. Radio control data processing is
centralized and not done at the base station.
They offer a consistent suite of base stations and frames for service providers
addressing multiple market segments.
There is a migration strategy for each of them that leads to wideband voice and data
solutions and maximizes as much reuse as possible of equipment.
They can be configured to service 3G1X CDMA or 1xEV-DO high speed data
transmission air interfaces.
They can be turned into mixed-mode base stations.
Two separate CDMA air interfaces
3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO are both used in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
However, 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO, although they both are types of CDMA, use
different carriers over the air interface. All of the base stations described in this chapter
can support either air interface, or both.
Note that if a base station is configured to support 1xEV-DO, the base station must have
access to a 1xEV-DO Radio Access Network (RAN).
Mixed-mode base stations
Alcatel-Lucent base stations that support both 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO
simultaneously are called mixed-mode base stations. The mixed-mode base station has
separate 1xEV-DO components and 3G1X CDMA components in a shared frame. Some
cell components are also shared. The 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO components in a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-4
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mixed-mode base station must use the same type of physical transmission media to the
Mobile Switching Center (MSC), although they do not share one physical transmission
line. Mixed-mode base stations are used to support the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio
Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS), which is explained in Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO
Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network (p. 9-7).
Guide to individual base stations
For a description of all the currently-available Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations and
the capabilities of each, see Appendix C, Quick reference guide to Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA and 1xEV-DO base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-5
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Acronyms and what they mean
The acronyms for the major components of Alcatel-Lucent base stations are listed here,
along with the acronym expansions.
Table 7-1
Base station component acronyms
Acronym
Description
CBR/SBCBR
CDMA Base Band Radio/Single Board CDMA

Base Band Radio
CCUII/CCU-20/CCU-32
1.25 MHz Channel Element CDMA Channel Units
CDM
CDMA Digital Module
CMU
CDMA Modem Unit
CPC
Common Power Converter
CTU
Common Time Unit
EVM
1xEV-DO Modem board
MCR
Multi-Carrier Radio
OM
Oscillator Modules
TDU
Test and Diagnostic Unit
TFU
Timing and Frequency Unit
UCR
Universal CDMA Radio
URC
Universal Radio Controller
URCm
URC for 9218/9228 Base Station
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-6
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Providing detailed descriptions of the hardware for all the Alcatel-Lucent base stations is
beyond the scope of this document. Therefore, as an example, this chapter describes the
hardware for one base station, the Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro. For
descriptions of hardware for the other base stations see the customer documentation listed
at the end of this chapter.
The 9228 Base Station Macro has an outdoor and an indoor version.
Outdoor Cabinet
The 9228 Base Station Macro outdoor cabinet looks like this:
Figure 7-2 9228 Base Station Macro outdoor cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-7
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What follows is a labelled view of the cabinet. Note that the filters shown are examples
only. The actual filters may vary in size and quantity depending upon the band and the
configuration.
Figure 7-3 9228 Base Station Macro Outdoor Cabinet, with labels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-8
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Indoor Cabinet
The 9228 Base Station Macro indoor cabinet looks like this:
Figure 7-4 9228 Base Station Macro Indoor Cabinet Layout, with labels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-9
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
In the current generation of Alcatel-Lucent base stations, radio control data processing is
performed in a centralized location.
RCS
The Radio Cluster Server (RCS) application provides coordination and control of the
individual base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-10
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The physical and data link layer connections between a base station and the Mobile
Switching Center (MSC) vary, depending upon the type of base station and the type of
traffic that is sent between the base station and the MSC. Listed here are the possible
physical connections and corresponding data link layers that are used between base
stations and the MSC in an Alcatel-Lucent CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network.
For 3G1X CDMA-only base stations
For Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X CDMA-only base stations, the following types of connections
are used:
Packet pipes over T1/E1

IP over Multi-Link Point-To-Point Protocol (MLPPP) T1/E1 (IP Backhaul)
IP over Ethernet (Ethernet Backhaul)
For more information about these connections, look in the CDMA customer
documentation listed in Documentation and training (p. 7-14).
For 9271 EV-DO RAS-only base stations
For Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO RAS-only base stations, the following types of
connections are used:
IP over MLPPP T1/E1 (IP Backhaul)

IP over Ethernet (Ethernet Backhaul)
For more information about these connections, look in the 9271 EV-DO RAS customer
documentation listed in Documentation and training (p. 7-14).
For Mixed-mode base stations
For a definition of Mixed-mode base station, see Mixed-mode base stations (p. 7-4).
Note that the 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO components in a Mixed-mode base station
must use the same type of physical transmission media to the MSC, although they do not
share one physical transmission line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-11
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Alcatel-Lucent Mixed-mode base stations, the following types of connections are
used:
Both 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO components using IP over Ethernet (Ethernet
Backhaul)
Both 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO components using IP over MLPPP T1/E1 (IP
Backhaul)
3G1X CDMA components using packet pipes over T1/E1 and 1xEV-DO components
using MLPPP T1/E1 (IP Backhaul)
For more information about these connections, look in the 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO
customer documentation listed in Documentation and training (p. 7-14).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-12
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The primary user interfaces for the Alcatel-Lucent base stations are the:
9256 OMP
9253 OMC-RAN
Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-13
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Documentation on base stations
Document
number
Document title
401-703-407
CDMA Base Stations Operations, Administration and Maintenance
401-703-413
Alcatel-Lucent 9218/9228 Base Station Macro Outdoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-415
Alcatel-Lucent 9218/9228 Base Station Macro Indoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-417
Alcatel-Lucent 9218/9228 Base Station Macro HD Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-424
Alcatel-Lucent 9216/9226 Base Station Compact Indoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-426
Alcatel-Lucent 9216/9226 Base Station Compact Outdoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-443
Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro LP Indoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-445
Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact Indoor Site Preparation

Guideline
401-703-460
Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact Outdoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-473
Alcatel-Lucent 9222 Base Station Micro Site Preparation Guidelines
401-703-475
Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN (formerly BTS4401) Site

Preparation Guidelines
401-703-478
Alcatel-Lucent 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact Outdoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
401-703-486
Alcatel-Lucent Base Stations Macro 9218, 9228, 9228 LP, and 9228
Distributed System Description
401-703-487
Alcatel-Lucent 9222 Base Station Micro System Description
401-703-488
Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact/EN System Description

(includes 4401)
401-703-489
Alcatel-Lucent 9216/9226 Base Station Compact System Description
401-703-491
Alcatel-Lucent 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact System Description
401-703-492
Alcatel-Lucent 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact Indoor Site Preparation

Guidelines
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-14
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document
number
Document title
401-710-122
Flexent CDMA and PCS CDMA Modular Cell 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 and Compact
Modular Cell 3.0 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
401-710-223
CDMA 450 MHz Base Stations Operations, Administration and Maintenance
Documentation on other network elements
For information on the:
9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256
OMP)
9253 OMC-RAN, see Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio
9254 OMC-RAN Compact, see Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and Maintenance
Remote Maintenance Terminal, see Chapter 14, Remote Maintenance Terminal .

Training on base stations
For training on base stations, see the:
Overview of Flexent CDMA and CDMA Base Stations, CL5600C

(On the 1xEV-DO base station) 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System OA&M, CL5660C
CDMA Modular Cell Base Station Operations, Administration and Maintenance,
CL5690 class.
Flexent OneBTS 4.0 Modular Cell Pre-Deployment Seminar , CL5690S

CDMA Modular Cell 4.0 and Modular Cell 4.0B OA&M Differences, CL5693
Remote Maintenance Tool Usage, CL5696
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-15
Base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Base station call flows
Base station call flows are given in the base station customer documentation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
7-16
8 DMA 3G1X Packet Data

C
Service
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent option for CDMA 3G1X Packet Data Service:
Use of the PCF on PHE2 feature on the 9281 Packet Switch.
Broadband option
Note that Alcatel-Lucent provides an additional option for high-speed, high-capacity

wireless data and internet applications: the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access
System (9271 EV-DO RAS), which is described in Chapter 9, 9271 EV-DO Radio
Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS).
Both can be used
The purpose of listing the high-speed packet data option here along with the PCF on
PHE2 feature is to let you know that these options are not mutually exclusive. These
options can both be deployed in a single network, depending on the needs of the network.
Contents
About the PCF on PHE2 feature on the Packet Switch packet data option
8-2
About the PCF on the PHE2 feature
8-2
8-4
PCF on PHE2 user interface
8-5
8-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-1

Overview
About the PCF on PHE2 feature on the Packet Switch
packet data option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the PCF on PHE2 feature on the Packet

Switch packet data option
Introduction
You can send and receive 3G1X CDMA packet data using the packet control function
(PCF) on the Protocol Handler ETHERNET model 2 (PHE2) feature in the 9281 Packet
Switch.
This type of packet data transfer is sometimes called 1X packet data.
What is the PCF on the PHE2 feature?
The Packet Control Function (PCF) on the protocol handler ETHERNET model 2
(PHE2) feature places the PCF functionality on a PHE2 inside the 9281 Packet Switch
and adds the Ethernet link component (100 Mbps) to the Wireless overall network
architecture.
Diagram with PCF on PHE2
The following diagram shows the 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data
being handled by the PCF on PHE2 inside the 9281 Packet Switch. In the diagram the
lines show logical data flows between network elements.
Important! In the diagram, IP Backhaul is shown. However, IP Backhaul is not
required in order for the PCF on PHE2 option to work. Ethernet Backhaul is not
required either.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-2

packet data option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-1 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network with packet data handled by the PCF
on PHE2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-3

packet data option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Explained in the 9281 Packet Switch chapter
The Protocol Handler for Ethernet Model 2 (PHE2) is an embedded network element
within the 9281 Packet Switch. For information on how the PCF on PHE2 feature impacts
the 9281 Packet Switch, see Support for the PCF on PHE2 feature (p. 6-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-4

packet data option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The primary user interface for the 9281 Packet Switch is the Master Control Center
(MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station (TLWS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-5

packet data option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For further information on the PCF on PHE2 option, see the:
Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch Operations, Administration, and Maintenance ,

235-200-100
Training on the PCF on PHE2 option
For training on use of the PCF on PHE2 feature, see:
3G1X High Speed Packet Data Fundamentals, CL3737/CL3737C

3G Mobile IP Packet Data Operations, Administration and Maintenance CL5650
Flexent CDMA 3G-1X Planning and Implementation , CL8305
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
8-6
9271 EV-DO Radio Access

System (9271 EV-DO RAS)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271
EV-DO RAS) and all of the 9271 EV-DO RAS components, with emphasis on the 9271
EV-DO RNC.
Other option is available
Though this chapter focuses only on the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access
System (9271 EV-DO RAS), Alcatel-Lucent provides another option for adding
additional packet data processing to an existing 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network: use
of the PCF on the PHE2 feature. The PCF on the PHE2 feature supplies 1X data and is a
relatively low speed data service. The PCF on the PHE2 feature is explained in Chapter 8,
CDMA 3G1X Packet Data Service.
Contents
9271 EV-DO RAS
9-3
Definitions
9-4
9271 EV-DO RAS deployment options
9-6
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network
9-7
9-10
System components of the 9271 EV-DO RAS
9-13
9-16
About the Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)
9-17
9271 EV-DO RAS connections to other network elements
9-18
9271 EV-DO RAS user interfaces
9-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-21
9-23
9-24
Processors
9-25
UNAC with ATCA chassis
9-26
UNC with Netra servers
9-29
R1SR frame with Netra servers
9-31
9-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-2

9271 EV-DO RAS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9271 EV-DO RAS

Overview
Purpose
The topics in this section describe the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO
RAS).
Contents
Definitions
9-4
9-6
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network
9-7
9-10
9-13
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-20
9-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-3

9271 EV-DO RAS
Definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definitions
Introduction
This topic defines terms used in this chapter.

What is 1xEV-DO?
1xEV-DO stands for Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data Only, which is

abbreviated as EV-DO or EVDO or EV. 1xEV-DO is a telecommunications standard for
the wireless transmission of data through radio signals that is typically used for
broadband Internet access. 1xEV-DO is classified as a broadband technology because it
uses a broad band of radio frequencies. 1xEV-DO employs multiplexing techniques such
as CDMA Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) as well as Frequency Division
Duplex (FDD) to maximize the amount of data transmitted. The 1xEV-DO standard was
created by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2).
What is the 1xEV-DO air interface?
The 1xEV-DO air interface is an evolution to CDMA2000 3G1X protocol, optimized for
packet data service, that uses a 1.25 MHz carrier and can share spectrum with
IS-95/CDMA2000 applications.
What is the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS)?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) is a packet
data wireless system that provides wireless network service using the 1xEV-DO air
interface and can connect to an IP-based network. The Alcatel-Lucent RAS provides a
high-speed, high-capacity access solution targeting the increased market demand for
wireless data and internet applications.
The 9271 EV-DO RAS supports all of the Rel. 0 version of 1xEV-DO and most of the
Rev. A version.
What is 1xEV-DO Rel. 0?
1xEV-DO Rel. 0 was developed by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2)
standards body and is the first 1xEV-DO standard.
What is 1xEV-DO Rev. A?
The first revision to 1xEV-DO, which was also developed by the 3GPP2 standards body,
is called 1xEV-DO Revision A (Rev. A). 1xEV-DO Rev. A offers fast packet
establishment on both the forward and reverse links along with other air interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-4

9271 EV-DO RAS
Definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
enhancements. 1xEV-DO Rev. A is fully backward compatible with Rel. 0 in the sense
that Rel. 0 mobiles can operate on Rev. A capable carriers and Rev. A mobiles can also
operate on the Rel. 0-only carriers.
What is 1xEV-DO Rev. B?
The second revision to 1xEV-DO, which was also developed by the 3GPP2 standards
body, is called 1xEV-DO Revision B (Rev. B). Rev B systems allow multiple 1xEV-DO
carriers to be aggregated in the forward and reverse links achieving high data throughput
over the air, as opposed to Rev A, which uses a single EV-DO carrier. Through the Rev B
systems, the service provider will be able to deliver a significantly improved experience
to the mobile users with higher data throughput. Rev B is backwards compatible with Rev
A and Rel 0 services. This allows the service provider to continue to serve existing Rev A
and Rel 0 devices, while simultaneously upgrading the mobile users to Rev B devices and
services.
Is 1xEV-DO for data only?
1xEV-DO was originally designed for data only. Data here refers to images, e-mail,
messages, and so forth. However, in 1xEV-DO Rev. A, Voice over IP (VoIP) is supported.
Alcatel-Lucent is developing software features on the base station and on the 9271
EV-DO RNC to allow the service provider to provide high quality VoIP and other
multimedia options using 1xEV-DO.
Benefits of the 9271 EV-DO RAS
For a list of the benefits of the 9271 EV-DO RAS, see Benefits (p. 2-27).
When to use this network
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Network is a
cost-effective high-capacity solution for packet data traffic. The 9271 EV-DO RAS can be
used for data-intensive applications to increase revenue, such as e-mail of video clips,
streaming video, Push To Talk, voice over IP, video telephony, any broadcast service, or
high-speed data applications, such as downloading songs or video.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-5

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deployment options
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO RAS can be deployed as either of the following options:
A 9271 EV-DO RAS integrated with a 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network. This
option is called the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS. For an explanation of the
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS, see Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access
System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network (p. 9-7).
A 1xEV-DO only system. This option is called the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS.
For an explanation of the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS, see Standalone 9271
EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network (p. 9-10).
Note that the options are mutually exclusive. You cannot have both the Mixed-mode 9271
EV-DO RAS and the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS in the same network.
Base station options
Based on the needs of the service provider and on the topology of the service provider's
network, one or both of the following types of 1xEV-DO base stations can be chosen:
1xEV-DO base station that support only 1xEV-DO carriers

Mixed-mode base station that supports both 1xEV-DO carrier(s) and CDMA 3G1X
carrier(s)
Note that if you have the second option, mixed-mode base stations, there is no need for
dedicated base stations to support only 1xEV-DO, since the mixed-mode base stations can
do that as well.
Licensing
Information on how to install licenses is available in the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network
CDMA2000 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System Planning and Implementation Guide,
401-614-101.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-6

9271 EV-DO RAS
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO

RAS) Packet Data Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network?
The Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network combines 1xEV-DO and 3G1X
CDMA to provide CDMA voice and data plus 1xEV-DO data capabilities. The advantage
of the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS is that it can use existing CDMA base stations
instead of requiring new base stations.
Important! To implement this system, you will have to add 9271 EV-DO RNCs and
may also have to add additional backhaul network, depending on your security needs.
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network with a 3G1X CDMA Network
The next figure shows the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO
RAS) Packet Data Network with a 3G1X CDMA Network. In the diagram the lines show
logical data flows between network elements. For simplification purposes, the diagram
only covers IP Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-7

9271 EV-DO RAS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271
EV-DO RAS) Packet Data Network as it is typically used, with a 3G1X CDMA Network.
Figure 9-1 Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network used with 3G1X CDMA Network
How it works
In this configuration:
Voice and 3G1X CDMA packet data service are provided via the 3G1X CDMA air
interface and network elements.
1xEV-DO packet data service is provided via the 1xEV-DO air interface and the
1xEV-DO base station, mixed-mode base station, and the 9271 EV-DO RNC.
The 9271 EV-DO RAS for this configuration supports any mixture of 1xEV-DO-only
base stations and mixed-mode base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-8

9271 EV-DO RAS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9271 EV-DO RAS interfaces to the IP network via the RAN to Packet Data
Network (R-P) A10/A11 interface.
The PDSN and all the other IP network elements may be shared between the 9271
EV-DO RAS and the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network.
The type of service that is offered is negotiated between the PDSN and the Access
Terminal (AT) and depends only on the PDSN and AT capabilities. The 9271 EV-DO
RAS is not involved in the IP protocol negotiation and is not aware of the IP protocol
used.
Subscriber data is provisioned in the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
(AAA) Server. The RAN AAA server validates the mobile unit. The Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) AAA server in the PDSN validates
the subscriber.
The 9253 OMC-RAN and the command-based OMP tool for AP Frame Configuration
provide the OA&M functions for the 9271 EV-DO RAS. If the 9256 OMP is shared
between the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network and the 9271 EV-DO RAS, the
9256 OMP must have enough processing capacity to be able to support messaging
traffic that would arrive from supporting both the 3G1X CDMA and 9271 EV-DO
RAS networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-9

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS?
The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS is a stand-alone version of the 9271 EV-DO RAS that
uses a Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) instead of the MSC to manage the
1xEV-DO base stations. A Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS serves only 1xEV-DO users.
Benefit
The benefit of the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS is that for service providers who do not
have the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network or who do not want CDMA voice, the
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS provides a smaller and simpler data-only wireless network.
Network diagram
Figure 9-2, Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network (p. 9-11) shows the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS in the Standalone 9271
EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network. The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data
Network uses IP signalling, and has a single backhaul to CDMA with either Cisco
High-Level Data Link (cHDLC) control protocol, Multi-Link Point-To-Point Protocol
(MLPPP), or Ethernet for the transport layer. In the diagram the lines show logical data
flows between network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-10

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-2 Standalone 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS) Packet
Data Network
How it works
In this configuration:
The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS includes only 1xEV-DO-only base stations.
The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS interfaces to the IP network via the RAN to Packet
Data Network (R-P) A10/A11 interface.
The PDSN could be either dedicated to this network or shared with another network
offering data services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-11

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The type of service that is offered is negotiated between the PDSN and the Access
Terminal (AT) and depends only on the PDSN and AT capabilities. The 9271 EV-DO
RAS is not involved in the IP protocol negotiation and is not aware of the IP protocol
used.
Subscriber data is provisioned in the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting

(AAA) Server. The RAN AAA server validates the mobile unit. The RADIUS AAA
server in the PDSN validates the subscriber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-12

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Two subnetworks
The components of the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO
RAS) can be divided between two subnetworks:
The Radio Access Network (RAN), which connects radio base stations to the core
network
The Internet Protocol (IP) network, which provides transport between the network
elements and the Packet Data Network (PDN)
System components
The components of the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO
RAS) are divided between the RAN network and the IP network as shown in the
following lists.
RAN components
The RAN consists of the following components:
1xEV-DO Base station The base station provides the 1xEV-DO air interface to the
end users' access terminal (AT).
9271 EV-DO RAS Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) A scaled-back version
of the Access Manager that provides only configuration and fault management for the
cell equipment. The BSOC fills the role of the Access Manager, excluding CDMA call
processing, and eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet Switch. The BSOC is used
only in the Standalone version of the 9271 EV-DO RAS.
9271 EV-DO RNC The 9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC) is the
network element that controls the 9271 EV-DO RAS system and interfaces to the
1xEV-DO base stations and PDSN.
9271 EV-DO RAS OA&M management - The 9256 OMP and the 9253 OMC-RAN
provide OA&M services.
Note: All of these components except for the 9271 EV-DO RNC are described in this
section. The 9271 EV-DO RNC is described in About the 9271 EV-DO RNC
(p. 9-23).
IP components
The IP network elements are managed independently of the 1xEV-DO RAN. Sample IP
network elements include routers and switches.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-13

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP network elements between the base station and the RNC
The IP network elements that connect between the RNC and the Internet include:
RAN router Device that makes sure that packets are properly delivered between the
base stations and the MSC and that also handles routing between MSCs
Multiplexer (MUX) A device that aggregates data traffic from many small capacity
IP links to fewer high capacity IP links
IP network elements between the RNC and the Internet
The IP network elements that connect between the RNC and the base station include:
Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) The network element that acts as the connection
point between the RAN and IP networks. The PDSN is responsible for managing the
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) session between the service provider's core IP network
and the mobile unit or Access Terminal (AT).
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Server (RADIUS) - Authentication,
Authorization, and Accounting (RADIUS-AAA) server An IP network server that
keeps track of the user's usage of the network.
Home Agent (HA) Database that stores the subscriber's personal information and
tells where the subscriber's calls usually originate from. The Home Agent is required
for Mobile IP. Packets to a user's terminal access device are sent to the HA server that
stores the user's foreign network location.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server A server that assigns session
IP addresses for users.
Domain Name Server (DNS) A server that translates names of computers on the
Internet into IP addresses.
Virtual Private Network (VPN) Firewall A device or software that provides secure
IP tunnels through the Internet (VPN tunnels) and/or policy-based security for the
CDMA IP elements.
System reference diagram
Figure 9-3, 9271 EV-DO RAS system reference diagram (p. 9-15) shows the logical
architecture of the 9271 EV-DO RAS system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-14

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-3 9271 EV-DO RAS system reference diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-15

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Support for Mixed-Mode 9271 EV-DO RAS
The Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS is supported on most Alcatel-Lucent base stations.
Support for Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS
The Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS is only supported on a few Alcatel-Lucent base
stations.
For more information about 1xEV-DO base stations, see Chapter 7, Base stations.
For information about which Alcatel-Lucent base stations support the Mixed-Mode and
Standalone versions of the 1xEV-DO RAS contact your Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-16

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 1xEV-DO Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)?
The 9271 EV-DO RAS Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) is a scaled-back version
of the Access Manager that provides configuration and fault management for the cell
equipment. The BSOC performs the role of the Access Manager, excluding CDMA call
processing, and eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet Switch. The BSOC is used only
in the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS.
Hardware
The BSOC is supported on MM and on MMCv2 AP hardware.

Software
For a list of the applications supported on the BSOC, see Applications that can be run on
each Access Manager (p. 4-65).
Feature parity with Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS
Alcatel-Lucent is working towards feature parity between mixed mode and standalone
environments. Parity is provided for base station OA&M functions includes alarms,
provisioning, and 9271 EV-DO RAS RNC service measurements. As additional features
become available for the mixed-mode network, the plan is to make them available in the
9271 EV-DO RAS standalone network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-17

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network connections for R1SR and UNC frames
The 9271 EV-DO RNC is connected to base stations via T1/E1 facilities that are
terminated by an intermediate router. The 9271 EV-DO RNC provides the following
features and functions:
Radio Link Protocol (RLP) terminates the RLP interface to the AT and frame
selection
1xEV-DO Packet Control Function R-P interface to the PDSN

Call control setup, handoff, and communications with base stations for OA&M
Note: The number of T1s or E1s is determined by the type of base station controller
card. The URC III supports up to eight T1/E1 interfaces.
Network connections for the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS
The following figure shows network connections for the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-18

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-4 Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS network connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-19

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
The user interfaces for the 9271 EV-DO RAS are:
The 9256 OMP user interface platform

The 9253 OMC-RAN user interface platform
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact user interface platform
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
An OMC-RAN is required
All 1xEV-DO networks must deploy an OMC-RAN for OA&M functionality.

9256 OMP is also necessary
The 9256 OMP is also required because it hosts such applications as the Read Only
Printer (ROP), service measurements, Software Updates (SUs), and 1xEV-DO tools.
LMT
A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) can also be used for frame bringup and basic
configuration and troubleshooting of the frame.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-20

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation on 1xEV-DO
For further information on the 9271 EV-DO RAS, see the:
9271 EV-DO Radio Access System Planning and Implementation Guide, 401-614-101
1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
(OA&M), 401-614-102
RF Guidelines for 1xEV-DO, 401-614-323
1xEV-DO Service Measurements, 401-614-326
1xEV-DO System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines,
401-614-331
9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC) Retrofit Procedures, 401-614-321
For documentation on the ATCA platform
The following table lists documentation on the ATCA platform and on the cabinet that
houses the ATCA, the UNAC.
Document number
Document title
401-610-512
Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC)

Site Preparation Guide
401-614102
1xEV-DO RNC OA&M
Documentation on other network elements
For information on:
The 9256 OMP, see Chapter 10, 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256
OMP)
The Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN),
see Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network
(9253 OMC-RAN)
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), see Chapter 13, Local Maintenance
Terminal
1xEV-DO base stations and mixed-mode base stations, see Chapter 7, Base stations
Training on the 9271 EV-DO RAS
For training on the 9271 EV-DO RAS, see:
Flexent CDMA2000 9271 EV-DO RNC Bulk Data Provisioning, CL5061C/W

1xEV-DO HDLC to MLPPP Conversion, CL5594W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-21

9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Conversion, CL5597W

9271 EV-DO Radio Access System OA&M, CL5660C/W
Flexent CDMA2000 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System OA&M, CL5661
1xEV-DO Rev 0 RF Design Engineering and Call Processing, CL8306

1xEV-DO Deployment Seminar, CL5691S
Rev A Update Seminar for 1xEV-DO RF Design Engineering and Base Station Call
Processing, CL8307S
1xEV-DO BTS Network and Database Growth Translations, CL5662

1xEV-DO Technology, CL5901
CDMA2000 1xEV-DO RF Engineering and Call Processing Pre-Deployment Seminar,
CL8306S

9271 EV-DO RAS packet data call flows
For a detailed explanation of call flows for the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271
EV-DO RAS) Packet Data network, see the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Wireless Network
Overview class, CL1000C/W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-22

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
The topics in this section describe the 9271 EV-DO RNC.

Contents
9-24
Processors
9-25
9-26
9-29
9-31
9-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9271 EV-DO RNC?
The 9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC) is the network element that controls
the 9271 EV-DO RAS system and interfaces to the 1xEV-DO base stations and to the
Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN).
Platforms
The 9271 EV-DO RNC is available on the following platforms:
Server-based platform
ATCA RNC
Product offerings
The 9271 EV-DO RNC is available in the following product offerings:
Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC) storing an Advanced Telecommunications

Computing Architecture (ATCA)-based platform using ATCA blades
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) storing a Server-based platform using Netra
Servers
Release 1 Satellite Ready (R1SR) frame storing a Server-based platform
Each of these product offerings is described separately in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-24

Processors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Processors
Introduction
Each 9271 EV-DO RAS, regardless of the platform, contains the following processors:
Application processors
Traffic processors
These processors host critical applications for the 9271 EV-DO RAS.
What is an application processor?
An application processor (AP) is a general-purpose processor. When used in the 9271

EV-DO RAS, the functions of the AP include Overhead Channel Management, signalling
processing, and OA&M control functions.
What is a traffic processor?
The traffic processors (TPs) are the processors in the 9271 EV-DO RNC that handle
bearer processing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-25

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The product offering of the 9271 EV-DO RNC that is based on the Alcatel-Lucent
Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC) with Advanced Telecommunications
Computing Architecture (ATCA) chassis is described in this topic.
Hardware overview
The following figure shows the maximum configuration for EVDO: 10 APs and 10
Carrier Cards. Each chassis has 14 slots. Two slots are used for the Shelf Controller.
Additionally, 1 slot will be used for the OMC-RAN/OMP. That leaves 11 slots for other
blade types.
Figure 9-5 9271 EV-DO RNC on ATCA chassis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-26

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Carrier Cards only apply to EV-DO.

What is ATCA?

AP blades
Each AP blade is a Linux-based single blade computer (SBC) with a disk developed by
Alcatel-Lucent.
What is the UNAC?

Alcatel-Lucent cabinet.
UNAC components
The UNAC cabinet that houses the ATCA ships with the following:
2 Omni 6850 Ethernet switches (EFS) an edge/workgroup switch.

2 ATCAv2 chassis platform
4 Shelf controllers blades that provide the key switching functions for the ATCA
platform
2 FB032CD blades blades that host the applications
4 Shelf Management Module (SMM) controllers that supervise all elements of
the chassis
2 - FALARM resident alarm blade
Application processor
In the smallest configuration of this product offering, a single application processor blade
is installed in slot 1 of a chassis.
The maximum possible configuration uses 10 APs and 10 Carrier Cards.
Traffic processor
In the smallest configuration of this product offering, a single carrier card is installed in
slot 14 of a chassis. A single traffic processor (TP) is installed in the upper Advanced
Mezzanine Card location of the carrier card in slot 14.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-27

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required redundancy
The minimum requirement for this product offering is two chassis, each with an AP and a
TP blade, to provide redundancy.
Growth
More APs and TPs can be added as required.

Network connections
Located above the two ATCA chassis in the UNAC are two Alcatel-Lucent Omni
switches. Each Omni switch is connected to both ATCA chassis. Each Omni switch has a
LAG interface consisting of multiple gigabit fiber links to two different customer
switches that are external to the cabinet. Above the Omni switches is a terminal server
that provides another degree of recovery capability in extreme situations. The terminal
server provides console access to several key blades to allow very low level recovery
actions.
The lead APs on each shelf each have two ports to the two external customer switches to
provide interfaces to the OA&M network. These interfaces to the OA&M network
provide separate, private access that is not dependent on the internal networks of the
ATCA RNC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-28

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
This topic discusses the product offering of the 9271 EV-DO RNC that is a server-based
platform that uses 410S Netra servers stored in a Universal Network Cabinet (UNC).
What is the Netra 410S server?
The 410S server is a general-purpose computer used throughout the 3G1X CDMA and
1xEV-DO Network for call-control types of applications and/or OA&M applications.
What is the UNC?
The Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) is a frame used for a variety of Alcatel-Lucent
applications. The UNC provides increased capacity over the R1 and R1SR frames and
reduces the frame footprint.
Components
A minimum 9271 EV-DO RNC Universal Network Cabinet configuration includes the
following components:
48-port Extreme Ethernet switches (Extreme)

Netra CT410S Server Drawers
CP2500 AP cards
Important! Note that a Service Node can contain a mix of R1SR-based 9271 EV-DO
RNCs, UNC-based 9271 EV-DO RNCs and ATCA RNCs.
The network configuration of the UNC frame is different from that of the R1SR frame.
The UNC uses L3 cabinet switches whereas the R1SR frame uses only L2 cabinet
switches. The internal RNC subnets are not extended out of the UNC frame. For more
information on this topic, see the 9271 EV-DO Radio Access System Planning and
Implementation Guide , 401-614-101.
The only Traffic Processor (TP) type supported on a UNC frame is the Universal Traffic
Processor (UTP).
UNC frame components
A 9271 EV-DO RNC UNC frame contains the following components:
Power interface
Disk
Cable management
Internal Ethernet switches
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-6 Universal Network Cabinet (UNC) used for 9271 EV-DO RNC
Traffic processing is performed by the Universal Traffic Processors (UTPs), which

occupy slots 4 and 5 in the drawer.
Traffic processors
In this product offering, the traffic processors are Netra 410S servers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-30

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
This topic discusses the product offering of the 9271 EV-DO RNC that is a server-based
platform that uses Netra 410S servers stored in an R1SR frame.
What is the Netra 410S server?
The 410S server is a general-purpose computer used throughout the 3G1X CDMA and
1xEV-DO Network for call-control types of applications and/or OA&M applications.
R1SR frame components
A 9271 EV-DO RNC frame contains the following components:
Power interface
Disk
Cable management
Internal Ethernet switches
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-31

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-7 R1SR frame used for 9271 EV-DO RNC
In this product offering, the application processors are Netra 410S servers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-32

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic processors
The traffic processors are the Force 690, Katana 752i or UTP types and occupy slots 4
and 5 in the drawer. Minimum configuration is two TPs in the first two drawers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-33

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagram of software on the RNC and BSOC
The following figure contains a simple software architecture for the 9271 EV-DO RNC
and BSOC.
Figure 9-8 9271 EV-DO RNC and BSOC software
About the diagram
The 9271 EV-DO RNC in the diagram contains its own set of System Management
services, Call Control functions, and Traffic Plane functions. The 9271 EV-DO RNC also
provides signalling and traffic processing control for each session. These functions
include session establishment and release, performed by a functional entity called the
Overhead Manager (OHM), and frame selection and Radio Link Protocol (RLP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
processing (performed by functional entities called Selector Function Main [SFM] and
RLP and Signaling Manager [RSM]). These are collectively referred to as 9271 EV-DO
RNC functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-35
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
9-36
10
10 Operations and
9256
Management Platform
(9256 OMP)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the two versions of the Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and
Management Platform (9256 OMP) that are available in Release 37.0 and later:
9256 OMPv4
9256 OMPv2
Contents
10-3
10-4
Differences from the OMPv2
10-6
10-8
10-9
9256 OMPv4 connections to other network elements
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-21
10-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-2

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the 9256 Operations and Management Platform version 4 (9256
OMPv4).
Contents
10-4
10-6
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9256 OMPv4?
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform version 4 (9256 OMPv4) is a version of
the OMP that uses an ATCA hardware platform and Linux software platform.
What is the 9256 OMP?
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP) is a required OA&M
component that serves as a user interface and back-end OA&M processing platform for
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also hosts special tools such as
Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits and software updates,
service measurement collection, and so forth.
Uses
The 9256 OMP is used for OA&M processing on many network elements, including the
following:
9290 MMC-Based Access Manager

9290 MM-Based Access Manager
9281 Packet Switch
Base Stations
Data links
Trunks
General OA&M processing on the 9256 OMP
In addition to providing user interfaces, the 9256 OMP serves as the following:
A data repository for applications such as the Read-Only Printer (ROP), Service
Measurements (SM) data, Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD), database backup, and
Software Update Automation (SUA) staging
An emergency access point for the MSC
An OA&M tool platform (for both Alcatel-Lucent and customer tools)
A platform for License control and administration for the Alcatel-Lucent network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Same load line as OMPv2
The 9256 OMPv4 is based on the same load line as the OMPv2, which gives the
following benefits:
Supports 3G1X CDMA Voice/Data as well as Circuit Switched Data

Supports both integrated HLR and stand-alone HLR configurations
Along with packet data network elements, supports base stations with mixed mode
CDMA and EVDO carriers
Benefits of the 9256 OMPv4
The 9256 OMPv4 offers increased processing capability, floor space reduction, and
reduced power needs over the 9256 OMPv2.
OMP of choice
The 9256 OMPv4 is the OMP of choice for the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network.
Support for mixed configuration
The 9256 OMPv4 supports mixed configurations.

What is a mixed configuration?
A mixed configuration is a configuration made up of multiple frames of different types of

AP hardware. For example, a common mixed configuration is to add an MMCv4 frame to
an Access Manager's existing MM frames as the first step in upgrading the hardware.
Constraints
Any mixed configuration supported by the 9256 OMPv4 must be ECP-less. Also, the
OMPv4 can only be installed in an MMCv4 frame when it is running as a base frame.
Currently Alcatel-Lucent does not support the OMPv4 in an MMCv4 growth frame.
Availability
The 9256 OMPv4 is available in Release 37.0 and later.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware platform
The 9256 OMPv4 uses a different hardware platform, the Alcatel-Lucent Advanced
Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) chassis.
Software platform
The 9256 OMPv4 uses a Linux-based operating system.

Not standalone
Unlike the OMPv2, the OMPv4 is not a standalone product. For the OMPv4, an MMCv4
base frame is a prerequisite.
Customer-supplied DVD drive
The ATCA chassis does not come with a DVD drive. The ATCA does have a USB port
which can connect to an external DVD drive. The customer must supply this external
DVD drive.
ECPless only
The OMPv4 only supports ECP-less applications.

Increased capacity
With increased capacity and performance, the OMPv4 supports up to 4,000 cells within
the OneBTS Modcell family of products.
Changes in NTS
With the OMPv2, the network terminal server (NTS) is located in the compact cabinet.
However, there is no NTS in the cabinet in which the OMPv4 resides. Therefore, with the
OMPv4 the NTS is moved to the Packet Switch Miscellaneous Cabinet and is used for
communication between the OMPv4 and the 9281 PS. Also, the NTS used with the
OMPv4 is a new model since the one used with the OMPv2 has been declared obsolete by
the vendor. The model of NTS required by the OMPv4 is the LX-4048 NTS.
Connectivity to OA&M network
The OMPv2 and OMPv4 differ in the number of methods by which the OMP can access
the OA&M network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMPv2 connectivity to OA&M network
The OMPv2 has one connection to the OA&M network. This connection is a physical
connection using one of the available Ethernet ports on the rear of the OMPv2.
OMPv4 connectivity to OA&M network
The OMPv4 has two possible connections to the OA&M network:
An integrated virtual connection using a VLAN via a fiber Ethernet cable that is
plugged into the Omniswitch in the UNAC frame.
A separate physical connection using a copper Ethernet cable that is plugged into the
RTM port on the OMPv4.
Service Provider must decide
For the OMPv4 connection to the OA&M network the Service Provider must decide
whether to implement the copper Ethernet connectivity through the RTM port or the fiber
Ethernet connectivity via the Omniswitch using a VLAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware overview
The 9256 OMPv4 is based on the Alcatel-Lucent version of the Advanced

Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) chassis and housed in the
Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC).
What is ATCA?

What is the UNAC?

Alcatel-Lucent cabinet that has been designed to support multiple ATCA applications in
the same cabinet.
Shared cabinet
The 9256 OMPv4 is designed to share the same Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network ATCA
Cabinet (UNAC) as the MMCv4.
OMP blade
The OMP application runs on a blade with a Rear Transition Module (RTM) in slot 2 of
the upper shelf of the UNAC. The blade and the RTM are both equipped with 300 GB
hard disks when used to host the OMP.
Shared components
The 9256 OMPv4 and the MMCv4 share several of the UNAC components, such as fans,
filters, and shelf controllers.
DAT drive
The 9256 OMPv4 and MMCv4 share a DAT tape drive mounted in the UNAC frame that
they share. The DAT tape drive is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Different OS, same appearance
The 9256 OMPv4 software runs on a Linux operating system but has the same
appearance to the end user.
Refer to the customer documentation listed at the end of this chapter for descriptions of
the software applications hosted by the 9256 OMPv4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GigE connections
The OMP blade has two GigE ports that connect to the internal frame switches, in
separate L2 domains, to provide the external fiber interface to the customer Maintenance
LAN. The applications also have the option to directly go off-frame from the blade RTM
ports via copper connection.
Other interfaces
The 9256 OMPv4 supports the following other interfaces:
Backup to Tape
Backup to Network
2 x 300 GB HDD (1 x 300 GB HDD on AMC, 1 x 300 GB HDD on RTM)
Copper interfaces to Customer Network and fiber interface via OmniSwitch with
OA&M traffic on a separate VLAN.
Connectivity choice to the OA&M network
The customer has two choices for communication of the OMPv4 with the OA&M
network:
Using copper-based Ethernet cable from the RTM into the OA&M network
Using a fiber interface via the OmniSwitch with OA&M traffic on a separate VLAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces on the 9256 OMPv4
For a description of the user interfaces available on the 9256 OMPv4, see the 9256
Operations and Management Platform v4 (OMP) Application Guide, 401-662-121.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table lists documentation on the 9256 OMPv4 and on the ATCA platform.
Document number
Document title
401-662-121
9256 Operations and Management Platform

v4 (OMP) Application Guide
401-610-512
Universal Network ATCA Cabinet (UNAC)

Site Preparation Guide
401-710-216
ATCA-based Access Manager Platform Guide

Training on the 9256 OMPv4
For training on the 9256 OMPv4, see 9256 OMP OA&M Training, CL3581.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-12

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9256 Operations and Management Platform version 2 (9256
OMPv2).
Contents
10-14
10-15
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-21
10-22
10-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9256 OMPv2?
The 9256 OMPv2 is a version of the 9256 OMP that runs on a Sun Netra 440 server.
What is the 9256 OMP?
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP) is a required OA&M
component that serves as a user interface and back-end OA&M processing platform for
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also hosts special tools such as
Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits and software updates,
Uses
The 9256 OMP can be used to perform OA&M on many network elements including the
following:

9281 Packet Switch
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (9290 MM-APs)
Base Stations
Data links
Trunks
General OA&M processing on the 9256 OMP
In addition to providing user interfaces, the 9256 OMP serves as the following:
A data repository for applications such as the Read-Only Printer (ROP), Service
Measurements (SM) data, Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD), database backup, and
Software Update Automation (SUA) staging
An emergency access point for the MSC

An OA&M tool platform (for both Alcatel-Lucent and customer tools)
A platform for License control and administration for the Alcatel-Lucent network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware
The 9256 OMPv2 standard hardware configuration, which is housed in a Universal

Network Cabinet is equipped with the following:
Sun Netra 440 server

MRV LX-8040 40 port Terminal servers: two (2) per frame
GarrettCom 4K16 16-port 10/100 Ethernet Switch: one (1) per frame
Digital Audio Tape (DAT) Drive external to the Netra 440 server: one (1) per frame
Shelf for local laptop to access the 9256 OMPv2 console
Direct Connect Interface (DCI) to the 3B21D
The 9256 OMPv2 frame also provides:
An alarm cable for central alarm grid

Two integrated internal V.90 modems to support remote terminal access for UNIX
logins
Two telephone jacks on the FIP to connect to the internal V.90 providing remote
UNIX login capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-1 9256 OMPv2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet and describes the impact on the
9256 OMPv2 of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
What is the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet?
The 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet is a version of the Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network
Cabinet (UNC) that can house both the 9256 OMPv2 and the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
at the same time.
The 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet is also available to house a standalone OMPv2 only or
a standalone OMC-RAN only.
Old cabinet still available
At present the old cabinet is still available and is still used for new ships of the 9256
OMPv2. Also, 9256 OMPv2s that are already in the field will not be upgraded to the new
cabinet.
Changes to the 9256 OMPv2
All the components of the 9256 OMPv2 remain the same in the 9254 OMC Compact
Cabinet. The layout of components of the 9256 OMPv2 also remains the same.
Several very minor changes have been made to the 9256 OMPv2 in order to fit the 9256
OMPv2 into the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
A few adjustments have been made in the height of shelves.

Some internal cabling has been changed.
Software transparency
The 9256 OMPv2 server and supporting equipment in the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet is
software transparent with the 9256 OMPv2 cabinet.
For more about the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet, see Configurations of the 9254 OMC
Compact Cabinet (p. 12-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to 9256 OMPv2 documentation
It is beyond the scope of this document to describe all the software hosted by the 9256
OMPv2. Refer to the customer documentation listed at the end of this chapter for
descriptions of the software applications hosted by the 9256 OMPv2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Important! The material here in 9256 OMPv2 connections to other network

elements is not applicable to the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Network.
This section describes the interfaces between the 9256 OMPv2 and other network
elements.
DCI link to the ECP
The DCI physical interface between the physical 9256 OMPv2 and the ECP consists of a
pair of dual serial channel (DSCH) cables, with a maximum cable length of 100 feet. On
the 9256 OMPv2 side, both DSCH cables connect to two ports on the same Peripheral
Control Interface - DSCH Computer Interconnect (PCI-DCI) board. On the ECP side,
each DSCH cable is connected to a separate DSCH boardone associated with CU0, the
other with CU1.
Note that this connection is not supported on a 9256 OMPv2 ECP-less configuration.
Connection to the Maintenance LAN
The 9256 OMPv2 connects to the Maintenance LAN over Ethernet.

Connections to the service provider's network
The 9256 OMPv2 connects to the service provider's network over the Maintenance LAN.
Connections to the 9281 Packet Switch
The 9256 OMPv2 connects to the 9281 Packet Switch using both rs232 and Ethernet.
Connection to the ECP MCRT/EAI
A 9256 OMPv2 cut-through connection to the remote Maintenance Cathode Ray Terminal
(MCRT) provides secure access to the ECP MCRT from a designated terminal and
provides all the features of the ECP MCRT, including one Emergency Action Interface
(EAI) session. The connection to the ECP MCRT cut through uses the capability of the
MRV Network Terminal Server (NTS) to provide a splitter function to allow 9256
OMPv2 access to the MCRT connection as well as supporting a separate serial MCRT
terminal connection.
Also, this connection is not applicable to the 9290 MMC platform.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection to the ECP Physical ROP
ECP physical ROP is viewed when selecting ECP Physical ROP Log Viewer (Live) and
ECP Physical ROP Log Archive (File Manager) from the 9256 OMPv2 menu. The
connection to the ECP ROP uses the capability of the MRV Network Terminal Server
(NTS) to provide a splitter function to allow 9256 OMPv2 access to the ROP connection
as well as supporting a separate serial ROP connection.
Also, this connection is not applicable to the 9290 MMC platform.
Connections to the TCP/IP Network
An Ethernet Switch connects the two Network Terminal Servers (NTSs) to the Sun
Netra 440 server processor used for the 9256 OMPv2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-20

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
For a table showing what versions of the OMP can be used with which Access Managers,
see OMP versions per Access Manager (p. 4-69).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-21

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces on the 9256 OMPv2
For a description of the user interfaces available on the 9256 OMPv2, see the
Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) OA&M,
401-662-108.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For further information on the 9256 OMPv2
For OMPv2 customer documentation, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and
Management Platform (OMP) OA&M, 401-662-108.
Training on the 9256 OMPv2
For training on the 9256 OMPv2, see 9256 OMP OA&M Training, CL3581.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
10-24
11
11 Operations and
9253
Maintenance Center Radio
Access Network (9253
OMC-RAN)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio
Two versions of OMC-RAN
Two versions of the Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network
(OMC-RAN) exist:
9253 OMC-RAN, described in this chapter

9254 OMC-RAN Compact, described in Chapter 12, 9254 Operations and
Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact)
For more information about the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, refer to Chapter 12, 9254
Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN
Compact).
Use of the term OMC-RAN
In this document the generic term OMC-RAN is used to mean either the 9253
OMC-RAN or the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact.
Contents
11-3
About the 9253 OMC-RAN hardware
11-4
About the OMC-RAN Solution
11-5
11-6
9253 OMC-RAN connections to other network elements
11-7
11-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-1
9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access

Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9253 OMC-RAN?
The 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
is a comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)-based Operations, Administration and
Maintenance (OA&M) platform that provides enhanced, state-of-the-art OA&M
capabilities for the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. The 9253 OMC-RAN is a
next-generation OA&M solution that:
Provides centralized fault management and configuration management

Provides intuitive user interfaces
Provides enhanced, fine-grained controls over user access

Provides a standardized north bound interface (NBI) for sending fault monitoring
information to a centralized Operations Support System (OSS)
In conjunction with the OMC-H (for Super Distributed Home Location Register
[SDHLR]) and OMC-CN (for Voice Over Internet Protocol [VoIP] and IP Multimedia
Subsystem [IMS]), provides a fully-integrated OA&M solution for Alcatel-Lucent
network elements
Answers market changes in the telecommunications industry
Meets service provider requirements for new capabilities
Support for a single MSC
One OMC-RAN, whether it is the 9253 or 9254, supports a single MSC.

Only available in DC version
The 9253 OMC-RAN, like the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, is only available in a Direct
Current (DC) version.
Relationship of the 9253 OMC-RAN to the 9256 OMP
The 9253 OMC-RAN is not a 9256 OMP replacement. The 9253 OMC-RAN interfaces to
the 9256 OMP and provides enhanced, state-of-the-art OA&M capabilities.
Is the 9253 OMC-RAN required?
Yes. All 1xEV-DO networks must deploy an OMC-RAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9253 OMC-RAN hardware
The 9253 OMC-RAN hardware consists of:
Sun Netra 1280 server
Sun StorageTek 3510 FC Array,
The following figure shows a Sun Netra 1280 server with the front cover removed.
Figure 11-1 Sun Netra 1280 server used for the 9253 OMC-RAN
However, the 9253 OMC-RAN hardware must be used with the other hardware and
software in the OMC-RAN Solution to be fully integrated into the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes the OMC-RAN Solution.

What is the OMC-RAN Solution?
The OMC-RAN Solution is a network element that contains either a 9253 OMC-RAN or
a 9254 OMC-RAN Compact and adds the following additional software and hardware
that integrates the OMC-RAN into an existing wireless network:
One of the following Sun Netra servers:

For the 9253 OMC-RAN, a Sun Netra 1280 server and one Sun
StorageTek 3510 FC Array, an external disk array.
For the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, a Sun Netra 440 server and one external
DAT drive.
Note that the OMC-RAN server runs the Solaris operating system, the OMC-RAN
application, and some third party applications, such as ssh.
One pair of 9290 MM-AP (the OAM Proxy servers). The OAM Proxy servers host the
OAM Proxy application. The OAM Proxy application is made up of a number of
components, including the SNMP Proxy Forwarder (SPF) application, which acts as
the MSC interface for alarm and status information from the other 9290 MM-AP
servers to OAM Proxy servers. The OAM Proxy servers also host the ORCA
application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The software architecture of the 9253 OMC-RAN is a layered architecture consisting of

one or more software components within each layer.
Figure
The figure shows the 9253 OMC-RAN layered software architecture.

Figure 11-2 9253 OMC-RAN software architecture
Presentation
Software
GUI Client
Element
Management
Functions
Upstream
Interface
Command Line
Interface
Fault
Management
Backup and
Archive Manager
Internal
Processes
Preferences
Manager
File
Manager
Operating
System Software
Log
Manager
Process
Manager
Report
Manager
Scheduler
Security
Manager
Solaris
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The OMC-RAN Solution uses the service provider's existing Internet Protocol (IP)
Operations Network to communicate with:
Monitoring entities such as the Network Operations Center (NOC)

Client terminals, such as desktop PCs, workstations and laptops
The Access Manager, through the associated OAM Proxy server pair
The OAM Proxy applications

9271 EV-DO RNC APs
What is the Service Provider's IP operations network?
The Service Provider's IP Operations Network is a private Internet Protocol Wide Area
Network (IP-WAN) that links the service provider's Central Offices (COs) together and is
used by the service provider for OA&M of service provider equipment.
Used by the 9253 OMC-RAN
The 9253 OMC-RAN uses an Ethernet connection into the Service Provider's IP
Operations Network to communicate with the NOC and other monitoring entities.
Communications with the Access Manager
The 9253 OMC-RAN uses Ethernet connections into the service provider's IP operations
network to communicate with the Access Manager through the OAM Proxy server pair.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GUI interface
The primary user interface on the 9253 OMC-RAN is a point and click GUI interface
known as the OMC-RAN GUI.
9253 OMC-RAN interfaces
The 9253 OMC-RAN also supports a rich variety of other interfaces.

Table 11-1, 9253 OMC-RAN interfaces and their functions (p. 11-8) lists the interfaces
that are available on the 9253 OMC-RAN.
Table 11-1
Interface
Function
BTS (base station)

cut-throughs
Used to access a service provider-chosen url; often used for

web-based databases set up and maintained by the service
provider.
Ethernet Switch
cut-through
Used for accessing the Cajun P333T, P333R and P334T Ethernet
Switches in the 9290 MM-APCC, and Avaya Cajun 364T for the
9290 MMC, from the OMC-RAN.
Alarm Manager
Used for troubleshooting network elements.
MSC cut-throughs
Used to access:
A service provider-chosen url
A telnet session to an address previously chosen by the service

provider
Often used to access the 9256 OMP from the OMC-RAN.

Informational errors
Used for troubleshooting selected network elements.
Interactive TICLI
TICLI on the OMC-RAN server.
OMC-RAN Graphical
User Interface (GUI)
Primary access point for performing OA&M operations from the

OMC-RAN on a network element.
OMC-RAN Network
Manager GUI
Window that comes up when you click on the Network Manager

icon in the Desktop. Primary access point for network elements
managed by the OMC-RAN.
TI Wizard
A GUI-based tool that can only be invoked upon a single network

element listed in the OMC-RAN Network Manager tree. The TI
Wizard is used to build and execute simple TICLI commands
pertaining to a single network element. Intended for the novice
user and to provide help for commands that the user may be
unfamiliar with on a day to day basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-1
(continued)
Interface
Function
TICLI Console
A GUI-based tool launched from the OMC-RAN GUI toolbar that

is used to execute TICLI commands. TICLI commands executed
here can apply to any network element within a single MSC.
Intended for the expert user.
RC/V Manager
Used for accessing RC/V forms.
Shell TICLI
TICLI scripts on the OMC-RAN server.
System CLI
A command line interface for issuing commands on the

OMC-RAN server.
RMT Cut-through
Used to launch the RMT tool to monitor BTS URCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For further information on the 9253 OMC-RAN
The following table lists 9253 OMC-RAN customer documentation.

Document number
Document title
401-380-086
9253 OMC-RAN System Installation
401-380-091
9253 OMC-RAN Object Description
401-380-092
9253 OMC-RAN Command Line Interface
401-380-198
CORBA Northbound Interface
401-380-199
SNMP Northbound Interface
401-380-835
9253 Operations and Maintenance Center

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and
Provisioning

Training on the 9253 OMC-RAN
For training on the 9253 OMC-RAN, see the:
CDMA Network Operations & Maintenance Controller Radio Access Network

(OMC-RAN) Overview, CL5530AC and CL5530AW
Flexent Wireless Networks Operations and Maintenance Radio Access Network

(OMC-RAN) Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M), CL5530B
Training on the OAM Proxy
For training on the OAM Proxy, see the Flexent Wireless Networks OAM Proxy OA&M
Tutorial, CL5512W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
11-12
12
12 Operations and
9254
Maintenance Center Radio
Access Network Compact
(9254 OMC-RAN Compact)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio
Access Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact).
Two versions
Two versions of the Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network
(OMC-RAN ) exist
9254 OMC-RAN Compact , described in this chapter

9253 OMC-RAN, described in Chapter 11, 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center
Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN)
For more information about the 9253 OMC-RAN, refer to Chapter 11, 9253 Operations
and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253 OMC-RAN).
Use of the term OMC-RAN
In this document the generic term OMC-RAN is used to mean either the 9253
OMC-RAN or the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact.
Contents
About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
12-3
9254 OMC-RAN Compact compared with the 9253 OMC-RAN
12-4
12-5
12-8
About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact hardware
12-10
12-13
12-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-1

Network Compact (9254 OMC-RAN Compact)
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9254 OMC-RAN Compact connections to other network elements
12-15
9254 OMC-RAN Compact user interfaces
12-16
12-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact?
The 9254 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network Compact (9254
OMC-RAN Compact) is a scaled-back version of the 9253 OMC-RAN that can be
co-located with the 9256 OMP in a 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet. The 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact supports at most 600 cells. The advantage of the OMC-RAN Compact is that the
9254 OMC-RAN Compact can reduce footprint by having both the 9256 OMP and the
9254 OMC-RAN Compact in the same cabinet. Please note that the existing 9256 OMP
can not be field upgraded to the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
9253 OMC-RAN is still supported
The existing 9253 OMC-RAN in the existing cabinet is still supported.

Support for a single MSC
One OMC-RAN, whether it is the 9253 or 9254, supports a single MSC.

Only available in DC version
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, like the 9253 OMC-RAN, is only available in a Direct
Current (DC) version.
Relationship of the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact to the 9256 OMP
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact is not a replacement for the 9256 OMP. The 9254
OMC-RAN Compact interfaces to the 9256 OMP and provides enhanced, state-of-the-art
OA&M capabilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

One or the other
You need just one 9254 OMC-RAN Compact or one 9253 OMC-RAN per MSC.
Purpose
Though the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact and the 9253 OMC-RAN fulfill most of the same
purposes in a network, there are some differences between the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
and the 9253 OMC-RAN. This topic compares the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact and the
9253 OMC-RAN and lists similarities and differences.
Similarities
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact supports all the functions and interfaces of the 9253
OMC-RAN.
Differences
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact differs from the 9253 OMC-RAN in the following areas.
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact supports fewer base stations than the 9253
OMC-RAN.
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact costs less than the 9253 OMC-RAN.
Capacity
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact supports fewer base stations than the 9253 OMC-RAN.
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact can support fewer than the maximum number of base
stations whereas the 9253 OMC-RAN supports the maximum number of base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet and describes impacts on the 9256
OMP of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
What is a 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet?
The 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet is a version of the Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network
Cabinet (UNC) that can hold both the 9256 OMP and 9254 OMC-RAN Compact in the
same frame.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagram
The following figure shows a 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet:

Figure 12-1 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet
Benefits
The benefits of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet include the following:
If a service provider chooses to add either the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact or the 9256
OMP to an installed 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet, adding the 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact or the 9256 OMP can be done easily.
The 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet provides footprint reduction by supporting both an
OMC-RAN and a 9256 OMP in the same cabinet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The reduced cabinet footprint of 600 mm by 600 mm and the additional Enhanced
Circuit Breaker Unit (ECBU2) functionality of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet meet
the requirements of the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
market.
The height of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet remains consistent with the existing
Packet Switch cabinets. Other critical characteristics include external cable access
through both the top and bottom of the cabinet, and support for cabinet's cooling air
entering from either the front or the base and exhausting through both the top and rear
of the cabinet.
Changes to the 9256 OMP
For a discussion of the changes to the 9256 OMP because of the 9254 OMC Compact
Cabinet, see Impact of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet (p. 10-17).
Wiring is the same
The equipment in the single server (OMC-RAN and OMP) configurations is installed and
wired in the exact same manner as in the fully equipped cabinet. This includes location of
servers in the cabinet, FIP wiring, and so forth. This consistency in design makes it
possible to add the other server, later, without rewiring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Possible configurations
The possible configurations of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet are:
A9256 OMC-RAN Compact and associated equipment alone in the OMC-RAN

Compact frame. This is a 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet without the OMP server and
associated equipment.
A9254 OMC-RAN Compact with the 9256 OMP and all associated equipment for
both in the same 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagram of full configuration
The following figure shows an OMC-RAN Compact Cabinet containing both a 9254
OMC-RAN Compact and a 9256 OMP.
Figure 12-2 Contents of the OMC-RAN Compact Cabinet with both 9256 OMP and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware
This 9254 OMC-RAN Compact includes the following hardware:

One Power Distribution Shelf Version 2 with two Enhanced Circuit Breaker Unit
v2-Low Current (ECBU-2-LC) with Alarm Card
OMP Frame Interface Panel (FIP)
Two Auxiliary FIPs (24 port each)
One Sun Netra 440 server

GarrettCom Ethernet Switch
One DAT Drive
One Laptop shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9254 OMC-RAN Compact server hardware
The following diagrams show a Sun Netra 440 from the front and from the back.
Figure 12-3 Sun Netra 440 server used for the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, front
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a Sun Netra 440 server from the back.
Figure 12-4 Sun Netra 440 server used for the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, back
view
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact hardware must be used with the other hardware and
software in the OMC-RAN Solution to be fully integrated into the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-12

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes the OMC-RAN Solution.

What is the OMC-RAN Solution?
The OMC-RAN Solution is a network element that contains either a 9253 OMC-RAN or
a 9254 OMC-RAN Compact and adds the following additional software and hardware
that integrates the OMC-RAN into an existing wireless network:
One of the following Sun Netra servers:

For the 9253 OMC-RAN, a Sun Netra 1280 server and one Sun
StorageTek 3510 FC Array, an external disk array.
For the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, a Sun Netra 440 server and one external
DAT drive.
Note that the OMC-RAN server runs the Solaris operating system, the OMC-RAN
application, and some third party applications, such as ssh.
One pair of 9290 MM-AP servers (the OAM Proxy servers). The OAM Proxy servers
host the OAM Proxy application. The OAM Proxy application is made up of a
number of components, including the SNMP Proxy Forwarder (SPF) application,
which acts as the MSC interface for alarm and status information from the other 9290
MM-AP servers to OAM Proxy servers. The OAM Proxy servers also host the ORCA
application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The software architecture of the 9253 OMC-RAN/9254 OMC-RAN Compact is a layered

architecture consisting of one or more software components within each layer.
Figure
The following figure shows the software architecture.

Figure 12-5 9254 OMC-RAN Compact software architecture
Presentation
Software
GUI Client
Element
Management
Functions
Upstream
Interface
Command Line
Interface
Fault
Management
Backup and
Archive Manager
Internal
Processes
Preferences
Manager
File
Manager
Operating
System Software
Log
Manager
Process
Manager
Report
Manager
Scheduler
Security
Manager
Solaris
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-14

9254 OMC-RAN Compact connections to other network

elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9254 OMC-RAN Compact connections to other network

elements
Introduction
The connections to other networks are exactly the same in the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
as in the 9253 OMC-RAN.
The OMC-RAN Solution uses the service provider's existing Internet Protocol (IP)
Operations Network to communicate with:
Monitoring entities such as the Network Operations Center (NOC)
Client terminals, such as desktop PCs, workstations and laptops

The Access Manager, through the associated OAM Proxy server pair
The OAM Proxy applications
9271 EV-DO RNC APs
What is the Service Provider's IP operations network?
The Service Provider's IP Operations Network is a private Internet Protocol Wide Area
Network (IP-WAN) that links the service provider's Central Offices (COs) together and is
used by the service provider for OA&M of service provider equipment.
Used by the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact uses an Ethernet connection into the Service Provider's IP
Operations Network to communicate with the NOC and with other monitoring entities.
Communications with the Access Manager
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact uses Ethernet connections into the service provider's IP
operations network to communicate with the Access Manager through the OAM Proxy
server pair.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The user interfaces are exactly the same in the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact as in the 9253
OMC-RAN.
GUI interface
The primary user interface on the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact is a point and click GUI
interface known as the OMC-RAN Compact GUI.
9254 OMC-RAN Compact interfaces
The 9254 OMC-RAN Compact also supports a rich variety of other interfaces.
The following table lists the interfaces that are available on the 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact.
Table 12-1
Interface
Function
BTS (base station)

cut-throughs
Used to access a service provider-chosen url; often used for

web-based databases set up and maintained by the service
provider.
Ethernet Switch
cut-through
Used for accessing the Cajun P333T, P333R and P334T Ethernet
Switches in the 9290 MM-APCC, and Avaya Cajun 364T for the
9290 MMC, from the OMC-RAN.
Alarm Manager
Used for troubleshooting network elements.
MSC cut-throughs
Used to access:
A service provider-chosen url
A telnet session to an address previously chosen by the service

provider
Often used to access the 9256 OMP from the OMC-RAN.

Informational errors
Used for troubleshooting selected network elements.
Interactive TICLI
TICLI on the OMC-RAN server.
OMC-RAN Graphical
User Interface (GUI)
Primary access point for performing OA&M operations from the

OMC-RAN on a network element.
OMC-RAN Network
Manager GUI
Window that comes up when you click on the Network Manager

icon in the Desktop. Primary access point for network elements
managed by the OMC-RAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-1
(continued)
Interface
Function
OMC-RAN TI Wizard
A GUI-based tool that can only be invoked upon a single network

element listed in the OMC-RAN Network Manager tree. The TI
Wizard is used to build and execute simple TICLI commands
pertaining to a single network element. Intended for the novice
user and to provide help for commands that the user may be
unfamiliar with on a day to day basis.
OMC-RAN TICLI
Console
A GUI-based tool launched from the OMC-RAN GUI toolbar that

is used to execute TICLI commands. TICLI commands executed
here can apply to any network element within a single MSC.
Intended for the expert user.
RC/V Manager
Used for accessing RC/V forms.
Shell TICLI
TICLI scripts on the OMC-RAN server.
System CLI
A command line interface for issuing commands on the

OMC-RAN server.
RMT Cut-through
Used to launch the RMT tool to monitor BTS URCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For further information on the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
See the documentation listed in For further information on the 9253 OMC-RAN
(p. 11-10).
Training on the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact
For training on the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, see the:
CDMA Network Operations & Maintenance Controller Radio Access Network

(OMC-RAN Compact) Overview, CL5530AC and CL5530AW
Flexent Wireless Networks Operations and Maintenance Radio Access Network
(OMC-RAN Compact) Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M),
CL5530B
Training on the OAM Proxy
For training on the OAM Proxy, see the Flexent Wireless Networks OAM Proxy OA&M
Tutorial, CL5512W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
12-18
13
13
Local
Maintenance
Terminal
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).

Contents
About the LMT
13-2
13-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
13-1
About the LMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the LMT

What is the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)?
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is a personal computer (PC) containing special
LMT software. The LMT can be attached directly to an MM-AP Application Frame and
thus provides console access and remote access to the servers mounted on that frame. The
LMT provides a basic Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) interface
with the Mobility Server Cluster.
When do you use an LMT?
In general, use an LMT:
When you are physically located at the frame
For procedures that must be done at a maintenance terminal (most of the 9290
Mobility Manager procedures require a maintenance terminal)
When you are installing a frame and the frame is not accessible from other terminal
interfaces
When the 9256 OMP or the OMC-RAN is unavailable
Emergency Interface (EI) access
The Emergency Interface (EI) access on the LMT is available for non-FBP FMS Frame
configurations where the RCC Watchdog is used. The EI access is used to perform the
following tasks:
RCC Watchdog status display

Server cluster status display
Server state change request
Event logging
Connection to the server
The LMT plugs in directly to the frame of the server.

Serial connectivity required
The personal computer that hosts the LMT software must have SERIAL - EIA/RS232
connectivity. If the PC does not have serial connectivity, serial connectivity must be
added through the use of a USB add-on interface/cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
13-2
About the LMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software installation and minimum system requirements for running the LMT
applications are detailed in the LMT documentation, Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Software Users Guide, 401-710-221.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
13-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LMT documentation
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Software Users Guide, 401-710-221, contains
reference information about the Local Maintenance Terminal and its use in performing
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) activities on the specified APs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
13-4
14
14
Remote
Maintenance
Terminal
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT).

Contents
About the RMT
14-2
Documentation and Training
14-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
14-1
About the RMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the RMT

What is the Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT)?
The Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT) is a personal computer (PC) hosting special
RMT software. The RMT communicates directly to the base station.
The RMT provides the following functions:
Help with initial base station installation

Help with configuration, testing, and calibration of base station equipment
Direct access to the base station for troubleshooting
Connections to the MSC through the Access Manager to monitor the base station
MSC emulation to test the health of a base station without requiring an actual
connection to the MSC (because of the RMT's stand-alone operation)
What is the RMT software?
The RMT software is a self-contained software package that executes scripted operation
and maintenance routines (macros). The RMT software is designed to run on a PC
provided by the service provider, and can interact with the base station software and
perform various diagnostic functions while the base station is offline from the Mobile
Switching Center (MSC).
The RMT has the following network connections:
The RMT plugs in directly to the frame of the base station at the cell site through the
Maintenance Test port. That port is accessible through a connector in the Remote
Maintenance Panel.
Once the base station is online, the RMT can connect to the 9256 OMP via the control
and signalling path to the Access Manager. Through this access to the 9256 OMP, the
cell site technician can gain access to all the OA&M interfaces supported by the 9256
OMP.
Remote access to a base station
The RMT also has the capacity for remote access to a base station. Remote access allows
the RMT to communicate with a URC in a cell through the LAN connection of any 9290
MM-AP on the same LAN as the 9290 MM-AP managing the cell. This can be done
remotely, without having to make a cell site visit. To communicate remotely via RMT, the
user connects the RMT to the LAN of a 9290 MM-AP that serves the base station for
which remote access is needed. When communication is established, RMT commands can
be executed. The connection status is logged using existing logging mechanisms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
14-2
About the RMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote access provided by the OMC-RAN
The RMT can be accessed from a cut-through on the 9253 OMC-RAN and 9254
OMC-RAN Compact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
14-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RMT Documentation
For further information on the RMT, see the help system on the RMT.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
14-4
15
15 Over-The-Air9259
Function (9259 OTAF)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9259 Over-The-Air-Function (9259 OTAF)

system.
Change in terminology
In 9259 OTAF terminology, mobile units are referred to as Mobile Stations.

Contents
About 9259 OTAF
15-2
Components of the OTA Network
15-4
15-7
About the 9259 OTAF software
15-9
9259 OTAF connections to other network elements
15-10
9259 OTAF user interfaces
15-12
15-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-1
About 9259 OTAF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About 9259 OTAF

What is the 9259 Over-The-Air-Function (9259 OTAF) system?
The 9259 OTAF system and its related network elements comprise the equipment that
enables 3G1X CDMA phones to be provisioned while in the end-users possession, with
little or no user intervention. This is accomplished by the exchange of data between the
handset and the administrative network over the air (OTA).
Can support 1xEV-DO dual-mode devices
The 9259 OTAF will work in the 1xEV-DO environment as long as the 1xEV-DO mobile
station is dual-mode (that is, the mobile station can support 3G1X CDMA calls as well as
1xEV-DO calls. However, 9259 OTAF can not be used to update an 1xEV-DO-only
mobile station or to perform updates in the 1xEV-DO-only mode. This is because when
the mobile station is in 1xEV-DO mode the mobile station can not perform an
Over-The-Air Service Provisioning (OTASP) session or receive an Over-The-Air
Parameter Administration (OTAPA) session.
How it works
There are two modes of operations for 9259 OTAF:
OTASP - a session that requires end user invocation

OTAPA - a session that is initiated without end user intervention
What is OTASP?
When a subscriber purchases a new mobile, he or she first dials a feature activation code
to connect to the service providers Customer Service Center (CSC) to provision the
mobile. This is referred to as an OTASP (Over-The-Air Service Provisioning) session, and
allows the provider to download to the mobile the data necessary to commence service for
that mobile. Once connected to the subscriber, the attendant at the CSC can activate the
mobile, provision service for the subscriber, and update the mobile stations configuration
over the air. Two connections are established for the duration of the OTASP call: a voice
connection between the subscriber and the CSC attendant, and a data connection for
programming of the mobile.
What is OTAPA?
In some cases, provisioning changes need to be made to the mobile station without
requiring the mobile user to originate an OTASP call. This function is provided by the
Over-The-Air Parameter Administration (OTAPA) feature. OTAPA is initiated by the
service provider without any action by the subscriber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-2
About 9259 OTAF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of OTAPA
There are several types of OTAPA:
Interactive OTAPA Interactive Mobile Administration (IMA), which allows the CSC
administrator to update individual mobile stations one at a time
Non-interactive OTAPA Batch Mobile Administration (BMA), which allows multiple
mobile stations to be updated via submission of a job specifying the list of mobile
stations to be updated.
Physical 9259 OTAF Location
Because the 9259 OTAF cluster communicates via the SS7 network, selection of the 9259
OTAFs physical location is based largely upon administrative convenience.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Described here are the major components of the OTA Network and the role each
component plays.
Figure 15-1 The OTASP/OTAPA Network (OTA Network)
Mobile station
The mobile station initiates OTASP by dialing an OTASP feature code (typically *228).
The mobile station is the called party in an OTAPA provisioning session. The mobile
station responds to OTASP directives received over the air from the 9259 OTAF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serving MSC/VLR
The serving Mobile Switching Center/Visitor Location Register (MSC/VLR) provides a

voice connection between the mobile subscriber and the CSC operator, and also a logical
data path to the 9259 OTAF.
HLR/AC
The Home Location Register/Authentication Center (HLR/AC) stores subscriber records

and authentication keys, and performs A-Key generation at the request of the 9259 OTAF.
This function may be performed by multiple HLR/ACs in the network, which are
addressed using Global Title Translation (GTT) for OTAPA.
Note that the HLR is not the only method of performing mobile station (MS)
Authentication. See Two routing methods (p. 15-5) for more on this.
Two routing methods
Mobile Station (MS) Authentication can be done using either HLRs or via GTT. The 9259
OTAF can support either method, but not both at the same time.
The first method is to build the 9259 OTAF HLR table and populate it with the
MIN/IMSI ranges served by each HLR (including those MSCs you have roaming
agreements with).
The second method is to populate a single alias point-code to the GTT platform and
let the GTT platform resolve which MIN(s)/IMSI(s) belong to which MSC/HLR.
9259 OTAF
The 9259 Over-The-Air Function (9259 OTAF) provides an interface between the CSC
and various network elements. The 9259 OTAF provides message mapping between OCP
commands received from the CSC and corresponding ANSI-41 responses from the MSC
and the HLR/AC. The 9259 OTAF also formats and parses IS-683 encapsulated portions
of ANSI-41 messages to and from the Mobile Station.
Customer Service Center (CSC)
The Customer Service Center (CSC) is a facility that establishes voice communication
with the mobile subscriber. The CSC issues provisioning messages to the Mobile Station
and various network elements using 9259 OTAF Control Protocol (OCP) messages to the
9259 OTAF, and provides an interface to the Home Location Register (HLR) for
subscriber record manipulation. Mobile subscriber information is maintained at the CSC.
The CSC provides a client platform that may communicate with the 9259 OTAF using the
OCP Communicator. Clients can also communicate with the 9259 OTAF using IMA.
The CSC need not be a manned facility. A majority of the CSCs use an Interactive Voice
Response (IVR) facility and are unmanned facilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTAPA Control Center (OCC)
The OTAPA Control Center starts, stops and manages OTAPA jobs, initiates OTAPA
reports, and manages data files on the 9259 OTAF, using BMA.
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is the primary workstation for performing 9259
OTAF OA&M tasks. The LMT is typically a PC with LAN/Ethernet capabilities able to
run a web browsing program and telnet.
Not the same as the MS LMT
The 9259 OTAF documentation refers to this technician-supplied PC as a Local

Maintenance Terminal but this technician-supplied PC is not a Mobility Server LMT,
and the Mobility Server LMT software and documentation do not apply to this PC.
SS7 Network Interfaces
The 9259 OTAF exchanges information with other network elements using the SS7
network. Communication between any two devices in the OTA network is carried over a
defined logical message interface.
The SS7 links to the 9259 OTAF cluster are implemented using channelized digital
facilities (T1/E1), with each signalling link occupying one facility time slot.
With the optional High-Speed Link (HSL) feature, each 9259 OTAF server can support
two T1 high-speed A-Links. HSLs use an entire DS1s unchannelized capacity.
Note that the entire 9259 OTAF cluster must be configured to use only HSLs or standard
SS7 links; it cannot support both types simultaneously.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The 9259 OTAF network element hosts the OTASP and OTAPA functionality. The 9259
OTAF network element also provides the interface between the mobile stations MSC and
associated OTASP/OTAPA administrative elements.
9259 OTAF platform
The 9259 OTAF system resides in a server cluster architecture based on the Sun
Microsystems Netra CT 410 Server platform. The cluster consists of two to eight
plug-in units housed in a Mobility Server (MS) frame. The cluster must contain one
Network Management System (NMS) server application, and may contain from two to
eight 9259 OTAF servers. The NMS server application physically resides on the first
physical server of the cluster, but may reside by itself on a separate physical server.
Multiple (smaller) clusters can be housed in a single MS frame. A cluster consists of two
to eight servers in the same frame, configured to function as one 9259 OTAF system.
9259 OTAF hardware
Each 9259 OTAF server resides on a separate Sun Microsystems Netra CT 410 server.
One instance of the 9259 OTAF application runs on each 9259 OTAF server. The NMS
Server is a co-resident application on the Netra CT 410 server in the first server
position. The NMS hosts the System Manager, which is a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
application designed as the primary technician interface to the 9259 OTAF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9259 OTAF server
The following figure shows the 9259 OTAF hardware layout.

Figure 15-2 9259 OTAF hardware
Expanding capacity
Typically, multiple 9259 OTAF servers are used to expand processing capacity by
cooperatively sharing the load of jobs and sessions. These multiple 9259 OTAF servers
are configured to share the same SS7 point code; hence, they appear as a single, more
powerful, 9259 OTAF server to the network.
Redundancy
The addition of a 9259 OTAF server to a cluster provides both additional transaction
processing capacity and redundancy for 9259 OTAF functionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9259 OTAF software
It is beyond the scope of this document to give detailed information about the 9259 OTAF
software architecture. For information on the 9259 OTAF software architecture, consult
the customer documentation listed at the end of this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

No direct connectivity to other network elements
The 9259 OTAF is mounted on a physically separate adjunct frame.

The 9259 OTAF is not part of the Local Area Network (LAN) structure of the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network. Because of this, the 9259 OTAF has no direct IP connectivity to any
of the other network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
Note that it is permissible for a service provider to set up network routing to allow some
connectivity between the 9256 OMP and the 9259 OTAF, if the service provider chooses
to do so.
Communication with network elements
The 9259 OTAF cluster communicates with the Mobile Switching Center (MSC), VLRs,
and so forth, via SS7 protocol, either directly or through the SS7 network via Signal
Transfer Points (STPs).
9259 OTAF cluster connections
The 9259 OTAF cluster functionality is based on a dual-rail LAN, created by two
Ethernet switches (A and B) interconnected by three link aggregation (LAG) connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 15-3 9259 OTAF cluster connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Management System (NMS)
Each 9259 OTAF cluster contains a Network Management System (NMS), which
performs centralized OA&M activities on the entire 9259 OTAF cluster. The NMS is the
focal point for general technician access to the cluster because it hosts the System
Manager technician interface. The NMS application is typically a co-resident application
on the 9259 OTAF server in the first shelf position.
Developing your own software
OCP Communicator is a separate Alcatel-Lucent software application that a service

provide can purchase. OCP Communicator provides functionality that allows service
providers to develop their own OTA software applications to interface with the 9259
OTAF platform.
Maintenance PC
The other user interface to the 9259 OTAF is a technician-supplied Personal Computer
(PC) with web-browser capabilities.
Not the same as the MS LMT
The 9259 OTAF documentation refers to this technician-supplied PC as a Local

Maintenance Terminal but this technician-supplied PC is not a Mobility Server LMT,
and the Mobility Server LMT software and documentation do not apply to this PC.
PC can be used for local support
For local support, if the technician-supplied PC is equipped with a terminal emulation

package such as ProComm, the PC can connect directly to the console ports for either a
server or an alarm card through the Maintenance Interface Panel (MIP) on the front of the
9259 OTAF frame.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Related 9259 OTAF documents
For further information, see the set of 9259 OTAF documentation, including:
9259 OTAF System Description, 401-614-057, which provides a high-level software

and hardware description of the 9259 OTAF
9259 OTAF CSC Interface Specification and OCP Communicator Guide ,
401-610-614, which defines the interfaces between the 9259 OTAF and the Customer
Services Center, using the 9259 OTAF Control Protocol (OCP), and also describes the
OCP Communicator
9259 OTAF Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Manual, 401-614-036,
which describes the 9259 OTAFs user interface and related administrative tasks
CDMA Over-the-Air Service Provisioning (OTASP) Optional Features, 401-612-116,
which describes the OTASP feature
9259 OTAF 9.0.xx Release Notes, which identifies features and changes introduced in
a new release
Training
9259 OTAF product training is available through a third-party vendor. For information
about course availability, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
15-14
16
16 Packet Acoustic Echo

9980
Cancellation (PAEC)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains the Alcatel-Lucent 9980 Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation
(PAEC) application.
Contents
16-2
About traditional acoustic echo cancellation
16-4
How the 9980 PAEC application works for EVRC and EVRC-B traffic
16-5
How the 9980 PAEC application works for G.711u traffic
16-8
About the 9980 PAEC
16-10
16-14
9980 PAEC application connections to other network elements
16-17
9980 PAEC application user interfaces
16-18
16-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9980 PAEC application?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9980 PAEC application suppresses acoustic echo in the encoded voice
packet domain without requiring decoding of the packets. The 9980 PAEC application has
been designed to support Enhanced Variable Rate CODEC (EVRC) calls that use the
Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO) or Remote Transcoder Operation (RTO) features.
Important! Though the title of the application mentions echo cancellation, the
application actually performs echo suppression, not echo cancellation.
What is a transcoder?
In this context, a transcoder is a Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV) resource that is used
to convert the Enhanced Variable Rate CODEC (EVRC) voice stream to Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM) in order to suppress echo.
What are the TrFO and RTO features?
Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO) and Remote Transcoder Operation (RTO) are optional
features provided by Alcatel-Lucent that save bandwidth, reduce round-trip delay, and
create better voice quality by reducing or eliminating the use of transcoders on mobile to
mobile calls.
Need for the 9980 PAEC application with TrFO Networks
Traditional acoustic echo cancellation techniques use transcoders to convert Enhanced

Variable Rate CODEC (EVRC) voice to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), where echo
suppression can be applied, and then convert the stream back to EVRC.
To use traditional acoustic echo cancellation techniques in TrFO and RTO networks,
additional transcoders would have to be added to the networks, and conversion to PCM
would have to be done. Thus, traditional acoustic echo cancellation techniques would
negate the major benefit TrFO/RTO networks.
Codecs supported
The 9980 PAEC application supports the following codecs:
EVRC, EVRC-B header-full, and EVRC-B header-free

G.711 -law (G.711u)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the 9980 PAEC application
The 9980 PAEC application has the following benefits:
As explained previously, the 9980 PAEC suppresses packet acoustic echo without
using transcoders and without translating the Enhanced Variable Rate CODEC
(EVRC) voice traffic to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and back. Therefore, with the
9980 PAEC you can suppress acoustic echo in your TrFO and RTO networks and still
maintain all the bandwidth efficiency, reduced round-trip delay, and better voice
quality that TrFO and RTO provide.
In addition, the 9980 PAEC application is more efficient for Voice over IP (VoIP)
networks. Traditional acoustic echo cancellation is inefficient for VoIP networks,
because VoIP networks only support limited tail-length delay due to computational
complexity and huge buffering requirements.
The 9980 PAEC application can work with Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs) that are
not developed by Alcatel-Lucent.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is acoustic echo?
Acoustic echo is an echo of the speaker's voice that the speaker hears through the
speaker's handset.
What causes acoustic echo in mobile networks?
Acoustic echo in mobile networks is caused by badly designed handsets and by

hands-free equipment in which the sound from the speakers is fed to the microphone.
Traditional acoustic echo cancellation
Traditional acoustic echo cancellation techniques require the use of transcoders to convert
Enhanced Variable Rate CODEC (EVRC) voice to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), where
echo suppression can be applied, and then to convert the stream back to EVRC.
How traditional acoustic echo cancellation works
Figure 16-1, Traditional acoustic echo cancellation (p. 16-4) shows where traditional
acoustic echo cancellation occurs in the network. Within the MSC, transcoders (called
vocoders in the diagram) are used to convert the encoded voice to PCM in order to apply
echo suppression, and then convert it back. The echo generated by the mobile on the left
is suppressed by the acoustic echo cancellation process on the left.
Figure 16-1 Traditional acoustic echo cancellation
MSC
MSC
Enc
Enc
Cell
AEC
Cell
AEC
Dec
Dec
Vocoder
Vocoder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-4
How the 9980 PAEC application works for EVRC and EVRC-B
traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traffic
Echo cancellation algorithm
The 9980 PAEC application uses a patented acoustic echo cancellation algorithm that
makes use of parameters in the EVRC and EVRC-B Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP)
packets to suppress acoustic echo. The algorithm compares target packets containing
voice samples against reference packets to determine whether the target packets contain
the same voice samples with some delay. If the target packets contain echo, the algorithm
suppresses the echo.
Each instance needs traffic from both end points
For the 9980 PAEC application to be able to identify a SIP session and its associated
bearer traffic, traffic from both end points must go through the same 9980 PAEC
application instance, as shown in Figure 16-2, Where packet acoustic echo cancellation
occurs for inter-MSC traffic (p. 16-6) .
Two instances are needed
Two instances of the 9980 PAEC application are needed for inter-MSC traffic. One
instance is needed for each MSC. As stated before, however, both instances need access
to traffic from both end points.
How it works
Each 9980 PAEC application instance allocates a single AEC channel to the call, and
performs echo cancellation on target packets. The echo-cancelled traffic stream is used as
reference packets by the other 9980 PAEC application instance. Figure 16-2, Where
packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for inter-MSC traffic (p. 16-6), provides a
high-level illustration of where target and reference packets are processed in an
inter-MSC call flow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-5
traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-2 Where packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for inter-MSC traffic
9980
PAEC-1
9980
PAEC-2
MSC1
MSC2
MLS2
MLS1
Service
Providers
IP Nework
9980 PAEC-1 target packets, A to B

Echo canceled voice traffic and 9980-2 reference packets, A to B
9980 PAEC-2 target packets, B to A
Echo canceled voice traffic and 9980-1 reference packets, B to A
AEC channel
Important! For each Mobile Switching Center (MSC), a pair of Multi Layer Switches
(MLSs) connects the 9980 PAEC application to the MSC. That is, MLS1 in the
figure is actually a pair of active MLSs that share the load between the MSC and the
9980 PAEC application. MLS2 also represents a pair of MLSs. For the sake of
simplicity, the pairing of MLSs is not shown in this diagram.
Where echo cancellation occurs on speech from mobile phone A
Echo in speech from mobile phone A is cancelled by the PAEC algorithm on an AEC
channel allocated in the 9980-1, as shown in Figure 16-2, Where packet acoustic echo
cancellation occurs for inter-MSC traffic (p. 16-6). The echo-cancelled voice stream is
used by the 9980-2 as reference packets.
Where echo cancellation occurs on speech from mobile phone B
Echo in speech from mobile phone B is cancelled by the PAEC algorithm on an AEC
channel allocated in the 9980-2, as shown in Figure 16-2, Where packet acoustic echo
cancellation occurs for inter-MSC traffic (p. 16-6). The echo-cancelled voice stream is
used by the 9980-1 as reference packets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-6
traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unidirectional acoustic echo cancellation for intra-MSC traffic
For intra-MSC traffic, traffic passes through a single 9980 PAEC application instance, but
two AEC channels are allocated within that instance. Each AEC channel performs echo
cancellation on target packets. The echo-cancelled traffic stream is used as reference
packets by the other AEC channel. Figure 16-3, Where packet acoustic echo cancellation
occurs for intra-MSC traffic (p. 16-7), provides a high-level illustration of where target
and reference packets are processed in an intra-MSC call flow.
Figure 16-3 Where packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for intra-MSC traffic
9980 PAEC
NPH
NPH
B
MSC
MLS
Target packets, A to B
Echo canceled voice traffic and reference packets, A to B
Target packets, B to A
Echo canceled voice traffic and reference packets, B to A
AEC channel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware configuration
The 9980 PAEC supporting the Media Processing Service Card (MPSC) AEC blade
configuration provides acoustic echo cancellation to G.711 traffic.
G.711u defined
G.711u is an ITU-T standard for a technique that takes a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
stream of information and converts the stream into packets. G.711u is a very commonly
used waveform codec.
9980 PAEC supports ITU-T G.711 uLaw (Greek symbol mu) encoding standard, which
encodes voice information in logarithmic 8 bit PCM format. The sampling rate of the
PCM data is 8 KHz. 9980 PAEC supports the G.711u Discontinuous Transmission (TX)
using combination of Voice Activity Detection (BAD) and Comfort Noise Generation
(CAN).
The G.711u PCM data are carried in RTP PCMU payload type. 9980 PAEC supports RTP
packet rate of 50 packet/sec. Hence, each payload contains up to 160 PCM sampled data.
9980 PAEC also supports DTMF and CN payload types.
How acoustic echo cancellation is performed
Performing AEC for G.711u requires a different blade (card) to implement the AEC
algorithm. Similar to EVRC/B, the algorithm performs the AEC in the packet domain.
Acoustic echo cancellation is performed on the PCM payload of RTP packets on the
MPSC blade. When echo is detected and to be suppressed, its PCM data is replaced with
G.711u encoded acoustic noise.
How it works
Figure 16-4, Processing of target and reference packets in a G.711u call flow
(p. 16-9) provides a high-level illustration of where target and reference packets are
processed in a G.711u call flow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-4 Processing of target and reference packets in a G.711u call flow
In the example, mobile phone A places a voice call to somewhere in the other vendor
network. The termination of this call could be another mobile, a traditional land line
telephone, or an IP telephone. Echo in speech from mobile phone A is cancelled by the
9980 PAEC hosting G.711u traffic on an AEC channel allocated in 9980 PAEC-3, as
shown in Figure 16-4, Processing of target and reference packets in a G.711u call flow
(p. 16-9).
Acoustic echo cancellation can occur at the 9980 PAEC hosting G.711u for both or either
far end or near end G-711 packet traffic. Whether acoustic echo cancellation is performed
for both ends or for one of the ends depends on the setting of a service provider controlled
parameter on the 9980 PAEC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-9
About the 9980 PAEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9980 PAEC

Hardware platform
The 9980 PAEC runs on the 9980 Application Intelligent Network Platform (AINP)
hardware platform.
The 9980 Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture (ATCA) Application Intelligent
Network Platform (AINP) is a highly flexible platform with a control plane cluster that
can be easily extended with feature server CEs to host new control plane functions. The
9980 PAEC also has a line card-based forwarding plane that contains freely
programmable Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) that can be extended with
service cards to implement powerful forwarding plane functions.
Physical description
The 9980 PAEC platform resides in a 14 slot, 12U high ATCA, PCI Industrial Computer
Manufacturers Group (PICMG3.0) chassis. The main components of the chassis include
the following:
Dual redundant shelf managers

Three independent fan trays with air filters
Dual redundant Power Entry Modules (PEMs)
The chassis has a cooling capacity for a 200W thermal load per front module, and 15W
per rear transition module (215W total per combined front and RTM slot).
About the chassis
The 9980 PAEC chassis:
Has a vertical height of 12U.

Mounts in a 19 inch compatible rack.
Provides two ESD wrist strap connections.
Supports 14 ATCA slots.

Supports Rear Transition Module (RTM) in all ATCA slots.
Supports a cooling of 200W per ATCA front slot, 15W per RTM slot (215W total per
combined front and RTM slot).
Supports 3 hot swappable fan trays.

Monitors the air intake temperature in each fan tray.
Supports easily replaceable air filter.
Supports redundant Shelf Management Modules. The Shelf Management Modules are
powered by the A and B power feeds.
Supports console ports (RS-232) for each Shelf Management Module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-10
About the 9980 PAEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supports an external 10/100 Ethernet connection for each Shelf Management Module.
Provides 2 hot swappable Power Entry Modules. Each Power Entry Module (PEM)
supports up to 4 independent power feeds.
Supports redundant power configuration for up to 200W per ATCA slot.

Provides shelf ground connection.
Supports a dedicated location for Alarm Panels.
Monitors air exhaust temperature and reports this through the Shelf Management
Modules. The chassis exhaust temperature controls the speed of the fan .
Allows airflow from front bottom to top rear.
Provides cable management that allows ready access to all FRUs.
Parts of the 9980 PAEC

Figure 16-5 Parts of the 9980 PAEC
Figure 16-5, Parts of the 9980 PAEC (p. 16-11), describes the parts of the 9980 PAEC.
Key
1
2
ATCA 14-slot midplane

Front cage card
Air filter
Fan tray 1
Fan tray 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-11
About the 9980 PAEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf alarm panel
ESD wrist strap terminal
Primary shelf manager (upper)
Secondary shelf manager (lower)
10
Front cable tray
11
Fan tray 3
Transportation lock
Physical dimensions
The physical dimensions of the chassis are described in Table 16-1, Technical
specifications of 9980 PAEC chassis (p. 16-12) .
Table 16-1
Attribute
Value
Height
532.6 mm
Width
482.6 mm
Depth
524.04 mm (20.65 in), not including

front-mounted cable tray
Shelf weight, for the chassis, the PEMs, the

fan trays, the Shelf Alarm Panel (SAP), and
the shelf managers
32 kg (71 lb)

fan trays, the SAP, and the shelf managers,
with circuit packs and front and rear fillers
45 kg (99 lb)

fan trays, the SAP, and the shelf managers,
with circuit packs, fillers and packaging
59 kg (130 lb)
Power
Input voltage
Nominal: -48 VDC

Range: -42.5 to -60 VDC
Input power
25 A per power feed (total 4+4 feeds)
Cooling Capacity
Front boards
200W per slot
RTM
15W per slot (not used in Issue 2)
Environmental
The 9980 PAEC is NEBS Level 3 compliant.
Ambient temperature
+5 to +45 C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-12
About the 9980 PAEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-1
(continued)
Attribute
Value
Humidity
5% to 85%, no condensation
EMI
Conducted Emissions
EN 55022 Class A
Radiated Emissions
EN 55022 Class A
Safety
Protected Earth Test
EN60950, test current 25 A, resistance <100

mOhm
Hipot Test
EN60950, 1 kV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Requirements for mobile phones
The 9980 PAEC application requires EVRC, EVRC-B, or G.711u capable mobiles.
Chassis layout required for 9980 PAEC application
Figure 16-6, Chassis diagram for 9980 PAEC application (p. 16-14), shows the
maximum number of boards in a chassis for the 9980 PAEC application.
Figure 16-6 Chassis diagram for 9980 PAEC application
OA&M
Shelf Alarm Panel
Fan Tray
Fan Tray
ShM 1
ShM 2
MPSC (AEC)
MPSC (AEC) (optional)
MPSC (AEC) (optional)
(optional)
(optional)
LSC
LSC
LSC
IHC
IHC
LSC (AEC) (optional)
LSC (AEC) (optional)

LSC (AEC)
LSC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Fan Tray
Integrated hub cards (IHC)
Two Integrated Hub Cards (IHCs) reside in chassis physical slots 7 and 8. These are the
only slots that can be used for the IHCs.
The IHC houses the control element (CE), a base fabric that switches control messages
between cards, and a data fabric, that switches payload traffic between cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IHC redundancy and required slot location
Two IHCs are supported for redundancy, and the IHCs must be located in slots 7 and 8 of
the chassis. Critical CE processes support a high availability feature. When a fault occurs
in the active process, the standby process on the other IHC takes over and becomes the
active process.
IHC management and console ports
Each IHC provides a management Ethernet port and a console port.

IHC CE processes
The IHC CE is the central control element for all processes associated with OA&M, such
as the command line interface, routing protocols, and other protocols such as LACP and
STP.
The 9980 PAEC application uses the SIPMON (SIP Session Monitor) CE process to
manage SIP sessions. SIPMON processes the SIP signalling packets forwarded by the line
service cards and dynamically allocates and de-allocates AEC channels on the AEC SC.
Line service cards (LSC) for I/O
The LSCs provide a rich set of data packet forwarding features that are sufficient for
switching, routing, tunneling, and traffic management to operate in any Layer 2, IP, or
Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) data network.
Duplex LSCs and required slot locations
For path diversity, the 9980 PAEC application requires two LSCs, which must reside in
slots 5 and 6. An additional pair can reside in slots 9 and 10.
LSC gigabit Ethernet ports
Connections between the LSC and a Multi-Level Switch (MLS) use multi-mode GigE
fiber utilizing dual LC connectors at the LSC. Optionally, a 10 GigE connection is
available. The connections must be configured as two Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
interfaces.
Acoustic echo cancellation service card (AEC SC) for EVRC and EVRC-B
The AEC SC is unique to the 9980 PAEC application, and is the engine that performs the
acoustic echo suppression on bearer packets. The echo cancellation algorithm runs on a
Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) device on the AEC SC card.
As directed by the SIPMON process (which runs on the IHC cards) the AEC SC allocates
an AEC channel when a SIP session is created. Once an AEC channel is allocated,
acoustic echo suppression is applied to the bearer packets for that session. The channel is
released when the SIP session ends.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required slot location for EVRC and EVRC-B
The AEC SC reside in physical slot 4, with optional cards in slots 5 and 6.
Media processing service card (MPSC) for G.711u
The Media Processing Service Card (MPSC) provides data packet forwarding, including
tunneling and filtering. The MPSC card provides the functions for G.711u that the LSC
provides for EVRC/B. The MPSC card cannot be used as LC-FE nor for EVRC/B echo
cancellation.
The MPSC card incorporates DSPs and FPGA for media processing. The MPSC card is
located in slot 11, and optionally 12, and 13. The multiple MPSC blades share the load of
calls. If one MPSC blade fails, the acoustic echo cancellation is lost for the channels on
that blade, however all new calls are served by the remaining MPSC blades.
Required slot location for G.711u
The AEC SC resides in physical slot 11, with optional cards in slots 12 and 13.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-16
9980 PAEC application connections to other network

elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9980 PAEC application connections to other network elements

Connects through MLSs
As shown in Figure 16-2, Where packet acoustic echo cancellation occurs for inter-MSC
traffic (p. 16-6), the 9980 PAEC application connects to the network through a pair of
Multi Layer Switches (MLSs).
What is an MLS?
An MLS is a hardware-based switch that acts as a router. An MLS combines layer 2, 3,

and 4 switching technologies and provides high-speed scalability with low latency. The
MLS accomplishes this combination of high-speed scalability with low latency by using
huge filter tables based on the criteria designed by the network administrator.
What happens if an MLS goes down?
Failure of a single MLS will not impact the operation of the 9980 PAEC application,
because the other MLS in the pair will take over traffic for the 9980 PAEC.
What happens if a 9980 PAEC application instance goes down?
In case of 9980 PAEC application failure, you will no longer have packet acoustic echo
cancellation but no calls will be lost. Then the MLS(s) to which the 9980 PAEC is
connected will automatically route the traffic away from the 9980 PAEC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9980 CLI
The 9980 PAEC can be managed through a Command-Line Interface (CLI).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation on the 9980 PAEC application
The following documents contain information related to the 9980 PAEC application:
Document number
Document title
235-200-100
Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch

401-100-101R2.5
Alcatel-Lucent 9980 Packet Acoustic Echo

Cancellation Planning and Site Preparation
401-100-102
9980 Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation

Installation
401-100-104R2.5

Cancellation Command Line Interface
Reference
401-100-106R2.5

Cancellation Operations, Maintenance, and
Administration
401-710-093
Alcatel-Lucent TrFO/RTO Planning and

Implementation Guide
401-710-095
Alcatel-Lucent IPSHO and TrFO/RTO

Transport Network.
Training on the 9980 PAEC application
The following courses are available on the 9980 PAEC:
9980 PAEC Overview, TAP21001W

9980 PAEC OA&M, TAP21002W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
16-20
17
17
Connections
between
network elements
Master Diagram
The following Master Diagram shows an overview of the I-MSC-based 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network.
Note that the Master Diagram does not contain the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet
Data Network.
In the diagram the lines show logical data flows between network elements.
In the following diagram, a
Yellow dot and dashed line represents the OA&M function

Blue dashed line represents the control function
Red solid line represents the bearer function
Black double solid line represents two or more functions combined
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(I-MSC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table of interconnections between elements
The following table lists the physical layer connections and protocol layer used between
each network element in Figure 17-1, Master Diagram of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC) (p. 17-2). Note that in this table the generic term
OMC-RAN is used to mean either the 9253 OMC-RAN or the 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact.
Table 17-1
Connections between network elements in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO

Network
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
Base station connections

1xEV-DO base
station
9271 EV-DO RNC

via the T1/E1
Concentrator
T1/E1
TDM (bearer and

control)
1xEV-DO base
station
9271 EV-DO RNC

via the router or MLS
Ethernet
IP (bearer and control)
9271 EV-DO RNC connections

9271 EV-DO RNC
PDSN via an Ethernet

switch
Ethernet
A10, A11
9271 EV-DO RNC
9256 OMP via the

Service Provider's IP
Operations Network
Ethernet
Ethernet, Telnet, SSH
9271 EV-DO RNC
1xEV-DO base
station via the
Ethernet switch.
Ethernet
Bearer and control
9271 1xEV-DO RNC
OMC-RAN via the

Operations Network
Ethernet
Ethernet, SSH and

CORBA through IPSec
9271 EV-DO RNC
9271 EV-DO RNC
Ethernet
A13 and proprietary

signalling through
IPSec
9271 EV-DO RNC
AAA server
Ethernet
A12
OMC-RAN connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-1

Network (continued)
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
OMC-RAN
9271 EV-DO RNC,

9256 OMP, Access
Manager via the
Operations Network
Ethernet
CORBA, SNMP, SSH
9256 OMP
OMC-RAN and 9271

EV-DO RNC via the
Operations Network
Ethernet
OA&M
9256 OMP
Access Manager
Ethernet
OA&M
9256 OMP
Alcatel-Lucent 9281
Packet Switch (PS),
formerly called 5ESS
Switch, via the
terminal server
(MRV)
Ethernet
OA&M
9256 OMP connections
3G1X CDMA Base Station connections

3G1X CDMA Base
Station
9281 Packet Switch

and 9290 Mobility
Manager via the
T1/E1 Concentrator
T1/E1
bearer and control
3G1X CDMA Base

Station
9281 PS and 9290

Mobility Manager via
the MLS
Ethernet
bearer and control
9281 Packet Switch connections

9281 Packet Switch
base station via T1/E1

Concentrator
Frame Relay Packet

pipes
bearer
9281 Packet Switch
base station via the

MLS
Ethernet
bearer
9281 Packet Switch
Access Manager
SS7
control
9281 Packet Switch
9256 OMP via the

MRV
RS-232
OA&M
9281 Packet Switch
9256 OMP
Ethernet
OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-1

Network (continued)
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
9281 Packet Switch
PSTN
TDM, SS7
bearer, control
9281 Packet Switch
PDSN
Ethernet
A10/A11
9281 Packet Switch
Other MSCs via the

Packet Core Network
Ethernet
SIP and RTP
9980 PAEC
OMP via the service

provider's IP Network
Ethernet
OA&M
9980 PAEC
MLSs in the Packet

Core Network
Ethernet
To monitor SIP and

RTP
9980 PAEC connections
Access Manager connections

Access Manager
3G1X CDMA Base

Station via T1/E1
Concentrator
DS0
control and OA&M
Access Manager
3G1X CDMA Base

Station via MLS
Ethernet
control and OA&M
Access Manager
9256 OMP
Ethernet
OA&M
Access Manager
(3B21D processor).
NOTE: This
connection is ONLY
available for the 9290
MM-Based Access
Manager.
9256 OMP
DCI
OA&M
Access Manager
9281 Packet Switch
SS7
control
Access Manager
S-HLR, Access
Manager, other
vendor's MSCs and
other services such as
9259 OTAF
SS7
control
Access Manager
OMC-RAN via the

Operations Network
Ethernet
OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9259 OTAF is not listed
The 9259 Over-The-Air-Function (9259 OTAF) is not part of the Local Area Network
(LAN) structure of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. Because of this, the 9259 OTAF
has no direct IP connectivity to any of the other network elements in the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network. Therefore the 9259 OTAF is not shown in Figure 17-1, Master
Diagram of the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network (I-MSC) (p. 17-2) and in
the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
17-6
18
CDMA features
18
Overview
Purpose
This chapter discusses Alcatel-Lucent CDMA features and tells where to find more
information about them and how to order them.
Contents
18-2
Features defined
18-3
Obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features and additional capacity
18-4
FAF and QFAF method
18-5
18-9
9281 Packet Switch method
18-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-1
CDMA features
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section discusses the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA features and tells where to find more
information about them.
Contents
Features defined
18-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-2
CDMA features
Features defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features defined
What is a feature?
A feature is typically an enhancement to existing software or hardware that adds new

functionality to the product. A feature can also be used to remove obsolete hardware or
lay the groundwork for future improvements.
Types of features
Alcatel-Lucent offers two types of features:
Basic network features
Optional features
What are Basic Network Features?
Basic network features are features that are considered central to the product. These basic
network features provide basic call connectivity, as well as the ability to support a
portfolio of revenue generating types of services for both voice and data. Basic network
features are included in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network and are delivered to the service
provider at no additional cost.
What are optional features?
Optional features are features that provide enhanced services such as greater connectivity
with other systems, increased subscriber convenience, and additional protection against
fraud. These features enable service providers to differentiate themselves in a competitive
market. Optional features are sold separately and must be requested separately by the
service provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-3
CDMA features
Overview
Obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features and
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features

and additional capacity
Overview
Purpose
As explained in the previous section, basic network features are included in the 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network and are delivered to the service provider at no additional cost.
Optional features and additional capacity, however, are sold separately and must be
requested separately by the service provider.
This section gives a high-level overview of the process for obtaining Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA optional features and for purchasing additional capacity from Alcatel-Lucent.
Three methods
At present there are three methods for obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features
or additional capacity:
Feature Activation File (FAF) and Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF) method
Software licensing method
Contents
FAF and QFAF method
18-5
18-9
18-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-4
CDMA features
FAF and QFAF method
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAF and QFAF method

What is the FAF method?
The Feature Activation File (FAF) method uses the Alcatel-Lucent FAF to regulate the
purchase of optional features. The FAF manages up to 2000 features. Each feature in the
FAF is set to either on or off.
What is the QFAF method?
The Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF) method is the traditional Alcatel-Lucent
method of regulating the purchase of additional base station coverage in a network by
using a qualifier in the FAF file. Instead of setting each QFAF feature to on or off,
the qualifier assigns a maximum value of capacity enabled for that feature at that MSC.
What is the FAF?
The Feature Activation File (FAF) is an encrypted file that contains status information for
optional features and additional capacity purchased by Alcatel-Lucent customers. A
unique FAF is generated for each MSC. The FAF is used to determine which optional
features are activated or deactivated at a given MSC, and how much capacity is
authorized at that MSC.
How is the FAF created?
Each FAF is specially generated by an Alcatel-Lucent employee.

How it works
One copy of the FAF exists per MSC and is stored on the 9256 OMP. Each FAF contains
multiple FAF features and QFAF features. The FAF file is transferred from the 9256 OMP
to the Access Manager and is stored there. FAF/QFAF data is distributed from the Access
Manager to the 9290 MM-APs and to the 9256 OMP. From the 9256 OMP, FAF/QFAF
data is further distributed to the 9271 EV-DO RNCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-5
CDMA features
FAF and QFAF method
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAF architecture
The traditional Feature Activation File (FAF) architecture is shown here.

Figure 18-1 Traditional FAF architecture
The traditional FAF architecture works in the following manner:
An Alcatel-Lucent employee generates the FAF package off site.

A service provider employee goes to the Alcatel-Lucent web portal, logs in,
downloads the file to the 9256 OMP and then transfers the file to the Access Manager.
Once the file is shipped to the Access Manager, software on the Access Manager
automatically reads the file, downloads the file to the 9290 MM-APs and ring nodes,
and sends the FA data directly to software on the 9256 OMP.
Note that for 9271 EV-DO RNCs, software on the 9256 OMP sends FA data to the
RNCs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-6
CDMA features
FAF and QFAF method
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Figure 18-2, Traditional FAF process (p. 18-7) shows the traditional Feature Activation
File (FAF) process.
Figure 18-2 Traditional FAF process
The traditional FAF process is as follows:

1. A service provider employee calls a member of the Alcatel-Lucent sales team, and
provides ordering and payment information.
2. The member of the Alcatel-Lucent sales team verifies that the customer is authorized
to request the feature and verifies payment information.
3. The member of the Alcatel-Lucent sales team informs the FAF Administrator, who
generates a new FAF package and places the FAF package on the Alcatel-Lucent
Electronic Download (ALED) server. The ALED server is where customer files are
placed for access and retrieval.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-7
CDMA features
FAF and QFAF method
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. The member of the Alcatel-Lucent Sales Team notifies the service provider employee
that the transaction is complete.
5. The service provider employee retrieves the new FAF package from the LED Server,
installs the FAF package on the appropriate 9256 OMP, and then ships the FAF
package to the Access Manager.
6. Once the file is shipped to the Access Manager, software on the Access Manager
automatically reads the file, downloads the file to the 9290 MM-APs and ring nodes,
and sends the FA data directly to software on the appropriate 9256 OMP.
Note that for 9271 EV-DO RNCs, software on the 9256 OMP sends FA data to the
RNCs.
The feature can now be used by the service provider.
For further information on FAFs and QFAFs, see your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-8
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the LKDI software license generation and delivery method?
License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI) is a tool that Alcatel-Lucent put on the
Online Customer Support web site to allow customers to manage license keys. The LKDI
tool is integrated with OLCS and uses Macrovision's FlexNET Operations (FNO)
license delivery module. The CDMA division of Alcatel-Lucent is using LKDI to provide
best in class software license generation and delivery for Alcatel-Lucent optional features.
Additional product families will be added to the current CDMA product managed under
LKDI in the future.
Additional capacity
In addition to optional feature activation, for some products additional hardware capacity
can be activated with a license. Purchased capacity will remain in an entitlement pool
visible through LKDI until assigned to a hardware element and activated with a license
downloaded onto the customer's network.
Will replace FAF and QFAF method
The Alcatel-Lucent LKDI software license generation and delivery method is expected to
eventually replace the FAF and QFAF method and provide a single point of contact for
obtaining Alcatel-Lucent CDMA optional features. Newer features will start to use
licensing and existing FAF and QFAF features will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis
for migration to licensing.
Benefits
For the service provider, software license generation and delivery will provide:
Asingle repository and interface for managing, downloading and tracking software
licenses, including purchase and activation history
Acommon license generation and delivery platform across Alcatel-Lucent platforms
that provides a manageable process to activate RTU based features and deploy
incremental capacity as needed
Enhanced hardware security (cell hardening)
Greater control over capacity activation
Automation for licence delivery and real time access, twenty four hours a day and
seven days a week
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-9
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important points
Key points to remember about the Alcatel-Lucent software license generation and
delivery system include the following:
The software validates the license prior to particular unit/feature activation.

Hardware activation licenses are tied to the serial number or host ID of the unit being
activated, which provides enhanced hardware security.
This method gives the service provider greater control of the activation process.
Login administration
Access to the LKDI software license generation and delivery system is tied into a login
with access permissions mapped to your current Alcatel-Lucent handle. Upon receipt of
the login request, an Alcatel-Lucent employee will validate your permission with your
company delegate.
Getting access
To get access to the Alcatel-Lucent LKDI software license generation and delivery
system.
If you are a registered OLCS user, go directly to the FlexNET Operations (FNO)
registration page: https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/sftw_keys/fno_
register.cgi
If you are not registered with OLCS, first register for access to OLCS at:
https://market.alcatel-lucent.com/release/SPRegistrantTypeSvlt
and then go to the FNO registration page.
Managing the licenses
After customers obtain a license or licenses from FNO, customers can then transfer the
license file to the 9256 OMP and run the License Administration Tool (LAT) from the
9256 OMP to manage the licenses for the Access Manager. The LAT supports installation,
deletion, and retrieval of licenses.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-10
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commands
Additional commands are also provided to manage installed licenses from the 9256 OMP:
The License Query command (OP:LICENSE) enables customers to determine what

licenses exist, what the licenses are for, how long before the licenses expire, and if the
licenses are being used.
The Refresh License Command (REFRESH:LICENSE) enables a technician to force
the refresh of a license. This command is used in cases of database corruption or data
being out-of-sync.
The Delete License Command (DELETE:LICENSE) enables a technician to delete a
license from the system. This command removes an invalid or expired license that is
not going to be replaced.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-11
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Process overview
The following figure shows a high-level view of the Alcatel-Lucent LKDI software
license generation and delivery process.
Figure 18-3 Software license key activation and management process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-12
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enhancements
The following optional delivery enhancements are available with the Alcatel-Lucent
software license generation and delivery system. For pricing and contract terms related to
these options contact your Account Executive.
Token return process - A license is locked to the defined hardware element host. The
Token return process is a return/rehost option. Customers may return an existing
license, obtain a replacement license for a reduced quantity and use the remaining
quantity for another host. Once the reduced quantity license is installed, a token file is
returned. The customer would return the token file to Alcatel-Lucent to clear the
associated return credit tracking record. If the token is not returned after a defined
period, Alcatel-Lucent will assume the original license is still in use and deduct the
new license quantity from entitlements or bill the customer for the incremental usage.
Expiring keys (leased capacity) - Alcatel-Lucent has the option to offer a feature
license key that provides temporary functionality up to the expiration time and date
specified in the license key. Twelve hours after the key expires, the functionality goes
offline.
Emergency override keys - Alcatel-Lucent has the option to offer an expiring
emergency override key that can reside in the system along with a permanent key for
a particular feature. The override key turns on additional capacity of the hardware for
a specified amount of time. Once the override key expires, the system reverts to the
permanent key for the particular feature.
Bulk host ID upload tools - Alcatel-Lucent supports customers with large
deployments or large scale re-configurations by delivering consolidated license files.
This allows multiple licenses to be loaded in a single license install sequence as
opposed to loading licenses one at a time. In order to obtain a consolidated license
file, a spreadsheet of host IDs (serial numbers) must be created with the desired
feature(s) and quantities. Customer Technical Advocates can assist in the development
of these spreadsheets and with license generation.
Overdraft -- Some licenses (for example, CDMA Modem Unit - V (CMU-V) and
CMU-IVB, amplifier power, radio carrier and antenna test) include an optional
overdraft field. This field provides the customer access to capacity over and above
that in the quantity field that represents what the customer has purchased. Provided
the appropriate customer agreements are in place, overdraft usage reports are
collected by the Alcatel-Lucent account teams on a regular basis and the customer
billed if they have consumed any of their overdraft allotment. A warning message is
provided to the customer whenever they consume overdraft.
Increased security - The 9256 OMP administrator can grant access to licensing tasks
to users without giving the users root access.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-13
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New roles
Service provider employees must be designated to fill two roles to monitor and carry out
administration of license keys. These roles are functionally the same for 3G1X CDMA
and for 1xEV-DO.
CDMA roles
The software licensing roles for 3G1X CDMA are:
A Role Based Access Control (RBAC) License Administrator role on the 9256 OMP
for the CDMA platform
An RBAC Application Administrator role on the 9256 OMP for the CDMA platform
For information on these roles, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management
Platform (OMP) OA&M, 401-662-108 for the 9256 OMPv2 and 9256 Operations and
Management Platform v4 (OMP) Application Guide, 401-662-121 for the 9256 OMPv4.
9271 EV-DO RAS roles
The software licensing roles for the 9271 EV-DO RAS are:
A Role Based Access Control (RBAC) License Administrator role on the OMP for the
9271 EV-DO RAS platform
An RBAC Application Administrator role on the OMP for the 9271 EV-DO RAS
platform
For information on these roles see the following:
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) OA&M, 401-662-108

9271 EV-DO Radio Access System Planning and Implementation Guide, 401-614-101
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent LKDI software license generation and delivery
method, see the following documents.
Table 18-1
Document name
Document number
Purpose
9256 Operations and

Management Platform (9256
OMP) OA&M
401-662-108
general CDMA license

installation and
information about
software licensing roles
CDMA Modem Unit - V (CMU-V)

Channel Card and Related
Features Optional Feature
Description
401-612-896
CMU-V description,
introduces licensing for
CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-14
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1
(continued)
Document name
Document number
Purpose
Inter-MSC Cell Swing Optional

Feature Description
401-612-150
Describes how licenses

are moved from one MSC
to another in cell swing
9290 Mobility Manager

Applications Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance
(OA&M)
401-710-236
LICMGR processes and

related TI commands
License Key Delivery

Infrastructure User Manual
401-703-800
LKDI FNO User Manual
9271 EV-DO Radio Access System

Planning and Implementation
Guide
401-614-101
procedures to set up
software licensing roles
and to perform software
licensing tasks for the
9271 EV-DO RAS
For training
For training on the Alcatel-Lucent LKDI software license generation and delivery
method, see the License Key Delivery Infrastructure Initial CDMA feature to use
licensing: CMU-V course, CL5511.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-15
CDMA features
additional capacity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
To purchase optional features or extra capacity on the Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch,
you must follow a different process than the processes described in this section. For
information on the 9281 Packet Switch method for purchasing optional features and extra
capacity, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
18-16
19

19
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA backhaul networks.

Contents
19-2
19-2
19-5
About Frame Relay Backhaul
19-6
IP Backhaul
19-8
About IP Backhaul
19-8
19-12
Software for IP Backhaul
19-13
User interfaces for IP Backhaul
19-14
19-15
Ethernet Backhaul
19-16
About Ethernet Backhaul
19-16
19-18
About EBH network architecture
19-19
Hardware for Ethernet Backhaul
19-20
19-21
Ethernet Backhaul connections to other network elements
19-22
19-23
Documentation and training for Ethernet Backhaul
19-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Backhaul

Networks
What is a backhaul network?
In telecommunications, backhauling is concerned with transporting traffic between

distributed sites and more centralized points of presence. In this document, backhaul
network is defined as the transport network used to connect the base stations to the MSC
and/or 9271 EV-DO RNC.
Types
The following types of backhaul networks exist in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:

Ethernet Backhaul
IP Backhaul
1xEV-DO Backhaul
Frame Relay Backhaul uses the LAPD protocol to support circuit voice, TrFO/RTO, and
1X packet data services. Frame Relay backhaul cannot provide the flexibility that IP
backhaul provides.

IP Backhaul is defined as using Internet Protocol (IP) as a standardized network layer for
Transceiver Station (BTS), 9281 Packet Switch, 9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller
(RNC) and Access Manager, within the Radio Access Network (RAN).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is 1xEV-DO Backhaul?
1xEV-DO Backhaul is a form of IP Backhaul that is used only by 1xEV-DO network

elements.
Backhaul in the network
The types of backhaul in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network are shown in the following
diagram, in the four base stations on the left side of the diagram.
The top left base station is a 3G1X Base Station that uses Frame Relay Backhaul.
The second base station on the left is a 3G1X Base Station that uses IP Backhaul.
The third base station on the left-hand side is a Mixed-mode Base Station, which uses
Ethernet Backhaul for both 1xEV-DO and 3G1X at the same time.
The fourth base station on the left-hand side is a 1xEV-DO Base Station, which uses
1xEV-DO Backhaul.
Diagram
The following copy of the Master Diagram shows all the CDMA backhaul networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(I-MSC)
All the network elements shown in the diagram are explained in Network-related terms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-4

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes Frame Relay (FR) Backhaul.

Contents
19-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame Relay Backhaul (FRBH) uses the LAPD protocol to support circuit voice,
TrFO/RTO, and 1X packet data services. Frame Relay backhaul cannot provide the
flexibility that IP backhaul provides.
Uses for Frame Relay Backhaul
Frame Relay Backhaul is used to support the following networks:
The 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network
The TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network

And the 3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network
Changes to the 9281 Packet Switch
To support Frame Relay Backhaul, the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH) needs to be
set up on the 9281 Packet Switch.
Access Manager support
Both the 9290 MM-Based Access Manager and the 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager
v1 can support Frame Relay Backhaul.
User interfaces
Backhaul networks can be made up of equipment provided by several vendors:
For equipment produced by Alcatel-Lucent, user interfaces include the 9253

OMC-RAN, 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, 9256 OMP, Status Display Pages (SDPs),
and technician interface (TI) commands.
For equipment produced by other vendors, consult the vendor documentation for
information on user interfaces.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
An overview of Frame Relay Backhaul is given in IP Backhaul for CDMA Voice and
Packet Data, CL5591W.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-7

IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul
IP Backhaul refers to using Internet Protocol as a standardized network layer for

Transceiver Station (BTS), 9281 Packet Switch, 9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller
(RNC) and Access Manager, within the Radio Access Network (RAN).
Convergence with 1xEV-DO
This evolution to IP for 3G1X CDMA, combined with the ability of 1xEV-DO to run over
IP, opens the door to a convergence among both air interfaces that results not only in
end-to-end IP support at the RAN but also in the simplification of the network from the
elements and management perspective.
Benefits of IP Backhaul
IPBH provides the following benefits for the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network:
With IPBH, the system dynamically calculates signalling to traffic usage, providing
more efficient use of the backhaul facility.
IPBH supports shared facilities between 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO applications
resulting in increased utilization and lower operational expenses.
IPBH enables packet data traffic to be separated from voice traffic and routed directly
to an RNC before the traffic goes to a 9281 Packet Switch.
How does IP Backhaul work?
To implement IP Backhaul, an industry standard protocol called multi-link/multi-class

PPP (ML/MC-PPP) is used to group multiple DS1s into a single large pipe called a
multi-link group (MLG) for backhaul transport.
With IPBH, both signalling and user traffic are multiplexed over IP over unchannelized
DS1s. These steps are followed:
Traffic from the base station terminates on an edge router.

The backhaul routers send the signalling traffic to the Radio Cluster Server
application processor (RCS-AP).
The bearer traffic is delivered directly to a Backhaul Server (BHS), located in the
PSU, over Ethernet links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-8

IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support for service-specific networks
IP Backhaul supports the following service-specific networks:
3G1X CDMA, whether 1xEV-DO traffic is present or not

Data offload for CDMA 3G1X Packet Data Service, to the PSU, for North American
Region (NAR) service providers
The 9271 EV-DO RAS in a mixed mode confirmation (where 3G1X CDMA is
present)
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS, using the Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)
Note that when IP Backhaul is used to support a mixed-mode configuration, then IP

Backhaul includes the convergence of transport networks and facilities. However, IP
Backhaul can also support independent networks, for example, when IP Backhaul is used
to support the Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS, using the BSOC.
It is outside the scope of this document to describe all the types of IPBH networks that are
available. One type of IPBH network, the Converged IP Backhaul Network (IPBH)
network, is shown here as an example.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-9

IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Converged IP Backhaul Network supports both 3G1X CDMA and the 9271 EV-DO
RAS in the same network, over the same physical line at the same time, with common
provisioning and OA&M tasks.
Figure 19-2 Converged IP Backhaul Network
Note the following:
This Converged IP Backhaul Network supports both 3G1X CDMA and the 9271
EV-DO RAS.
The Router and Multi Layer Switch (MLS) are shared.
There are shared physical interfaces between 3G1X CDMA and the 9271 EV-DO
RAS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-10

IP Backhaul
About IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported by all Access Manager
All Access Managers support IP Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-11

IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Uses existing hardware
IPBH uses most of the MLS and MSC equipment from the Frame Relay Backhaul
network.
New hardware in the 9281 Packet Switch
In the 9281 Packet Switch, IP Backhaul requires additional Packet Handlers for Ethernet
(PHEs) to handle the increased capacity and a Backhaul Protocol Handler (BPH). For
more information on this, see Support for IP Backhaul (p. 6-47).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-12

IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optional feature
IP Backhaul is an optional feature and is FAF-able. This means that you must purchase IP
Backhaul and then have the appropriate setting made in the FAF file to be able to use IP
Backhaul in your network.
RTU
The RTU administration is done on the Access Manager via the FAF file.
RC/V
There is RC/V work required on the 9281 Packet Switch, to activate and add IPBH.
New software at MSC
IP Backhaul requires new software at the MSC and at the base station.
9281 Packet Switch Support
For information on 9281 Packet Switch support for IPBH, see Support for IP Backhaul
(p. 6-47).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-13

IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For OA&M information for IP Backhaul
For more information about OA&M for IP Backhaul, see the chapter called OA&M for
IP Backhaul in CDMA Backhaul Networks, 401-710-090.
For information on other vendor's equipment
Backhaul networks can be made up of equipment provided by several vendors. For user
interfaces for equipment provided by other vendors, consult the customer documentation
from the other vendor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-14

IP Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Related documentation
For more information on IP Backhaul, see the CDMA Backhaul Networks, 401-710-090.
See especially the IPBH documentation roadmap.
Training for IP Backhaul
The following courses are available for IP Backhaul:
IP Backhaul for CDMA Voice and Packet Data, CL5591W

IP Backhaul Conversion, CL5592W
1xEV-DO HDLC to MLPPP Conversion , CL5594W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-15

Ethernet Backhaul
Guide to CDMA base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Backhaul

What is the difference between IP Backhaul and Ethernet Backhaul?
Ethernet Backhaul and IP Backhaul use the same strategy but are implemented over
different physical media. IP Backhaul is implemented on T1/E1 trunks; Ethernet
Backhaul is implemented on Ethernet facilities. Note that IP Backhaul and Ethernet
Backhaul are complementary to each other, can share the same transport resources, and
can co-exist within the same Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This gives the service
provider the flexibility required to optimize both the service provider's capital and
operational expenditures.
Benefits of Ethernet Backhaul
EBH provides the following benefits:
Ethernet interfaces at the base station for both 1xEV-DO and 3G1X IPBH, resulting in
a reduction of operating expenses and higher bandwidth, better scalability and pooling
efficiency than on T1/E1 interfaces
A single management interface for all backhaul and other network elements from the
OMC-RAN, which provides a common platform
Total traffic control within the base station through the use of multiple Virtual Local
Area Network (VLAN) allows for 1xEV-DO and 3G1X traffic separation, traffic
shaping, and end-to-end Quality of Service (QoS) across the RAN network.
External device traffic management to protect base station traffic bandwidth

Evolution path to multiple types of Ethernet transport networks
Support for service-specific networks
Ethernet Backhaul can be implemented on the following service-specific networks:
3G1X CDMA
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS
Standalone 9271 EV-DO RAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-16

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Access Transport Network (EATN)
The network supporting Ethernet Backhaul is logically divided between service provider
premise equipment and an interconnected WAN network referred to as the Ethernet
Access Transport Network (EATN). The EATN may carry IP traffic for hundreds of
miles. Since this is beyond the capability of standard Ethernet, other types of transport
may be relied upon such as Ethernet over SONET.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-17

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EBH basic configuration
Ethernet Backhaul is available in several configurations. One basic transport

configuration is shown here. In this graphic Ethernet Backhaul is shown in the top half of
the diagram, and IP Backhaul is shown in the bottom half of the diagram. The
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network supports both.
Figure 19-3 Ethernet Backhaul basic transport configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-18

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Architecture assumptions
The following assumptions are made regarding EBH architecture:
VLAN tagging is used to separate 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO traffic at the base
station.
Auxiliary traffic (for example, from a laptop, camera, or alarm) shares the Ethernet
connection on a separate VLAN.
VLAN tagging is used to separate 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO traffic at the MLS.
The MLS supports Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) to improve network
availability if a user network interface (UNI) or MLS fails.
The DHCP relay distributes the IP address to the base stations from the DHCP server.
The DHCP relay function must be provided by the EATN/MLS.
The primary attributes of the EBH architecture are:
Provisioned data determines which Packet Switching Unit (PSU) will serve the traffic
from a given base station. Carrier geographic clustering is supported for voice or
combined voice and data traffic carried by the 9281 Packet Switch (PS).
Base stations can be provisioned so voice is served on a PSU (or PSUs) while packet
data is served on a 9271 EV-DO RNC. This enables packet data to be truly off-loaded
from PSUs and the inter-PSU soft handoff network. Note that carrier geographic
clustering is not supported for data off-load traffic on the RNC.
Ethernet Backhaul is supported on all base stations with Universal Radio Controllers
(URCm, URC and URC-II). Ethernet Backhaul is not supported on base stations with
Circuit Radio Controllers (CRC).
Ethernet Backhaul is only available for IP-based base stations.
The physical interface at the base station supports 100 Base-TX Ethernet port. Manual
configuration is required per port for duplex setting and speed settings.
Both manual configuration and automatic negotiation are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-19

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Ethernet Backhaul uses similar hardware to the Frame Relay Backhaul network. This
topic talks about changes that need to be made to a Frame Relay Backhaul network to
make the network into an Ethernet Backhaul network.
Hardware changes at the base station
Ethernet Backhaul requires a new Ethernet IOU module: EIOU for macrocell, EHIOU for
compact. This IOU module brings the 100 Mb Ethernet link from each controller to the
faceplate. In addition, indoor and outdoor cabinets require a connector kit to bring the
links from the IOU to the exterior of the cabinet.
New hardware in the 9281 Packet Switch
In the 9281 Packet Switch, Ethernet Backhaul requires additional Packet Handlers for
Ethernet (PHEs) to handle the increased capacity. For more on this, see Support for
Ethernet Backhaul (p. 6-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-20

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optional feature
Ethernet Backhaul is an optional feature and is FAF-able. This means that you must
purchase Ethernet Backhaul and then have the appropriate setting made in the FAF file to
be able to use Ethernet Backhaul in your network.
No new 9281 Packet Switch software
No new 9281 Packet Switch software is required for Ethernet Backhaul.

New software
Ethernet Backhaul requires no new software in addition to what was needed for IP
Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-21

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Physical connections for Ethernet Backhaul
Fiber upgrades may need to be made in certain parts of the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-22

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User interfaces
Backhaul networks can be made up of equipment provided by several vendors:
For equipment produced by Alcatel-Lucent, user interfaces include the 9253

OMC-RAN, the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact, 9256 OMP, Status Display Pages
(SDPs), and technician interface (TI) commands.
For user interfaces for equipment provided by other vendors, consult the customer
documentation from the other vendor.
For OA&M information for Ethernet Backhaul
For more information about OA&M for Ethernet Backhaul, see the chapter called
OA&M for Ethernet Backhaul in CDMA Backhaul Networks, 401-710-090.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-23

Ethernet Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Documentation on Ethernet Backhaul
For more information on Ethernet Backhaul, see the CDMA Backhaul Networks,
401-710-090. See especially the EBH documentation roadmap.
Training on Ethernet Backhaul
For training on Ethernet Backhaul, see:
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) for CDMA Voice (3G1X) and Packet , CL5596W
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Conversion , CL5597W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
19-24
Appendix A: Quick reference

guide to connections between
network elements
Table
The following table lists the physical layer connections and protocol layer used between
each network element in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. Note that in
this table the generic term OMC-RAN is used to mean either the 9253 OMC-RAN or
the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact.
Table A-1

Network
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
Base station connections

1xEV-DO base
station
9271 EV-DO RNC

via the T1/E1
Concentrator
T1/E1
TDM (bearer and

control)
1xEV-DO base
station
9271 EV-DO RNC

via the router or MLS
Ethernet
IP (bearer and control)
9271 EV-DO RNC connections

9271 EV-DO RNC
PDSN via an Ethernet

switch
Ethernet
A10, A11
9271 EV-DO RNC
9256 OMP via the

Operations Network
Ethernet
Ethernet, Telnet, SSH
9271 EV-DO RNC
1xEV-DO base
station via the
Ethernet switch
Ethernet
Bearer and control
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
A-1
Quick reference guide to connections between network

elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1

Network (continued)
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
9271 EV-DO RNC
OMC-RAN via the

Operations Network
Ethernet
Ethernet, SSH and

CORBA through IPSec
9271 EV-DO RNC
9271 EV-DO RNC
Ethernet
A13 and proprietary

signalling through
IPSec
9271 EV-DO RNC
AAA server
Ethernet
A12
9271 EV-DO RNC,

9256 OMP, Access
Manager via the
Operations Network
Ethernet
CORBA, SNMP, SSH
9256 OMP
OMC-RAN and 9271

EV-DO RNC via the
Operations Network
Ethernet
OA&M
9256 OMP
Access Manager
Ethernet
OA&M
9256 OMP
9290 MM-Based
Access Manager
(3B21D processor)
DCI
OA&M
9256 OMP
Alcatel-Lucent 9281
Packet Switch (PS),
formerly called 5ESS
Switch, via the
terminal server
(MRV)
Ethernet
OA&M
T1/E1
bearer and control
OMC-RAN connections
OMC-RAN
9256 OMP connections
3G1X CDMA Base Station connections

3G1X CDMA Base
Station
9281 Packet Switch

and 9290 Mobility
Manager via the
T1/E1 Concentrator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
A-2

elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1

Network (continued)
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
3G1X CDMA Base

Station
9281 PS and 9290

Mobility Manager via
the MLS
Ethernet
bearer and control
9281 Packet Switch connections

9281 Packet Switch

T1/E1 Concentrator
Frame Relay packet

pipes
bearer
9281 Packet Switch

MLS
Ethernet
bearer
9281 Packet Switch
Access Manager
SS7
control
9281 Packet Switch
9256 OMP via the

MRV
RS-232
OA&M
9281 Packet Switch
9256 OMP
Ethernet
OA&M
9281 Packet Switch
PSTN
TDM, SS7
bearer, control
9281 Packet Switch
PDSN
Ethernet
A10/A11
9281 Packet Switch
Other MSCs via the

Packet Core Network
Ethernet
SIP and RTP
OMP via the service

provider's IP Network
Ethernet
OA&M
9980 PAEC connections

9980 PAEC
Access Manager connections

Access Manager
3G1X CDMA Base

Station via T1/E1
Concentrator
DS0
control and OA&M
Access Manager
3G1X CDMA Base

Station via MLS
Ethernet
control and OA&M
Access Manager
9256 OMP
Ethernet
OA&M
Access Manager
(3B21D processor).
NOTE: This
connection is ONLY
available for the 9290
MM-Based Access
Manager.
9256 OMP
DCI
OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
A-3

elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1

Network (continued)
Between this
network element
and this network

element
the Layer 1
Physical layer is
...
and the Protocol

Layer is ...
Access Manager
9281 Packet Switch
SS7
control
Access Manager
S-HLR, Access
Manager, other
vendor's MSCs and
other services such as
9259 OTAF
SS7
control
Access Manager
OMC-RAN via the

Operations Network
Ethernet
OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
A-4
Appendix B: History of revisions
Revisions to this document

Introduction
Listed here are the revisions to this document that were made in previous releases. For
revisions that were made in the current release, see Reason for reissue for Issue 5
(p. xxii).
Revisions in CDMA Release 31.0 and 30.0
Issue 3 of this document was released in CDMA Release 31.0.

Issue 2 of this document was released in CDMA Release 30.0.
Since these CDMA releases are no longer supported, the information about what changed
for those releases was removed from this document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
B-1
History of revisions
Revisions to this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
B-2
Appendix C: Quick reference

guide to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA
and 1xEV-DO base stations
Purpose
This topic contains a list of the individual Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations that are
currently available and summarizes the capabilities of each base station.
Support for both CDMA air interfaces
3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO are both CDMA air interfaces and are both used in the
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. However, 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO, although they
both are CDMA air interfaces, use different carriers over the air interface. All of the base
stations described in this chapter can support either 3G1X CDMA or 1xEV-DO, or both at
the same time.
Note that if a base station is configured to support 1xEV-DO, the base station must have
access to a 1xEV-DO Radio Access Network (RAN).
Important! Carrier counts may differ for different frequencies and also may differ
with changes in output power. For more detailed information on a base station contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
Table
The following table lists and describes all currently available Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base
stations. Note that EV-DO sector/carrier information is not currently given in this table.
Table C-1
Base station
number and
name
Frequencies supported
Number of sectors
and carriers
supported
MACROCELL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
C-1
Quick reference guide to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA and 1xEV-DO

base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table C-1
(continued)
Base station
number and
name
Number of sectors
and carriers
supported
9228 Base Station

Macro
full spectrum coverage
INDOOR: Up to eight
carriers/three sectors per
frame.
The 9228 Base Station Macro is available

in a 450 MHz dual band ready
configuration, which means that another
new band (2100) can be added in the same
cabinet in the future.
OUTDOOR: Up to
eleven carriers/three
sectors per frame.
Note that the 9228 Base Station Macro does

not support 2100 MHz at present.
The 9228 Base Station Macro has an
outdoor and an indoor version.
9218 Base Station
Macro
850/1900MHz (ready)
9218 Base Station

Macro HD
850MHz
up to 3 sectors, 6 carriers
300-2100MHz (capable)
up to 3-sectors, 6-carriers
COMPACT CELL
9226 Base Station
Compact
450 MHz
850 MHz
1900 MHz (also known as Personal
Communications Service [PCS])
2100 MHz 700 MHz (public safety band,
outdoor models only)
G-Band, which is the is top 5 MHz of the
PCS band
9216 Base Station

Compact
850/1900MHz (ready)
up to 3-sector 4-carriers
9216 Base Station

Compact LX
850/1900MHz
Up to 3-sector 3-carriers
9216 Base Station

Compact Remotable
850MHz
Up to 2-sector 3-carriers
850 MHz
1 - 3 sectors
300-2100MHz (capable)
SUB-COMPACT CELL
9224 Base Station
Sub-Compact
1 - 4 carriers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
C-2

base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table C-1
(continued)
Base station
number and
name
Number of sectors
and carriers
supported
9224 Base Station

Sub-Compact EN
1900 MHz
1 - 3 sectors
1700/2100 MHz (AWS Spectrum)
1 - 4 carriers
9224 Base Station

Sub-Compact with
Auxiliary Shelf
850 MHz
1-3 sectors
1-7 carriers
MICROCELL
9222 Base Station
Micro
800 MHz
1 - 2 sectors
850 MHz
1 - 7 carriers
1900 MHz
PCS
2100 MHz
1700/2100 AWS MHz
OTHERS
9228 Base Station
Macro LP
850 MHz
1900 MHz
AWS (1700/2100 MHz)
9228 Base Station

Macro HD
One to eleven carriers,

and/or one to six sectors
in single frequency
operation, in one cabinet.
In a dual band
configuration, 850/PCS
supports up to 19 total
carriers.
850 MHz
1-3 sectors
1900 MHz
1 to 8 carriers at 850
MHz
1 to 7 carriers at 1900
MHz
REMOTE RADIO HEADS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
C-3

base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table C-1
(continued)
Base station
number and
name
Number of sectors
and carriers
supported
Remote Radio
Heads (RRH)
800 MHz (future)
1 sector per RRH
850 MHz
number of carriers
variable
2100 MHz (future)

1700/2100 AWS MHz
PCS
For more about base stations
For more about Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations, see Chapter 7, Base stations.
For more about a particular base station
For more information about any particular base station, consult your Alcatel-Lucent
Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
C-4
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
1X packet data
Use of the Packet Control Function (PCF) on the Protocol Handler ETHERNET model 2 (PHE2)
feature in the 9281 Packet Switch to send and receive 3G1X CDMA packet data.
1xEV-DO
Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data Only, abbreviated as EV-DO or EV-DO or EV.

1xEV-DO is a telecommunications standard for the wireless transmission of data through radio
signals that is typically used for broadband Internet access. 1xEV-DO is classified as a broadband
technology because it utilizes a broad band of radio frequencies. 1xEV-DO employs multiplexing
techniques such as Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) as well as Frequency Division
Duplex (FDD) to maximize the amount of data transmitted. The 1xEV-DO standard was created
by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2).
1xEV-DO air interface
An evolution to CDMA2000 3G1X protocol, optimized for packet data service, that uses 1.25
Mhz carrier and can share spectrum with IS-95/CDMA2000 applications.
1xEV-DO AP
The 1xEV-DO Application Processor. The 1xEV-DO AP is the AP drawer within a 1xEV-DO
Frame (DO-APF). The DO-AP is comprised of one pair of Sun Netra 240 4x0S servers, two
Traffic Processors (TPs) running VxWorks, one alarm card, and one local boot disk.
1xEV-DO APF
The 1xEV-DO Application Processor Frame. The 1xEV-DO APF is comprised of one Modular
Filter and Fusing Unit (MFFU) shelf, one Reliable Clustered Computing (RCC) shelf, at least one
pair of Sun Netra 240 4x0S servers (DO-APs), and two Ethernet Switches.
1xEV-DO Backhaul
A form of IP Backhaul that is used only by 1xEV-DO network elements.

1xEV-DO Backhaul Network
Backhaul network that uses a form of IP Backhaul and is made up only of 1xEV-DO network
elements
1xEV-DO Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is currently operating using the 1xEV-DO air interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-1
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1xEV-DO Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)
A scaled-back version of the Access Manager that provides configuration and fault management
for the cell equipment. The BSOC fills the role of the Access Manager, excluding CDMA call
processing, and eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet Switch.
1xEV-DO EVM
The 1xEV-DO Modem. The EVM is comprised of one Transmit (EVTx) board and one Receive
(EVRx) board.
1xEV-DO MS
The 1xEV-DO Mobility Server (MS), formerly called the Flexent Mobility Server (FMS). The
1xEV-DO MS provides the call control, Radio Link Protocol (RLP), and Packet Control Function
(PCF) for the 1xEV-DO system.
1xEV-DO Packet Data Network
The 1xEV-DO packet data network is a data-only packet data access network that uses the
1xEV-DO air interface to send information over an IP-based network.
1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC)
See 9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC).

1xEV-DO RAN
The 1xEV-DO Radio Access Network, which is comprised of the 1xEV-DO Base Station and the
1xEV-DO Mobility Server (MS).
1xEV-DO Rel. 0
The first 1xEV-DO standard, developed by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2)
standards body.
1xEV-DO Rev. A
The first revision to the first 1xEV-DO standard. 1xEV-DO Rev. A offers fast packet
establishment on both the forward and reverse links along with other air interface enhancements.
1xEV-DO Rev. A is fully backward compatible with Rel. 0 in the sense that Rel. 0 mobile units
can operate on Rev. A capable carriers and Rev. A mobile units can also operate on the Rel. 0-only
carriers.
3B21D
A fully duplexed, fault-tolerant computer with a maximum growth potential of 256 MB of

physical memory. The 3B21D serves as the main hardware component for the Executive Cellular
Processor complex (ECPC), and contains the Input-Output Processor (IOP), the Central Processor
Unit (CPU), the memory stores, and the Disk File Controller. The 3B21D is also used as the
Administrative Processor in the 9281 Packet Switch.
3G1X
Third Generation 1.25 MHZ carrier CDMA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-2
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
Alcatel-Lucent enriched CDMA wireless network that offers a variety of wireless services,
including packet voice and packet data services.
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is using the 3G1X CDMA air interface.
A network that provides wireless network switching for data calls, and a wireless data interface
into the PDSN.
3G1X (Frame Relay) Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is using the 3G1X CDMA air interface and supports Frame Relay
Backhaul.
3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2)
Standardization group for CDMA2000.

5E ground plane
See Isolated ground plane.

5ESSSwitch
See 9281 Packet Switch.

850 CDMA
CDMA technology in the cellular frequency band (824-894 MHz).

9253 Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN)
A comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)-based Operations, Administration and

Maintenance (OA&M) platform that provides enhanced, state-of-the-art OA&M capabilities for
the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network.
9254 Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN) Compact
A scaled-back version of the 9253 OMC-RAN that can be co-located with the 9256 OMP in a
9254 OMC Compact Cabinet.
A required OA&M component that serves as a user interface and bacl-end OA&M processing
platform for Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also hosts special tools
such as Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits and software updates,
The 9259 OTAF system and its related network elements comprise the equipment that enables
3G1X CDMA phones to be provisioned while in the end-users possession, with little or no user
intervention.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-3
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A packet data access network using the 1xEV-DO air interface that can connect to an IP-based
network. The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 EV-DO RAS targets the increased market demand for wireless
data and internet applications.
9271 EV-DO Radio Network Controller (9271 EV-DO RNC)
A network element that controls the 1xEV-DO system and interfaces to the 1xEV-DO base
stations and PDSN.
9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc)
Reduced-footprint version of the 9281 Packet Switch.

9281 Packet Switch (PS)
The network element that provides wireless network switching for voice and data calls to and
from the wireless subscriber. The 9281 Packet Switch also provides a wireless interface into the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The Alcatel-Lucent 9281 Packet Switch was
formerly called the 5ESS Switch.
The Access Manager that contains the 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster
Complex (9290 MM-APCC) and the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC).
9290 MMC
See 9290 Mobility Manager Compact (9290 MMC).

9290 MMC-AP
A second-generation application processor that hosts 9290 MM application software for the 9290
MMC-Based Access Manager.
A reduced-footprint Access Manager that eliminates the ECP hardware and the CNI/IMS Ring
hardware by replacing them with software running on an MMC-APCC, and by replacing the 9290
MM-APCC with a 9290 MMC-APCC. The 9290 MMC thus provides full Access Manager
functionality with footprint reduction over the 9290 MM-Based Access Manager.
9290 Mobility Manager (9290 MM)
A general term that refers to a common commercial computer system that provides generic
computing facilities to host a wide range of wireless applications capable of running on a
time-share Solaris operating system.
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (9290 MM-APC)
The set of all 9290 MM-APs that reside in a 9290 MM-APF.

9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex (9290 MM-APCC)
A set of 9290 MM-APs and the software applications that run on them. The 9290 MM-APCC can
take over call control and signalling as well as maintenance functions that were previously
performed by the ECP and the nodes on the CNI/IMS ring. This network element was formerly
called the Flexent Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex (MM-APCC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-4
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (9290 MM-APF)
The cabinet that houses the 9290 MM-AP servers and several other hardware components in an
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA wireless network. This network element was formerly called the Flexent
Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (MM-APF).
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Release 1 (9290 MM-AP)
A second-generation application processor that hosts 9290 Mobility Manager application

software. An application processor is a general purpose commercial processor that can host a wide
range of applications in a wireless network. An application processor provides an integrated
high-availability hardware and software platform that offers reliability, availability and
maintainability for its subtending network elements. This network element was formerly called
the Flexent Mobility Manager Application Processor Release 1 (MM-AP).
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Release 2 (9290 MM-AP)
Application processor used by the 9290 Mobility Manager that supports the ability of each
MM-AP drawer to support two types of CPUs, host and satellite. This network element was
formerly called the Flexent Mobility Manager Application Processor Release 2 (MM-AP).
9290 Mobility Manager Compact (9290 MMC)
The collection of hardware and software that provides full Access Manager functionality for the
reduced-footprint 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager. The hardware portion of the 9290 MMC is
based on a server known as the 9290 Mobility Manager Compact Application Processor (9290
MMC-AP).
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Application Processor (9290 MMC-AP)
A second-generation application processor that hosts 9290 MM application software for the 9290
MMC-Based Access Manager.
9290 Mobility Manager Compact Application Processor Frame (9290 MMC-APF)
The frame that houses the MMC-APs.

9980 AINP
The 9980 Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture (ATCA) 9980 Application Intelligent
Network Platform (AINP), which is a highly flexible platform with a control plane cluster that can
be easily extended with feature server CEs to host new control plane functions. This platform
hosts the 9980 PAEC application.
9980 Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation (9980 PAEC)
An application that suppresses acoustic echo in the encoded voice packet domain without
requiring the use of coders. The 9980 PAEC application has been created to work with 3G1X
CDMA networks that support Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO) or Remote Transcoder Operation
(RTO). The 9980 PAEC application runs on the 9980 PAEC hardware platform.
9980 PAEC
See 9980 Packet Acoustic Echo Cancellation (9980 PAEC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-5
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A10/A11
IS-2000 standard for the control (A11) and bearer (A10) interfaces between the PCF and the
PDSN.
A8/A9
IS-2000 standard for the control (A9) and bearer (A8) interfaces between the Radio Link Protocol
(RLP) and the PCF.
AAA Server
Abbreviation for Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server. See Authentication,

Authorization and Accounting Server.
Access Manager
A network element that controls the operation of a wireless system and is responsible for mobility
management, call processing, system maintenance, technician interfaces, and system integrity.
See also 9290 MM-Based Access Manager and 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager.
Access Network
Network that connects access technologies (such as a Radio Access Network) to the core network.
Access Terminal
Originally, the data terminal used for sending packet data calls over the air interface. Now, the
term also includes equipment for sending and receiving voice calls, and has come to have the
same meaning as Mobile Unit. See Mobile Unit.
acoustic echo
An echo of the speaker's voice that the speaker hears through the speaker's handset.
Activation Code
A user-entered combination of a specified Feature Code (*FC) and defined group of at least two
dialed digits (System Selection Code) that specify the user selection of a Band and a Block
operated by the selected service provider.
Advanced Mezzanine Card (AMC)
AMCs are printed circuit boards (PCBs) that follow a specification of the PCI Industrial
Computers Manufacturers Group (PICMG). Known as AdvancedMC, the official specification
designation is AMC.x. AdvancedMC is targeted to requirements for the next generation of "carrier
grade" communications equipment. This series of specifications are designed to work on any
carrier card (primarily AdvancedTCA) but also to plug into a backplane directly as defined by
MicroTCA specification.
AdvancedTCA, Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA)
Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture, also known as AdvancedTCA or ATCA, is a scalable

architecture capable of supporting high capacity, high availability, dense, telecom systems with
thermal capacity to utilize current higher power devices. ATCA is an open industry specification
for building high-performance communications systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-6
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A network element that performs route aggregation, also known as supernetting. Supernetting
forms a network from a combination of two or more networks (or subnets) with a common
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) prefix. The new prefix for the combined network
aggregates the prefixes of the constituent networks.
alarm card
The part of the server components that is responsible for the health and monitoring of the cards
within the drawer.
AMA
See Automatic Message Accounting.

ANSI-41
A standard for identifying and authenticating users, and routing calls on mobile phone networks.
The standard also defines how users are identified and calls are routed when roaming across
different networks. ANSI stands for American National Standards Institute.
ANSI-41 Network
Public network that operates according the ANSI-41 standard.

AP
Abbreviation for Application Processor.

Application Processor (AP)
A general purpose commercial processor that can host a wide range of applications in a wireless
network. An application processor provides an integrated high-availability hardware and software
platform that offers reliability, availability and maintainability for its subtending network
elements.
apxrcv
The traditional application program that creates the RC/V forms interface and RC/V text interface
to the RC/V databases.
AR
See Aggregation Router (AR).

ATCA
See AdvancedTCA, Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA).

Authentication
The process that validates users and authorized service levels.

Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server
A server with functionality for mobile node authentication, authorization and accounting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-7
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic Message Accounting (AMA)
Subsystem responsible for collecting information about a call and formatting it into records from
which subscriber billing statements can be generated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backhaul Network
In telecommunications, backhauling is concerned with transporting traffic between distributed

sites and more centralized points of presence. In this document, the term backhaul network is
used to refer to the transport network used to connect the base stations to the MSC and/or 9271
EV-DO RNC.
Bandwidth
A range within a band of wavelengths, frequencies, or energies. Especially, a range of radio

frequencies occupying a modulated carrier wave, which is assigned to a service, or over which a
device can operate.
base station
A transmission and reception station in a fixed location that is used to handle cellular traffic and
consists of one or more receive/transmit antennas, microwave dishes, and electronic circuitry. The
base station serves as a bridge between all mobile users in a cell and connects mobile units to the
Mobile Switching Center.
For smaller base stations, the term base station includes the prefabricated container that the base
station is in. For larger base stations that are housed in buildings, the term cell site is used to
describe the building, the antennas and related equipment at the top of the tower, plus the base
station.
Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC)
A scaled-back version of the Access Manager that provides configuration and fault management
for the cell equipment. The BSOC uses the same hardware and software as is in the Access
Manager, excluding CDMA call processing, and eliminates the need for the 9281 Packet Switch.
The BSOC is used only in the Standalone version of the 9271 EV-DO RAS.
Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
See base station.

basic network features
Features that are considered central to the product. These Basic Network Features provide basic
call connectivity, as well as the ability to support a portfolio of revenue generating types of
services for both voice and data. Basic Network features are included in the Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA and 1xEV-DO Network and are delivered to the service provider at no additional cost. See
optional features.
BSOC
See Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC).

bundle
A collection of software packages that are combined into a self-extracting file.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-8
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA)
The total number of originating and terminating call attempts handled by the system in a typical
one hour period. Note that this is a count of all call attempts, not just completed calls.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Call Content Delivery Unit (CCDU)
Software that provides a switching matrix that connects the 1357 Lawful Interception Delivery
Unit for Circuit Switch (1357 LIDU CS) to the Alcatel-Lucent Access Manager.
Call Data Delivery Unit (CDDU)
Software that provides the TSP Administration functionality for the 1357 Lawful Interception
Delivery Unit for Circuit Switch (1357 LIDU CS).
call flow
A detailed description of how a call progresses through a network, from the origination of the call
to the call completion.
call processing (CP)
An action that a switch or other device performs to direct calls to various points in the network.
carrier
A single frequency wave that, when transmitted, is modulated by another wave containing
information. A carrier can be modulated by manipulating its amplitude and/or frequency in direct
relation to one or more applied signals.
CBR (CDMA Baseband Radio)
Network element that receives the digitally combined baseband forward signal from the CCU-20s
and converts it to a low power level, modulated RF signal.
CCU (CDMA Channel Unit)
Network element that provides the channel coding and decoding functions for CDMA.
CDM (CDMA digital module)
The 1xEV-DO carrier(s) and CDMA carrier(s) require a set of plug-in boards that occupy two
levels in the base station backplane. The space allocated for the boards for one carrier is called the
CDMA Digital Module, or CDM. The functions of the CDMA Digital Module (CDM) are as
follows: communicate with the MSC via T1 or E1 data links, convert the MSC formatted
information on the downlink, and provide other cell site control functions.
CDMA
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a digital wireless air interface and networking
standard based on the principle of spread-spectrum techniques, which allows multiple users to
access the system simultaneously on the same carrier frequency. CDMA uses sophisticated
encoding of digital signals to multiplex multiple channels on the same carrier. Information, either
voice or data, is encoded in packets that are spread over a wide frequency spectrum. This packet
approach allows more information to be transmitted per unit of bandwidth than with any other
technology. Also, the encoded information provides greater security than other air interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-9
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
standards. CDMA technology follows Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) standard

IS-95.
CDMA Base Station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that is currently operating using the 3G1X CDMA air interface.
CDMA Carrier
The 1.25 MHz block of spectrum used by CDMA. This same block is reused in every cell.
Additionally, the system/cell can support multiple carriers.
A next-generation soft switch that hosts all network signalling in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC).
CMS supports a variety of call models and connection control mechanisms to support current and
future service provider applications. In the MPC, the CMS fills the function of the Mobile
Switching Center evolved (MSCe). The CMS is made up of two components: the 9290 MMC and
the Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI).
CDMA Modem Unit (CMU)
See CMU.
CE (channel element)
Voice processing unit that converts between analog and digitally encoded voice signals.
cell
The geographical coverage area (usually an outdoor coverage area) that defines the complete
range of one or more radio transmitters/receivers acting as a single communications link for a
user. Cellular technology is based on the premise that a group of radio frequencies used within
one cell can be used again in distant cells.
cell site
Buildings and other infrastructure that contain the radio and associated control equipment that
links the wireless subscriber through radio communication into the MSC.
Cellular
A networking technology that breaks up geographical areas into clusters of small

honeycomb-shaped cells. The network consists of one low-powered output cell site per cell,
cellular handsets, and the MSC, which all exchange information to connect cellular subscribers.
Central Office
Physical building used by a service provider to house inside plant equipment including telephone
switches.
CFM (Common Fiber Optic Module)
The CFM provides the optical interface to/from each sector's Remote Unit. Used in the 9216 Base
Station Compact.
CFMA (Common Fiber Optic Module Adapter)
The Common Fiber Optical Module Adapter (CFMA) in the Remote Unit along with Common
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-10
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber Optical Module (CFM) in the Base Unit provides the interface between the Base Unit and
the Remote Unit via fiber optic. Used in the 9216 Base Station Compact.
CGSA (Cellular Geographic Service Area)
A basic coverage area served by a cellular system.

Channel
A portion of the cellular frequency band designated for a single cellular telephone conversation. It
is an actual cellular RF channel as identified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC),
30 kHz for analog and 1.25 MHz for CDMA.
Channel Element (CE)
See CE.
Channel Service Unit (CSU)
See CSU.
Network that conveys voice data.

circuit switching
A communications paradigm that sets up a constant bit rate and constant delay connection
between two nodes for their exclusive use for the duration of the communication. This contrasts
with the other principal paradigm, packet switching, in which packets (units of information
carriage) are routed between nodes over data links shared with other traffic. In each network node,
packets are queued or buffered, resulting in variable delay.
circuit voice network
A circuit-switching network that carries voice only traffic and carries it over a dedicated
connection that is set up for the life of the call and then disbanded.
CLI
A Command Line Interface (CLI) is a method of interacting with an operating system or software
using a command line interpreter.
CMS
See CDMA Mobility Server (CMS).

CMU (CDMA modem unit)
The CMU contains the channel elements that provide the signal spreading and de-spreading. In
the transmit path, the CE spreads the signal and passes it on to the UCR.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
See CDMA.
codec
A device or program that encodes a digital data stream or signal for transmission, storage or
encryption and decodes it for viewing or editing. Also referred to as coder.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-11
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common Fiber Optic Module (CFM)
See CFM.
Common Fiber Optic Module Adapter (CFMA)
See CFMA.
Common Network Interface (CNI)/Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS)
A token ring that links the 3B21D computer to other processors (also called nodes) in the
network. All messages going between the 3B21D and other processors in the system will travel on
the ring to get to their destination.
CPC (Common Power Converter)
Common power converter (CPCA and CPCB) that provides power to the digital shelf.
CRC (CDMA Radio Controller)
In the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station, the major functions performed by the CRC are as follows:
interface to two T1/E1 lines, transport voice data between CCUs and T1/E1 lines via the packet
bus, control cell hardware via the peripheral bus, perform cell-level call processing and OA&M
functions, and provide control function to CDMA Test Radio Module (CTRM).
CSN (Cell Site Node)
A communications node that provides an interface between the cell site and the CNI/IMS ring.
CSU (Channel Service Unit)
Provides two major functions: it serves as an interface between the network and the customer
premises equipment (CPE), and it provides an additional set of manufacturer-specific features.
CTRM (CDMA Test Radio Module)
The CTRM provides the ability to verify the RF paths and the functionality of the CDMA system
by placing calls through the 9218/9228 Base Station. The CTRM appears to the cell as another
customer mobile, and is under operation at times while the base station is active with other callers.
The CTRM utilizes a module, similar to a mobile, which is the test radio itself in establishing
CDMA loopback calls.
CTU (Common timing unit)
The CTU is the reference frequency and CDMA time-based unit that receives the timing signal
from the Global Positioning System (GPS) to maintain synchronization for the 9218 Base Station
Macro with the other Base Stations in the CDMA network.
The center of operations for processing new subscriber-customer service orders and changes to
service levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
data links
The term data links has two different meanings. For base stations connected with T1/E1 backhaul,
1 or 2 D0s are physically assigned to be the data links that communicated through the 9281
Packet Switch to the 9290 MM-AP (RCS). For both 3G1X CDMA and 1xEV-DO base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-12
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connected with IP or Ethernet Backhaul, the data link is the set of signalling messages sent to the
Access Manager that relate to the calls.
datacom room
Room at the service provider location where the data network equipment (Ethernet routers and
switches, firewalls, and so forth) is located.
Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
A specialized microprocessor for digital signal processing, generally in real-time computing.

DNFS host CPU
A special purpose host CPU that provides Dedicated Network File Service (DNFS). See also Host
CPU.
Domain Name Server (DNS)
A server that translates names of computers on the Internet into IP addresses.

drawer host CPU
A processor with a disk that provides system controller functions for the Compact Peripheral
Component Interconnect (cPCI) bus. See also Host CPU.
DS0 (Digital Signal, level 0)
The lowest level of signal in the digital hierarchy. A DS0 consists of a digital signal of 64 kbps.
A signal that consists of 24 DS0 channels. The DS0 channels are combined by time multiplexing.
A DS1 signal has a bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps. A T1 facility or span carries a DS1 signal.
For a T1 line, a 6.312-Mbps channel that consists of four DS1 channels; for an E1 line, an
8.45-Mbps channel that consists of four DS1 channels.
DS3 line
A 44.736-Mbps line consisting of seven DS2 channels. A DS3 line is also called a T3 line.
DSX (Digital Signal Cross-connect)
A network element that cross-connects channels within digital signals. During call setup, an
end-to-end connection is established by allocating a channel on each leg of the connection. The
DSX permits the channel to use a different carrier on each leg.
dualrail LAN
A fault-tolerant LAN that is duplexed. Every 9290 MM-AP has a connection to both LANs. The
dualrail LAN is used for inter-9290 MM AP communications and for connections between
frames in the 9290 MM-APCC. The 9256 OMP is also on the dual-rail LAN.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server
A server that assigns session IP addresses for users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-13
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E1
A four-wire voice and data trunking facility that carries 30 duplex channels in 64-kbps time slices.
E1 facilities are standard for digital telecommunications in all continents except for North
America. See T1.
E1 is the international standard for high-speed voice/data transmission, at 2.048 megabits per
second. Roughly equivalent to the T1 transmission standard in the United States.
EBH
See Ethernet Backhaul (EBH).

ECP
See Executive Cellular Processor (ECP).

ECPC
See Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC).

ECPless configuration
Term that refers to the process of migrating the functionality of the ECP and CNI/IMS ring to
9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (9290 MM-APs). This migration gives service
providers higher, scalable capacity and supports an increased number of base stations per MSC.
Formerly called ECP Migration or Ringless MSC.
EINE
See Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE).

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EMC is the branch of electrical sciences that studies the unintentional generation, propagation and
reception of electromagnetic energy with reference to the unwanted effects (Electromagnetic
interference, or EMI) that such energy may induce. The goal of EMC is the correct operation, in
the same electromagnetic environment, of different equipment that uses electromagnetic
phenomena, and the avoidance of any interference effects.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Intended to be unique, programmed into a mobile phone so that calls to and from the phone can
be identified and billed to the phone's owner.
Element Management System (EMS)
User interface located on the 9256 OMP that provides both graphical and command line interfaces
for management of selected network elements. No longer supported in Release 37.0 onward.
Enhanced Circuit Breaker Unit - Advanced Telecom (ECBU-AT)
The ECBU-AT is a Power Distribution Shelf. It is also included in the housing as an Alarm Board
assembly, which accepts ECBU-AT and cabinet hardware alarm signals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-14
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enhanced Variable Rate CODEC (EVRC)
A speech codec used for cellular telephony in cdma2000 systems. EVRC provides excellent
speech quality using variable rate coding with 3 possible rates, 8.55, 4.0 and 0.8 kbit/s.
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH)
A solution that allows CDMA applications to be transported using Internet Protocol over Ethernet
facilities. EBH is a native Ethernet solution that takes advantage of the Ethernet connectivity
within the MSC, introduced with IPBH, and extends it to the cell site and within the base stations.
Ethernet Backhaul Network
Backhaul network that uses Internet Protocol over Ethernet facilities.

Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE)
Network element that provides a point-to-point Ethernet connection between a 9290 MM-AP and
the ECPC Common Network Interface (CNI)/Interprocessor Message Switch (IMS) token ring.
The EINE processes CNI/IMS messages to and from the ECPC. Each 9290 MM-AP must be
directly connected to an EINE unless EINE pooling is deployed.
Ethernet Switch (ES)
A device with multiple Ethernet (LAN) connections, or ports, that transfers frames of data
between LAN segments.
EVM
The dual-board EVM consists of one EVM Transmit (EVT) board and one EVM Receive (EVR)
board.
Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)
The 3B21D computer that is the main processor for the ECPC.
Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)
The 3B21D computer and distributed processing nodes in the part of the 9290 MM-Based Access
Manager that traditionally control the operation of wireless systems and are responsible for
mobility management, call processing, system maintenance, technician interfaces, and system
integrity. See also ECP, CNI/IMS ring, and EINE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAF method
The traditional Alcatel-Lucent method of regulating the purchase of optional features.

Feature
Typically, an enhancement to existing software or hardware that adds new functionality to the
product. A feature can also be used to remove obsolete hardware or lay the groundwork for future
improvements.
Feature Activation File (FAF)
An encrypted file that contains status information for optional features purchased by
Alcatel-Lucent customers, and for additional capacity. The FAF is traditionally used to determine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-15
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
which optional features are activated or deactivated at a given installation, and how much, if any,
additional capacity has been authorized per feature for this MSC.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
US national regulatory agency for telephony, broadcast and cable television, and radio
communications.
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
FRUs are units that should be removed and replaced only by Alcatel-Lucent personnel, service
provider personnel with technical assistance from Alcatel-Lucent, or service-provider personnel
whom Alcatel-Lucent has trained to remove and replace the unit.
FIM (facilities interface module)
The FIM is responsible for providing secondary lightning protection and switching functionality
for the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station.
firewall
A piece of hardware and/or software that prevents unauthorized traffic moving from one network
to another network.
FIT (facilities interface tray)
The Facilities Interface Tray (FIT) houses the punch-down block for the incoming T1/E1 lines
and user alarms for the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station.
An older type of existing backhaul network that uses the LAPD protocol to support circuit voice,
TrFO/RTO, and 1X packet data services. Frame Relay backhaul cannot provide the flexibility that
IP backhaul provides.
FRPH (Frame Relay Packet Handler)
The FRPH provides the interface between the packet pipes and the packet switching platform. A
single FRPH can handle 64 CDMA calls when either 8 or 13 kbps vocoders are employed. A
single FRPH can terminate three packet pipes carrying up to 32 DS0s, but not more than a total of
64 calls.
FxApx
Stands for "FxApx System." An FxApx is a logical collection of Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Network
Elements operating on a single software generic and deployed within and around a Mobile
Switching Center (MSC). Often used as a synonym for MSC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic
All of the software that is common to all installations of the system for a particular release. A
generic is the same as a software release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-16
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic Retrofit
Application software change that completely replaces the software "generic" or "release." A
generic retrofit changes the release number of the generic. 9290 MM-AP platform generic retrofit
is done simultaneously with ECP generic retrofit and during this generic retrofit the entire system
is out of service.
GSM
Global System for Mobile communications (GSM: originally from Groupe Spcial Mobile) is the
most popular standard for mobile phones in the world.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
An HDD is a non-volatile, random access digital data storage device. It features rotating rigid
platters on a motor-driven spindle within a protective enclosure. Data is magnetically read from
and written to the platter by read/write heads that float on a film of air above the platters.
Hertz (Hz)
A measure of frequency that is the same as cycles per second.

Home Agent (HA)
Database that stores the subscriber's personal information and tells where the subscriber's calls
usually originate from. The Home Agent is required for Mobile IP. Packets to a user's terminal
access device are sent to the HA server that stores the user's foreign network location.
Home Location Register (HLR)
The central database of a mobile telephone network. The HLR stores the information required to
allow customer access and support service on a digital cellular network. An HLR may support one
or more cellular switches. The HLR contains details of each mobile phone subscriber who is
authorized to use the wireless network.
Host CPU
An enhanced version of the CPU in the R1 9290 MM-AP drawer. A host CPU can be either a
drawer host CPU or a DNFS host CPU.
HPDA (High Power Distribution Assembly)
A frame level DC distribution center called High Power Distribution Assembly (HPDA). The
HPDA receives DC input from the internal rectifiers or internal/external backup batteries.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS
See IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).

Integrated ground plane
A set of interconnected equipment (and frames and other hardware). The equipment in this
so-called "plane" can be intentionally or incidentally grounded by multiple connections to an
electrical ground reference. As opposed to Isolated ground plane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-17
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The traditional Alcatel-Lucent MSC. The I-MSC contains all of the control and switching
elements for the wireless network. The I-MSC also performs bearer and call control and OA&M
for the wireless network.
Network that handles communications between Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs) and Radio
Network Controllers (RNCs).
Interface
Connection and interaction between hardware, software, and the user. The interface between
components in a network is called a protocol.
International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI)
A method of identifying stations in the land mobile service as specified in ITU-T

Recommendation E.212. IMSI_M is a MIN-based IMSI that uses the lower 10 digits to store the
MIN. IMSI_O is the operational value of IMSI used by the mobile station for operation with the
base station. IMSI_T is an IMSI of 15 digits or less that is not MIN-based.
Internet
Worldwide internetwork consisting of large national backbone networks and regional and campus
networks.
Internet Protocol
IP is the principal communications protocol used for relaying datagrams (packets) across an
internetwork using the Internet Protocol Suite. Responsible for routing packets across network
boundaries, IP is the primary protocol that establishes the Internet. IP is defined in RFC 791.
Internet Protocol (IP) specifies the format of packets (or datagrams) and the addressing scheme
for sending information over the Internet or some other network.
IP
See Internet Protocol.

IP Backhaul
IP Backhaul refers to using Internet Protocol as a standardized network layer for transferring
signalling and bearer traffic between network elements, such as the Base Transceiver Station
(BTS), 9281 Packet Switch, Radio Network Controller (RNC) and ECPC, within the Radio
Access Network (RAN).
IP Backhaul Network
Backhaul network that uses Internet Protocol as a standardized network layer for transferring
signalling and bearer traffic between network elements. For low speed interfaces, such as T1/E1,
this transport efficiency results in a direct reduction of recurring operational expense for the
wireless service provider.
IP Core
Service Provider's core IP network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-18
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An architectural framework, designed by the 3GPP standards body, that is a platform for
delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based multimedia Internet-like services to end-users.
The IMS platform provides a common set of functions and procedures for session control, bearer
control, policy, and charging. When these functions and procedures are used by an application the
application is said to be IMS-enabled.
IP Network
Network that provides transport between the network elements and the Packet Data Network
(PDN).
IPBH
See IP Backhaul.
IPSec
A software encryption and authentication standard.

IS-95
A standards committee with joint representation from TIA subcommittee TR46.3.3 and the ATIS
subcommittee T1P1.4. The charter of the JTC is to develop U.S. standards for the air or radio
interface for PCS.
IS41
TIA Standard for Cellular Radiotelecommunications Intersystem Operations adopted October 8,

1987. Both X.25 and SS7 protocols are supported with the basic application of IS41 called Rel. 0.
Rev. A, Rev. B and Rev. C provide additional features. Now replaced with ANSI-41.
Isolated ground plane
A set of interconnected equipment (and frames and other hardware). This so-called "plane" of
equipment, taken as a single unit, is intentionally insulated from contact with any other grounded
surface in the building except by only one connection to an electrical ground reference. Also
called the 5E ground plane or MSC isolated ground plane. As opposed to Integrated ground plane.
ITU-Telecommunications Standards Sector (ITU-T)
Formerly Consultative Committee for International Telegraphy and Telephony (Comit

Consultatif International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique CCITT). The permanent committee of
the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) that recommends international standards for
telecommunications signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Land line subscriber equipment
Equipment on the service provider premises that allows the customer to access the wireless
network.
LIU (Line Interface Unit)
The LIU handles the low-level High Level Data link Control (HDLC) protocol processing of the
packet pipes and signalling links. The LIU is part of the CRC in the CDMA 9218/9228 Base
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-19
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Station.
LKDI software licensing method
License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI) is a tool that Alcatel-Lucent put on the Online
Customer Support web site to allow customers to manage license keys. The CDMA division of
Alcatel-Lucent is using the LKDI package to provide best in class software licensing for
Alcatel-Lucent optional features. Additional product families will be added to the current CDMA
product managed under LKDI in the future.
LMT
Abbreviation for Local Maintenance Terminal.

Local Area Network (LAN)
A LAN is a computer network that connects computers and devices in a limited geographical area.
The defining characteristics of LANs, in contrast to wide area networks (WANs), include their
usually higher data-transfer rates, smaller geographic area, and lack of a need for leased
telecommunication lines.
Terminal that connects to the Mobility Server (MS) processor via a local serial connection, or via
the Ethernet Switch for MS administration.
LPDA (Low Power Distribution Assembly)
Provides the fuse-protected power for the Courtesy Light and the HE fan in the outdoor
9218/9228 Base Station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master Control Center (MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station (TLWS)
User interface for the 9281 Packet Switch.

MCA (Multiple Carrier Amplifier)
The Multicarrier Amplifier Module (MCA) amplifies the RF signal for up to one sector/three
carriers by receiving the low-level outputs from one to three CBRs, combining in a low-power
combiner, splitting into equal power signals in a low-power splitter, and amplifying each signal to
the required power level in a separate ULAM.
MCC (Main Cluster Controller)
The MCC is located in the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station CRC and controls the devices that
hang off the MCC processor bus. Various functions provided by the MCC include: different
timers, dual serial controller, programmable interrupt controller, loss of clock detection, SDRAM
controller, Ethernet controller, 10Base-T transceiver, programmable user I/O port, and software
trap feature for monitoring bus access to specified memory region.
MCC/TLWS
See Master Control Center (MCC)/Trunk and Line Work Station (TLWS.
MCR (Multi-Carrier Radio)
The MCR is the Base Station multi-carrier transceiver. It is a 15 MHz bandwidth radio versus the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-20
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 MHz for the UCR. The radio is capable of processing up to 11 contiguous 1.25 MHz CDMA
carriers. Two versions of the MCR support the Cellular and PCS band classes. The Cellular MCR
transmits and receives up to 8 contiguous carriers spread over no more than 15 MHz total
bandwidth anywhere in the Cellular band. The PCS MCR transmits and receives up to 11
contiguous carriers spread over no more than 15 MHz total bandwidth anywhere in a block in the
PCS band. Unlike the UCR, the MCR supports internally all functionalities supported by the
TDU/ETDU. On the forward link, the MCR function is to combine the digital I and Q signals
from the CMU to RF in the transmit path and from RF to digital in the receive path.
Media Gateway (MGW)
A network element that provides a gateway between disparate networks such as Public Switched
Telephone Networks (PSTNs), Next Generation Networks (NGNs), and Public Branch eXchanges
(PBXs).
MGW
See Media Gateway (MGW).

Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network
A 9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network integrated with the 3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice
Network.
Mixed-mode base station
Alcatel-Lucent base station that supports both the 3G1X CDMA air interface and the 1xEV-DO
air interface.
MLS
See Multi-Layer Switch (MLS).

MM-Based Access Manager
See 9290 MM-Based Access Manager.

MMC-Based Access Manager
See 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager.

Mobile Directory Number
A dialable directory number that is not necessarily the same as the mobile stations air interface
identification, i.e., MIN, IMSI_M or IMSI_T.
Mobile Equipment IDentifiers (MEID)
A globally unique number for a physical piece of mobile station equipment. Equipment identifiers
are 'burned' into a device, and should be resistant to modification. An ESN type can be
distinguished as a pseudo ESN (pESN) based on the first 8 bits ('manufacturer' code) as derived
from the MEID using the SHA-1 algorithm to reduce a 56-bit MEID to a 24-bit ESN. The pESN
codes are not unique, but will not match any UIMID or true ESN (tESN) because they have a
unique manufacturer code of 0x80 (decimal 128).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-21
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mobile Identification Number (MIN)
Uniquely identifies a mobile unit within a wireless carrier's network. The MIN often (but not
always) can be dialed from other wireless or wireline networks. MIN1 is the 7 digit office code
and unit number while MIN2 is the area code.
An enhanced MSC. The MPC combines the rich feature set and reliability of the Integrated MSC
(I-MSC) with the introduction of the Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface (MM-SI) and the
PSG configuration and application option to the 9281 Packet Switch (PS).
Mobile Station
Another name for Mobile Unit.

The network element that contains all of the control and switching elements for the wireless
network. The MSC performs bearer, control and OA&M functions for the wireless network.
Mobile unit
Handheld (portable) units that contain a microprocessor and provide a standardized interface
between the user and the base station. When it is turned on (powered up) a mobile unit maintains
radio communication with the base stations, even when the mobile unit is not in use. Mobile units
are now often called Access Terminals (ATs) and in addition to a being a simple voice-only unit
could also be a laptop computer, a hand-held device such as a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA),
or a multi-mode mobile phone that supports several wireless air interfaces.
Mobility Server (MS)
Formerly called FMS. A general-purpose application processor platform used by numerous

Alcatel-Lucent wireless products. The MS platform is based on Sun hardware and the Solaris
operating system and provides a powerful, reliable, and flexible platform.
MPLS
See MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS).

MSCDBMS
Mobile Switching Center Data Base Management System, that houses the database infrastructure
processes that audit and access the database.
A hardware-based switch that acts as a router. An MLS combines layer 2, 3, and 4 switching
technologies and provides high-speed scalability with low latency. The MLS accomplishes this
combination of high-speed scalability with low latency by using huge filter tables based on the
criteria designed by the network administrator.
Multi-Link PPP Group (MLG)
Bundle of DS1s grouped into a single large pipe.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-22
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multiplexer (MUX)
A device that aggregates data traffic from many small capacity IP links to fewer high capacity IP
links.
MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS)
MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS) provides connection-oriented (label based) switching in

the same network where IP provides connectionless IP forwarding by providing a set procedures
for augmenting network layer packets with label stacks, thereby turning them into labeled
packets. The fundamental MPLS building blocks are: 1) the label-swapping based forwarding
(label switching) in conjunction with the network layer routing, 2) the assignment and the
distribution of label bindings for the establishment of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) using the
control-driven model, 3) the separation of the control and label-swapping based forwarding (label
switching) components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
National Mobile Station Identity (NMSI)
The 12 least significant digits of a mobiles International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI).
NCTE (Network Channel Terminating Equipment)
Equipment that terminates the DS1 line at the cell site. This may be the CSU in the Base Stations
9222 and 9222 Base Stations Micro Distributed, or, if the network provider requires one, a
separate piece of line termination, commonly referred to as a smart jack.
NE
See Network Element (NE).

Network
A collection of computers, terminals, and other devices and the hardware and software that enable
them to exchange data and share resources over short or long distances.
Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE)
See NCTE.
Network Element (NE)
A unique entity within the network. Each NE consists of multiple physical and logical resources,
which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The NE and the NEs physical
and logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an element or network management
system. An example network element would be a single base station.
Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)
A set of requirements for equipment installed in telecommunications company offices. These

requirements cover personnel safety, protection of property, and operational continuity. NEBS
testing involves subjecting equipment to shaking (for earthquakes), fire, and other environmental
insults. There are three levels of NEBS compliance, each a superset of the preceding. NEBS level
3, the highest level, certifies that a piece of equipment can be safely deployed in an extreme
environment. A telco Central Office is considered an extreme environment. The NEBS standards
are maintained by Telcordia Technologies, Inc., formerly called Bellcore.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-23
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Identification (NID)
A number that uniquely identifies a network within a wireless system. See also System
Identification.
Network Operations Center (NOC)
The work center that monitors the operations of a telecommunications network.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)
A mechanism that supports the distribution and synchronization of time within a network of
servers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA&M
See Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M).

OA&M Network
Private Internet Protocol Wide Area Network (IP-WAN) that links the service provider's Central
Offices (COs) together and is used by the service provider for OA&M of service provider
equipment.
OA&M Platform
Network elements that host management tools that typically provide Operations, Administration,
and Maintenance (OA&M) support for a single Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
OAM Proxy servers
A pair of a second-generation application processors that are used to host applications for the
RNC and applications for the OMC-RAN.
OMC
A generic OA&M platform developed by Alcatel-Lucent. See 9253 Operations and Maintenance
Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN).
OMC-RAN
See 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN) or 9254
OMC-RAN Compact.
OMC-RAN Solution
A network element that contains an OMC-RAN or OMC-RAN Compact and adds additional
software and hardware that integrates the OMC-RAN or OMC-RAN Compact into an existing
wireless network.
OMP
See 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP).

Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN)
See 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN) or 9254
OMC-RAN Compact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-24
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC) Radio Access Network (RAN) Solution
A network element that contains either a 9253 OMC-RAN or a 9254 OMC-RAN Compact and
adds additional software and hardware that integrates the 9253 OMC-RAN or 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact into an existing wireless network.
Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP)
See 9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP).

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
Generic name given to functions such as technical interfaces, diagnostics, service measurements,
and status reports. OA&M tasks include such areas as fault, configuration, accounting,
performance, and security management. These capabilities are often referred to as FCAPS (after
the first letter of each).
optional features
Features that provide enhanced services such as greater connectivity with other systems, increased
subscriber convenience, and additional protection against fraud. These features enable a service
provider to differentiate themselves in a competitive market. Optional features are sold separately
from the basic 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network. See basic network features.
ORCA
OMC-RAN CORBA Agent (ORCA). A process on the OMC-RAN that provides an

object-oriented interface to monitor and control an MSC, base stations and system-wide functions.
OTAPA Administration Center (OAC)
See OTAPA Control Center (OCC).

The OTAPA Control Center starts, stops and manages OTAPA jobs, initiates OTAPA reports, and
manages MRL and PRL files on the 9259 OTAF.
OTAPA Session
A set of messages and processing required to update the programmable information of a single
mobile station. A successful OTAPA session is started and stopped by the 9259 OTAF, at the
request of the service provider. An OTAPA session does not require a voice connection with the
mobile.
OTASP Session
A set of messages and processing required for the provisioning of a single mobile station. A
successful OTASP session is started and stopped by the CSC (via the 9259 OTAF) following an
OTASP call origination by the mobile user. OTASP session length roughly corresponds to, but
may not be longer than, the duration of the voice conversation between the mobile user and the
customer service representative.
Over-The-Air Parameter Administration (OTAPA)
Network-initiated OTASP process of provisioning mobile station operational parameters over the
air interface without any user initiation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-25
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Over-The-Air Service Provisioning (OTASP)
A process of provisioning mobile station operational parameters over the air interface, where the
user dials the OTA activation code and is routed to the CSC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packet
A network layer protocol unit that includes control information and may include a block of user
data. End-user messages are broken into such blocks for efficient transmission across packet
networks.
Packet Bus
A high speed (100 Mbps) serial bus used to carry traffic packets and control messages between
the MC/LIU and the CCU-16s. Uses IEEE 1394 (Firewire) protocol.
Packet Control Function (PCF)
Network element that maintains the connection between the mobile station and the Packet Data
Service Node (PDSN). The PDSN connects the mobile station to the WAN and provides for
routing of packet data traffic.
Packet Core Network
An IP network established and operated by a service provider to interconnect the MSCs and other
wireless systems. This network is used to interconnect MSCs for TrFO calls and for Soft Handoff
Networks.
Packet Data Network (PDN)
A network established and operated by a service provider for the specific purpose of providing
data transmission services for the public. This network is used to interconnect the MSC, PDSN,
and other data systems for packet data calls, such as 3G1X data and 1xEV-DO data.
The network element that acts as the connection point between the RAN and IP networks. The
PDSN is responsible for managing the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) session between the service
provider's core IP network and the mobile unit or Access Terminal (AT).
Packet Pipe (PP)
A special trunk used to send packet-sized voice and data between a given CDMA Cluster
Controller (CCC) at the cell site and the 9281 Packet Switch speech handlers at the switch.
Network that conveys packet data.

Packet switch
The network element that provides packet switching for a wireless network. The packet switch
provides switching for calls to and from the mobile unit or Access Terminal (AT). The packet
switch also provides a wireless interface into the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-26
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A configuration and application option to the 9281 Packet Switch (PS) that includes an H.248
interface to the MM-SI. The PSG is used in the Mobile Packet Core (MPC) Access Manager.
Packet switching
A communications paradigm in which packets (units of information carriage) are routed between
nodes over data links shared with other traffic. In each network node, packets are queued or
buffered, resulting in variable delay. This contrasts with the other principal paradigm, circuit
switching, that sets up a constant bit rate and constant delay connection between the two nodes for
their exclusive use for the duration of the communication.
Packet Trunk
An Ethernet connection used for sending an IP-based voice media stream between two MSCs or
between an MSC and the PSTN.
Packet trunking
Use of packet trunks.

PAM (Power Amplifier Module)
Amplifiers designed to work with EDPD.

PCF
See Packet Control Function (PCF).

PCF on the PHE2 feature
Feature that places the PCF functionality inside the and adds the ETHERNET-link component
(100 Mbps) to the Wireless overall network architecture.
PCI Industrial Computer Manufacturers Group (PICMG)
PICMG is a consortium of over 250 companies. The group, founded in 1994, was originally
formed to adapt PCI technology for use in high-performance telecommunications, military and
industrial computing applications but its work has now grown to include newer technologies.
PICMG currently focuses on developing and implementing specifications and guidelines for open
standards based computer architectures from a wide variety of interconnects.
PCU (Power Converter Unit)
The Power Converter Unit (PCU) converts supplied 24 VDC to DC at several voltage levels for
the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station.
PDA (Power Distribution Assembly)
The circuit breakers in the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station.

PDSN
See Packet Data Serving Node.

Peripheral Bus
A low speed (312 kbps) serial bus used to carry control messages between the LIU/MC and the
cell components. Intended primarily for communicating with non-CCU components (CBRs,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-27
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFDUs, and so forth).

Peripheral component Interconnect (PCI)
PCI is an industry specification for connecting hardware devices to a computer's central processor.
Both Ethernet and Wi-Fi network adapters for desktop and notebook computers commonly utilize
PCI.
Personal Communications Services (PCS)
Services for digital Radio Frequency (RF) equipment conveying both voice and data over wireless
networks.
PHV (Protocol Handler - Voice)
The PHV receives packets from the packet pipe (via the FRPHs) and converts the variable length
packets into PCM voice, then sends them via the TSI to the PSTN. The PHV can receive packets
from multiple cell sites during a Soft-handoff via separate FRPHs. In the reverse direction, PCM
voice received (from the TSI) at the PHV is converted into variable length packets.
Physical Switch
A physical Packet Switch. Opposite of Virtual Switch.

Protocol
A set of rules that govern interactions between two or more entities or network elements. These
rules govern syntax, semantics, and timing.
PSA (Pilot Sync Access)
Supervision channels sharing a channel element in the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station.
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
The network that provides public telephone service. In other words, the portion of the total
network that provides the capability to interconnect any home or office in the country with any
other.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QFAF method
The traditional Alcatel-Lucent method of regulating the purchase of additional capacity in a

network by using a qualifier in the FAF file.
Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF)
Refers to a qualifier in a FAF file. The qualifier governs whether additional capacity is authorized
for a particular feature at a MSC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-P
The A10 and All interfaces that carry the user data and the signalling data, respectively, between
the RAN and PDSN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-28
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-P Interface
See R-P.
R1 frame
Release 1 (R1) AP Packet Switch frame.

R1SR frame
A Release 1 AP Packet Switch frame that includes additional frame cabling to support additional
diskless or Satellite processors. The new frame has been dubbed the Release 1 Satellite-ready or
R1SR frame.
Radio Access Network (RAN)
The network that connects radio base stations to the core network. The RAN provides and
maintains radio-specific functions, which may be unique to a given radio access technology, that
allow users to access the core network.
Radio Channel
Actual cellular Radio Frequency (RF) channel as identified in the United States by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC). For analog, the channel is 30 kHz wide. In CDMA, the
radio channel is 1.25 MHz wide.
Radio Cluster Server (RCS)
A UNIX process running on an Application Processor that controls a 9218/9228 Base Station
(analogous to the RCC in a Series II cell).
Radio Frequency (RF)
A range of electromagnetic frequencies above sound and below visible light, generally in the 30
kHz to 300 GHz range, used for all broadcast transmission including AM and FM radio,
television, short-wave, microwave, and satellite transmissions.
Radio Network Controller (RNC)
A set of functional elements for transmission of data, consisting of frame selectors for radio bearer
services, traffic control function for Frame Selector resource allocation, and the OA&M manager.
Radio Spectrum
See Radio Frequency.

RAN
See Radio Access Network (RAN).

Range
In wireless communications, the distance that radio waves travel from a source (radio transmitter)
before becoming too weak for a radio receiver to identify them.
RCS (Radio Cluster Server)
Application that provides call processing and OA&M functionality for up to six Base Stations
9222 and 9222 Base Stations Micro Distributed or one Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218/9228 Base
Station.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-29
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Read-Only Printer
See ROP (Read-Only Printer).

Rear Transition Module (RTM)
A module that provides enhanced 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) backplane fabric connectivity.
Recent Change and Verify (RC/V)
Application that provides the user interface to the database management system. This interface
updates databases in the system.
Reliable Clustered Computing (RCC)
Provides the software and hardware components for increased reliability, availability, and
maintainability in an MS Frame.
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Server (RADIUS) - Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting (RADIUS-AAA) server
An IP network server that keeps track of the user's usage of the network.
Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT)
Personal computer (PC) hosting special RMT software. The RMT communicates directly to the
base station.
RF (Radio Frequency)
The electromagnetic wave used for, among other things, cellular voice and data communications.
RMP (Remote Maintenance Panel)
In the CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station , the Remote Maintenance Panel is an I/O panel that allows
the user to interface with the IS-95A and wideband backplane.
RMT
See Remote Maintenance Terminal.

RNC
See Radio Network Controller (RNC).

RNC AP
A second-generation application processor that hosts RNC software.

RNC frame
A set of functional elements for transmission of data, consisting of frame selectors for radio bearer
services, traffic control function for Frame Selector resource allocation, and the OA&M manager.
Roaming
A CDMA system consists of system IDs (SID) and network IDs (NID). A system typically has
many networks within it. A mobile must keep track of the SID/NID pair of the area it is in
(broadcast by the base stations). Each mobile has a list of home SIDs and NIDs. If it enters an
area that has a NID that is not on the list but the SID is, this is classified as NID roaming; If the
SID is not on the list, it is SID roaming.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-30
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ROP (Read-Only Printer)
A continuous listing of all system activities.

Router
A device that connects two or more networks and can direct traffic based on addresses.
RSP (RTU Switch Panel)
Device that provides routine diagnostics by exercising all channel elements and Radio Frequency
(RF) paths.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sector
The portion or pattern of the coverage area associated with a directional antenna or antenna face
at a cell site.
Secure Shell (SSH)
Feature that provides secure network services.

Server
A computer or specialized device that provides and manages access to shared network resources,
such as hard disks and printers.
Service-specific network
A set of network elements from the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network that have been gathered
together to provide a specific service.
Shelf Management Module (ShMM)
ShMM is a compact, low-cost ATCA shelf/board management solution that enables interoperable
management of open modular platforms using the Intelligent Platform Management Interface
(IPMI) standard.
Network that performs soft handoff (SHO) transport.

Short Message Service (SMS)
An alphanumeric message that can be sent to or sent by a mobile telephone handset. These
messages are delivered directly to the receiving handset and are read on the display of that
handset. The maximum allowed length of the message is dependent upon the network technology.
Signal Transfer Point (STP)
An SS7 term that refers to a point in an SS7 network responsible for routing messages.
Signaling link
Signaling path that provides a means to pass control messages from the mobile unit to the cell
sites, and then, to the ECP Complex (ECPC) via the CNI/IMS ring. These messages contain
control and data information necessary to complete a wireless call. The data links provide
connections between the cell sites, the , and the ECP Complex. Network elements use these data
links to pass control messages required to complete call processing tasks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-31
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signaling System 7 (SS7)
The SS7 is a signalling method, outside the voice or data channel, by which the Intelligent
Network (IN) and Mobile Switching Center (MSC) exchange information in a Personal
Communication System (PCS). The SS7 is responsible for supervisory functions, addressing, dial
and busy tone information, and various remote operations.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
A protocol defined in RFC 1157, used for communication between management consoles and
network devices.
Single Mode Fiber (SMF)
SMF is an optical fiber designed to carry only a single ray of light (mode).
SIP Session Monitor (SIPMON)
For the 9980 PAEC application, SIPMON is a CE process that manages SIP sessions. SIPMON
processes the SIP signalling packets forwarded by the line service cards, and dynamically
allocates and de-allocates AEC channels on the AEC SC.
Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP)
An SFP is a compact, hot-pluggable transceiver used for both telecommunication and data
communications applications. An SFP interfaces a network device mother board (for a switch,
router, media converter or similar device) to a fiber optic or copper networking cable.
Software Update (SU)
A Software Update (SU) is a revision/addition to a subset of the software. The Software Update
may include bug fixes, enhancements to existing capabilities, or totally new capabilities, that is,
features. A software update does not change the generic release number of the application
software. A 9290 MM-AP platform software update results in service outage only at the 9290
MM-AP being updated.
SONET
See Synchronous Optical NETwork (SONET).

Spectrum
The range of frequencies available for radio transmission and reception. The FCC has set aside
portions of the spectrum for cellular service, while other portions of the spectrum are allocated to
media such as television, FM radio, and satellite transmissions.
Electromagnetic spectrum includes all frequencies that travel in waves from 10 Hertz, just below
human audible range, to 1025 gigaHertz, cosmic ray range. Radio spectrum includes the region of
the spectrum between 3 kiloHertz and 300 gigaHertz in which radio or radar operations are used.
Spread Spectrum Technology
This technique sends a message as a series of computer codes. However, since the signal is
stretched out over a broad frequency band, the receiver needs to receive only a part of the
transmitted signal to reconstruct the original message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-32
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stand Alone Home Location Register (S-HLR)
A stand-alone network element that serves as the Home Location Register (HLR). Note that the
Home Location Register (HLR) can be integrated into the call control function instead of being a
separate network element.
A 1xEV-DO only network.

Status Display Pages (SDPs)
Menu pages that monitor and control network elements. The SDPs present a character-based,
color display of state information about the 9290 MM-Based Access Manager and the systems.
SDPs can be viewed by VT100 color terminals, or terminals supporting a color VT100 terminal
emulator.
Supernetting
Same as route aggregation Supernetting forms a network from a combination of two or more
networks (or subnets) with a common Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) prefix. The new
prefix for the combined network aggregates the prefixes of the constituent networks.
Switch
A network element that provides all the wireless network switching for calls to and from the
wireless subscriber, and also provides a wireless interface into the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN).
Switching
Technically, a switch is a mechanical, electrical, or electronic device that opens or closes a circuit,
completes or breaks an electrical path, or selects paths or circuits. In the context of
communications, switching sets up the path of a communications call from one location to
another.
A component of the that performs various roles, such as call processing, routing, termination, and
trunk management.
Synchronous Optical NETwork (SONET)
Standard for fiber optic transmission used in the North American region.
System Identification (SID)
A number uniquely identifying a wireless system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T1
A four-wire voice/data trunking facility that carries 24 duplex channels (DS0s) over 64 Kbps time
slices. T1 is typically used in the North American Region (NAR). See E1.
T1 is a term used in the United States for a digital carrier facility used to transmit at 1.544
megabits per second. The rough equivalent European standard is E1, transmitting at 2.048 Mbit/s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-33
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T1 span
A T1 span (DS1) contains twenty-four 56-kbps time slots capable of handling 24 standard TDM
voice trunks.
T1/E1 Concentrator
A piece of circuit-switched network equipment that allows lower-level Time Division Multiplex
(TDM) bit streams, such as DS0 bit streams, to be rearranged and interconnected among
higher-level TDM signals, such as DS1 bit streams.
TCP/IP
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

TDU
Test and Diagnostic Unit (TDUs). The first TDU performs pre-distortion measurement and the
second is used for Radio Frequency (RF) testing on a given sector. Available in the 9218 Base
Station Macro only.
Technician Interface (TI)
System that provides the interface, via input/output messages and real-time status display,
between the technician and the software/hardware elements of the system. See also TICLI.
Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)
The group responsible for setting telecommunications standards in the United States.
terminal server
Unit that enables remote access to the serial console ports of the processing elements in an RNC
cabinet.
TFU (Timing and Frequency Unit)
Frequency reference and CDMA time-base unit that synchronizes the 9218/9228 Base Station
with the other base stations in the CDMA network.
TICLI
Technician interface command line interface, a local CLI for an Alcatel-Lucent system, that is
accessible from many of the Alcatel-Lucent network elements.
Traffic Control Server
A function within the RNC that is the global resource manager that manages the requests for
bearer resources for the RNC.
traffic processor
The part of the 9271 EV-DO RNC that handles bearer processing.
Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP)
TCAP is a layer in the SS7 protocol stack. It is at the TCAP layer that messages are exchanged
between the 9259 OTAF and the MSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-34
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transceiver
A radio with both a transmitter and a receiver.

transcoder
A Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV) resource that is used to convert the Enhanced Variable Rate
CODEC (EVRC) voice stream to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) in order to suppress echo.
Transcoder Free Operation/Remote Transcoding Operation (TrFO/RTO)
An optional feature that is used as the basis of the TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking Network.
TrFO/RTO eliminates the use of a vocoder or transcode process on a mobile-to-mobile call.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
An open network standard that defines how devices from different manufacturers communicate
with each other over interconnected networks. TCP/IP protocols are the foundation of the Internet.
A network that uses the TrFO/RTO feature to provide packet trunking for the 3G1X CDMA
Circuit Voice Network. This network does not provide end to end packet data function, but it does
provide for a smoother transmission of information through the trunk part of the network and less
delay because vocoding is not used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UCR (UTRA CDMA Radio)
In the transmit path, the UCR receives the digitally combined baseband forward signal from the
CMU and converts it to a low power level modulated RF signal. The receive path is the opposite.
The UCR receives an RF signal and converts it to digital signals suitable for the channel elements.
UIP (ULAM Interface Panel)
The UIP acts as a buffer between the baseband radios' outputs and transmit amplifier inputs.
ULAM (Ultra-Liner Amplifier Module)
The Ultra-Linear Amplifier Module (ULAM) provides RF power amplification for up to three
simultaneous 1.25-MHz CDMA carriers within the PCS and Cellular ranges. The PCS ULAM can
provides 16 watts power, and 20 watts for Cellular. The ULAM is a linearized RF power amplifier
designed to provide bus alarm reporting, visual alarm status indicators, and RF over-drive
protection.
UMC (Universal Main Controller)
The UMC is a part of the URC that performs the call processing functions of a base station, which
include channel element resource allocation and call processing application processing. The UMC
also performs all OA&M processing, including circuit pack status monitoring and reporting to the
RNC.
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) is one of the third-generation (3G) cell
phone technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-35
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)
Frame used for a variety of Alcatel-Lucent applications. The UNC provides increased capacity
over the R1 and R1SR frames and reduces the frame footprint.
UNIX
Computer operating system developed at Bell Laboratories and used for the technician interface.
UNIX is not an acronym.
URC (Universal Radio Controller)
The URC controls the 9218 Base Station Macro and interfaces the T1 or E1 facilities to the 9218
Base Station Macro.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Virtual Cluster Virtual Machine
A Virtual Machine (VM) configured to failover, that is, to switch to its standby instance, or
mate, when it fails.
Virtual Private Network (VPN) Firewall
A device or software that provides secure IP tunnels through the Internet (VPN tunnels) and/or
policy-based security for the CDMA IP elements.
Virtual Switch
A pseudo-switch used in Virtual Systems Call Routing. Opposite of Physical Switch.

Visitor Location Register (VLR)
Database that holds information about users who are currently registered in a service area.
Information in the VLR is cleared and re-updated once a day.
vocoder
A speech analyzer and synthesizer developed as a speech coder for telecommunications

applications.
Voice Channel
A channel on which a voice conversation occurs and on which brief digital messages may be sent
from a base station to a mobile unit or from a mobile unit to a base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength
The physical distance between two adjacent peaks or valleys in a sinusoidal wave. This is
inversely related to frequency, that is, the shorter the wavelength, the higher the frequency.
Wideband
Digital communication between 1.5 Mbps and 45 Mbps.

WiMAX
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) is a telecommunications technology

aimed at providing wireless data over long distances in a variety of ways, from point-to-point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-36
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
links to full mobile cellular type access.

Wireless
A term that refers to a broad range of technologies that provide mobile communications for home
or office, and in-building wireless for extended mobility around the work area, campus, or
business complex. It is also used to mean cellular for in- or out-of-building mobility services.
With Wireless, these mobile communications are provided using radio technology instead of
telephone lines.
Wireless network
All the facilities that make wireless service possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-37
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
GL-38
Index
Numerics
1X data
options for providing, 8-1, 9-1
1X packet data
defined, 8-2
1xEV-DO
defined, 2-27, 9-4
how it works, 9-4
1xEV-DO air interface
defined, 9-4
1xEV-DO Backhaul
defined, 2-31, 19-3
1xEV-DO base station
defined, 2-7
1xEV-DO Base Station OA&M
Controller (BSOC)
defined, 2-7
1xEV-DO networks
requirement for OMC-RAN,
9-20
1xEV-DO Rel. 0
defined, 9-4
1xEV-DO Rev. A
defined, 9-4
1xEV-DO Rev. B
defined, 9-5
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network

backhaul networks, 2-31, 19-2
backhaul networks, diagram,
2-32, 2-32, 19-3, 19-3
backhaul networks, types of,
2-31, 19-2
connections, Physical Layer,
17-1, A-1
connections, Protocol Layer,
17-1, A-1
connections, quick reference
table, A-1
3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice

Network
defined, 2-18
diagram with I-MSC, 2-18
diagram with MPC, 2-19
how it works, 2-18
3G1X CDMA packet data
defined, 2-24
two options, 2-24
3G1X CDMA Packet Data
Network
defined, 2-1
benefits, 2-24
guide to all user interfaces, 3-9
defined, 2-24, 2-24
many network elements, one

network, 2-1
diagram, with PCF on PHE2

feature, 2-24
Master Diagram, 2-33
two options, 2-24
service-specific networks
within, 2-1
using the PCF on PHE2, 8-2
training on all user interfaces,

3-9
3G1X CDMA
roles for license
administration, 18-14
connections to network, 7-11
3G1X CDMA Base Station (BS)
defined, 2-7
with PCF on PHE2 feature,

how it works, 2-24
410S server
defined, 9-29, 9-31
9218 Base Station Macro
defined, C-1
frequencies supported, C-1
9218 Base Station Macro HD
defined, C-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-1
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9224 Base Station Sub-Compact
impact on 9256 OMPv2, 10-17
defined, C-1
possible configurations, 12-8
with both 9256 OMP and 9254

OMC-RAN Compact, 12-9
9224 Base Station Sub-Compact

EN, C-1
9226 Base Station Compact
defined, C-1
9228 Base Station Macro
indoor cabinet, 7-9
outdoor cabinet, 7-7
9228 Base Station Macro LP
defined, C-1
9253 OMC-RAN
capacity, 12-4
communications with Access
Manager, 11-7
DC only, 11-3
defined, 2-7, 11-3
documentation and training,
11-10
GUI interface, 11-8
hardware, 11-4

capacity, 12-4
communications with Access
Manager, 12-15
DC only, 12-3
defined, 12-3
12-18
GUI interface, 12-16
hardware, 12-11
relationship to the 9256 OMP,
12-3
RMT cut-through, 14-3
connection to other network

elements, 10-19
connection to the 9281 Packet
Switch, 10-19
connection to the ECP
MCRT/EAI, 10-19
connection to the ECP Physical
ROP, 10-20
connection to the Maintenance
LAN, 10-19
connection to the service
provider's network, 10-19
connection to the TCP/IP
Network, 10-20
user interfaces supported,

12-16
hardware, 10-15
9256 OMP
changes in frame to support
9254 OMC-RAN Compact,
12-3, 12-7
defined, 2-8, 10-4, 10-14
RMT cut-through, 14-3
relationship to the 9253

OMC-RAN, 11-3
connection to network, 10-19

10-23
functional areas supported,

10-4, 10-14
user interfaces supported, 11-8
changes in frame to support

9254 OMC-RAN Compact,
10-17
software architecture, 12-14
relationship to the 9256 OMP,

11-3
9256 OMPv2
relationship to the 9254

physical DCI link to the ECP,

10-19
software, 10-18
user interfaces, 10-22
9256 OMPv4
all-IP interfaces, 10-10
availability, 10-5
benefits, 10-5
choice for upgrades, 10-5
compared to OMPv2, 10-6
benefits of, 12-6
support for OA&M processing,

10-4, 10-14
defined, 2-8, 10-17, 12-5
uses, 10-4, 10-14
documentation, 10-12
impact on 9256 OMP, 12-3,

12-7
wiring, 12-7
hardware, 10-8
defined, 10-4
same load line as OMPv2, 10-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-2
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
sharing cabinet with MMCv4,

10-8
software, 10-9
Supports mixed configurations,
10-5
9256 Operations and Management
Platform version 2
See: 9256 OMPv2
9256 Operations and Management
Platform version 4
See: 9256 OMPv4
9259 OTAF
9259 Over-The-Air-Function
(9259 OTAF)
and the HLR/AC, 15-5
use of LMT, 15-6

use of SS7 network, 15-6
9271 EV-DO Radio Access
System (9271 EV-DO RAS)
defined, 2-27, 9-4
support for Rel. 0, 9-4
support for Rev. A, 9-4
9271 EV-DO RAS
base station options, 9-6
base station support, 9-16
benefits, 2-27
call flows, 9-22
compared with PCF on PHE2
feature, 8-1
and the mobile station, 15-4
compared with PCF on the

PHE2 feature, 9-1
and the serving MSC/VLR,

15-5
components, 9-13
cluster connections, 15-10

defined, 15-2
expanding capacity, 15-8
hardware, 15-7
hardware layout, 15-8
High-Speed Link (HSL)
feature, 15-6
how it works, 15-2, 15-5
methods of authentication,
15-5
physical location, 15-3
platform, 15-7
defined, 2-27
deployment options, 9-6
9-21
how it works, 9-8
IP components of, 9-13
roles for license

administration, 18-14
software, 9-34
stand-alone deployment, 9-6
support for Voice over IP, 9-5
system architecture diagram,
9-14
when to use, 9-5
9271 EV-DO RAS Base station
defined, 9-13
9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data
Network
benefits, 2-27
defined, 2-27
deployment options, 2-28
diagram, with mixed-mode
configuration, 2-28
diagram, with standalone
configuration, 2-29
how it works, 2-28
system architecture diagram,
9-14
when to use, 2-28
licensing, 9-6
9271 EV-DO RAS stand-alone

deployment, 2-28
mixed-mode, advantage of, 9-7
9271 EV-DO RNC
mixed-mode, defined, 9-7

mixed-mode deployment, 9-6
need for additional equipment,
9-7
Application processor, ATCA,

9-27
Application processor, R1SR,
9-32
redundancy, 15-8
NEs between the RNC and the

Internet, 9-14
Application processor, UNC,

9-30
server, 15-7
RAN components of, 9-13
ATCA platform, 9-26
software, 15-9
support for dual-mode devices,
15-2
requirement for OMC-RAN,

9-20
defined, 9-13, 9-24

frame components, 9-29, 9-31
in UNC, 9-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-3
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
platforms, 9-24
product offerings, 9-24

9281 Packet Switch Compact
R1SR-based, 9-31
architecture, 6-27
software, 9-34
availability, 6-26
Traffic processor, 9-33
benefits, 6-26
Traffic processor, ATCA, 9-27
call flows, 6-37
Traffic processor, UNC, 9-30
components, 6-28
UNC frame components, 9-29
connection to MMCv4Based
Access Manager, 6-34

9271 EV-DO RNC functions
defined, 9-34
9281 Packet Switch
and Ethernet Backhaul, 6-49
and IP Backhaul, 6-47
and IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO),
6-50
and PCF on PHE2 feature,
6-51
connection to the PDSN, 6-33

connections to MMCv2,
MMCv1, or MM, 6-34
defined, 6-26
documentation, 6-36
hardware, 6-28
how it works, 6-26
interfaces, 6-27
and the PSG feature, 6-39
software, 6-31
benefits, 6-4
supported configurations, 6-26
call flows, 6-24
Access Manager, 6-21
MMCv1, or MM, 6-21
defined, 2-8, 6-4
documentation, 6-23
external signalling, 6-20
9281 Packet Switch Gateway

defined, 2-14
9281 PS
documentation, INTL, 6-23,
6-36
documentation, NAR, 6-23,
6-36
9281 PSc
hardware, 6-6
and Ethernet Backhaul, 6-49
how it works, 6-4
network interfaces, 6-19
and IP Soft Handoff (IPSHO),

6-50
software, 6-18
training, 6-24
trunks, 6-20, 6-33
and PCF on PHE2 feature,

6-39, 6-51
9290 MM
application documentation,
4-47
components, 4-38
connections to network, 4-44,
4-44
defined, 4-37
4-47, 4-47
general documentation, 4-47
hardware, 4-38
multi-layered architecture,
4-42
software, 4-42
software layers, 4-42
training, 4-48
9290 MM-AP
types of frames, 4-38
9290 MM-AP application software
description and function of,
4-43
9290 MM-AP bundle software
4-42
9290 MM-AP platform software
4-43
9290 MM-AP Release 1
defined, 4-38
9290 MM-AP Release 2
defined, 4-38
9290 MM-APCC
call flows, 2-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-4
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
documentation, 4-47
9290 MM-APF
definition of, 4-38
call flows, 2-16
9290 MMC
call flows, 2-16
9290 MMC-Based Access
Manager
call flows, 2-16
9290 Mobility Manager
See: 9290 MM
9290 Mobility Manager Signaling Interface
defined, 2-8
9290 Mobility Manager Signaling Interface (MM-SI)
See: MM-SI
9359 Over-The-Air-Function
(9259 OTAF)
15-13
9980 PAEC
chassis, described, 16-10
components of, 16-11
description of, 16-10
physical dimensions of, 16-12
9980 PAEC application
advantages of, 16-3
AEC service card, 16-15
AEC service card for G.711u,
16-16
algorithm for, 16-5
chassis, diagram of, 16-14
chassis, slot usage, 16-14
CLI interface, 16-18
.............................................................
connections to other network

elements, 16-17
A Access Manager
defined, 16-2, 16-2

16-19
as used in this document, 4-1

communications with 9253
OMC-RAN, 11-7
failure of, 16-17
communications with 9254

failure of MLS, 16-17
defined, 2-9, 3-2, 4-1
hardware platform, 16-10
mixed configurations, 4-2
hardware requirements, 16-14
one per MSC, 4-2
how it works, 16-5
upgrading, 4-2
how it works for inter-MSC

traffic, 16-5
versions of, 4-1
how it works for intra-MSC

traffic, 16-7
impact on traffic if it goes
down, 16-17
integrated hub cards, 16-14
line service cards, 16-15
Media processing service card,
16-16
mobile phone requirements,
16-14

(AMMS)
See AMMS, 5-3
Access Managers
Support mixed configurations,
4-2
Access Terminal
defined, 2-9
acoustic echo
causes of, 16-4
need for, 16-2
defined, 16-4
needs traffic from both end

points, 16-5
traditional method for

suppression of, 16-4
one instance per MSC, 16-5
acoustic echo suppression
platform, 16-2
algorithm for, 16-5
support for EVRC calls, 16-2
as done by the 9980 PAEC

application, 16-5, 16-5, 16-7
support for TrFO/RTO, 16-2

use of MLSs, 16-17
works with non Alcatel-Lucent
MSCs, 16-3
works with TrFO and RTO
networks, 16-2
traditional method, defined,

16-4
traditional method, how it
works, 16-4
Control Unit, 6-7
defined, 6-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-5
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disk File Controller, 6-7
ANSI-41 Network
how it works, 6-7

Input/Output Processor, 6-7
defined, 2-9
application processor (AP)
Processor Cabinet, 6-7

Administrative Work Station
(AWS)
defined, 6-30
for 9271 EV-DO RNC,

defined, 9-25
application software package,
9290 MM-AP
4-43
hardware, 6-30
Administrative Workstation
See: AWS
Advanced Telecommunications
Computing Architecture (ATCA)
See: ATCA
AEC service card
AR
backhaul networks
Alcatel-Lucent, diagram, 2-32,
19-3
Alcatel-Lucent, documentation
on, 19-1
in the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, 2-31, 19-2
Backhaul Protocol Handler (BPH)
benefits, 6-48
See: Aggregation Router

ATCA
defined, 4-7, 9-27, 10-8
ATCA chassis
defined, 6-47
Band Class 15
support for, C-1
base station
defined, 16-15
AEC service card, 16-15
function of, in 9980 PAEC,

16-15
components of, 16-11
3G1X CDMA-only, network

connections for, 7-11
defined, 4-7, 9-27, 10-8
9218 Base Station Macro, C-1
description, 16-10
9218 Base Station Macro HD,

C-1

defined, 2-9
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network
contents of, 2-1
defined, 2-1
service-specific networks, 2-17
within, 2-1
ALED server, 18-7
AMMS
defined, 5-3
FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION, 5-4
two applications, 5-3
AMMS-PS, 6-21, 6-34
ANSI-41
defined, 2-9
integrated hub cards, 16-14

line service cards, 16-15
physical dimensions of, 16-12
slot usage, 16-14
Auxiliary Cabinet
use of with, 4-55
Avaya Ethernet switch, 4-41
AWS
9226 Base Station Compact,

C-1
9228 Base Station Macro LP,
C-1
9271 EV-DO RAS network
Base Stations 9222 and 9222
Base Stations Micro
Distributed, C-1
defined, 6-28
call flows, 7-16
support for, C-1
CDMA Base Station 4420, C-1
.............................................................
commonly used acronyms, 7-6
B backhaul
components, 7-6
four types of, 2-32, 19-3
types of, 2-31, 19-2
defined, 2-9, 7-2
backhaul network
defined, 2-9, 2-31, 19-2

7-14
hardware, 7-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-6
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mixed mode, network

mixed-mode, advantage of, 9-6
mixed-mode, defined, 7-4
Modular Cell 3.0, C-1
remote access, using Remote
Maintenance Terminal
(RMT), 14-2
software, 7-10
supported air interfaces, 7-4
types of, supported, 7-5, C-1
Base Station OA&M Controller
(BSOC)
and the LMT, 9-20
defined, 2-7, 9-17
feature parity with
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO
RAS, 9-17

diagram, 4-39
optional components, 4-39
basic network features
defined, 18-3
bearer function
defined, 2-5
BSOC
See: Base Station OA&M
Controller (BSOC)
as Access Manager, 4-2
defined, 4-2, 9-13
.............................................................
C Cable Interface Panel (CIP), 4-41
call flows, 2-16

9271 EV-DO RAS, where to
find, 9-22
hardware platform, 9-17
CDMA circuit, where to find,

2-16
software, 9-34
defined, 2-16
used only for Standalone 9271

EV-DO RAS, 9-17
where to find, 2-16, 2-16

base stations
capacity, additional
methods of purchasing, 18-4
carrier counts
for different configurations,

7-4
differing frequencies, impact

on, C-1
guide to, C-1
output power, impact on, C-1
quick reference table, C-1
reasons for variation, C-1
similarities, 7-4
supported air interfaces, C-1
Base Stations 9222 and 9222 Base
Stations Micro Distributed
defined, C-1
Base Transceiver Station
See base station, 7-3
CDMA
defined, 2-18
options for, 8-1
Alcatel-Lucent, documentation
on, 19-1
CDMA backhaul networks

diagram, 2-32, 19-3
CDMA base station
defined, 7-3
CDMA circuit voice call flows
where to find, 2-16
CDMA Mobility Server
See: CMS.
defined, 2-10, 3-7, 3-7
CDMA wireless network
Alcatel-Lucent, defined, 2-1
defined, 2-10
circuit switching
defined, 2-18
circuit voice network
defined, 2-18
Classless Inter-Domain Routing
(CIDR), 2-9
CLI
for 9980 PAEC, 16-18
CLI commands
for software license generation
and delivery, 18-11
CM3
defined, 6-8
CMS
See: CDMA Mobility Server
(CMS)
(CMS)
benefits of, 5-2
components, 5-2
defined, 5-2
for further information, 5-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-7
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
interfaces, 5-2
physical components, 5-3
use of MMCv2, 5-3
CNI/IMS Ring
Direct Link Node (DLN), 4-56
Ethernet Interface Node
Enhanced (EINE), 4-56
for the ECPC, 4-56
Ring Peripheral Controller
Node (RPCN), 4-56
Communication Module
Control Unit (CMCU), 6-9
for 9259 OTAF, how it works,

15-5
.............................................................
D DCI
physical, 10-19
DELETE:LICENSE, 18-11
Digital Line Trunk Unit (DLTU)
defined, 6-12
Direct Link Node (DLN)
defined, 4-56
documentation
on all user interfaces, 3-9
Communication Module
Processor (CMP), 6-9
Domain Name Server (DNS)
defined, 6-8
dualrail LAN
how it works, 6-8

Message Switch, 6-8
Quad Link 9281 Packet Switch
(QLPS), 6-9
Time Multiplexed Switch
(TMS), 6-9
connections between network
elements
quick reference table, A-1
reference table, 17-1
control function
defined, 2-5
defined, 19-10
diagram, 19-10
CORE 970 Processor
defined, 6-14
for 9259 OTAF, defined, 15-5
defined, 9-14
defined, 4-44
Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP)
defined, 9-14
.............................................................
Emergency Interface (EI) access

when to use, 13-2
Enhanced Circuit Breaker Unit 2
(ECBU2), 4-41
Ethernet
over SONET, 19-17
Ethernet Access Transport
Network (EATN)
defined, 19-17
Ethernet Backhaul
9281 Packet Switch changes to
support, 6-49
and the packet switch, 6-49
basic configuration, diagram,
19-18
benefits, 19-16, 19-16
compared to IP Backhaul,
19-16
connections to network,
upgrades required, 19-22
defined, 2-31, 19-2, 19-16
E ECP
defined, 4-54
ECPC
DCI interface to the 9256
OMP, 4-58
defined, 4-51
software, 4-57
ECPless configuration
defined, 4-37

19-24
hardware, 19-20
hardware changes at the base
station, 19-20
network architecture,
assumptions, 19-19
network architecture, defined,
19-19
software requirements, 19-21
EHIOU module, 19-20
support for service-specific

networks, 19-16
emergency access
to a frame, 13-2
Ethernet Backhaul Network

defined, 2-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-8
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced

(EINE)
defined, 4-56
EVRC, 16-2
Extreme Networks switch, 4-41
.............................................................
F FAF
changes to 9281 PS, 19-6
.............................................................
define, 2-10
H H.248
defined, 2-31, 19-2, 19-6

need for, 6-46
works with 9290 MM and

9290 MMC, 19-6
FAF method
defined, 18-5
FALARM
defined, 4-7, 9-27
fan trays
defined, 6-16
FB032CD blades
defined, 4-7, 9-27
FCAPS
defined, 2-13
Feature Activation File (FAF)
See FAF, 18-5
features
basic network, 18-3
defined, 18-3
optional features, 18-3
types of, 18-3
fms_rcc software package, 4-9,
4-20, 4-30, 4-43
FNO registration page, 18-10
function, 6-40
contents of, 18-5
defined, 6-40
not supported in MMCv4, 4-10
uses for, 19-6
how it is created, 18-5
H.248 interface
Frame Relay backhaul
architecture, 18-6
defined, 18-5
defined, 5-2
how it works, 6-40

history of revisions
to this document, B-1
Home Agent (HA)
Frame Relay Backhaul.
defined, 9-14
training, 19-7
Home Location Register (HLR)

Frame Relay Protocol Handler
(FRPH)
defined, 6-46
defined, 2-15
.............................................................
I
I-MSC
how it works, 6-46
Access Managers for, 3-4
used for Frame Relay

Backhaul, 6-46
components, 3-4
FRPH and IFRPH on PH22

Hardware feature, 6-46
OA&M for, 3-5
.............................................................
defined, 2-10, 3-4
switch for, 3-5

i-OIU
G G.711u
defined, 16-8
Global Power Distribution Frame
(GPDF), 4-54
Global SM
defined, 6-20, 6-33
Golden Image software
function and description of,
4-19, 4-29, 4-42
Growth Universal Network
Cabinet
diagram, 4-40
frame components, 4-41
defined, 6-16
IHLR
use of in network, 4-45
IMS
defined, 2-11
Integrated HLR (IHLR), 4-11,
4-22, 4-32
integrated hub cards
defined, 16-14
16-14
use of CE, 16-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-9
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
works with either Access

Manager, 19-11
defined, 2-10, 3-4

IP Core
defined, 2-11
defined, 2-10
interfaces, 9253 OMC-RAN,
summary of, 11-8
interfaces, 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact, summary of, 12-16

See: IMS
IP Soft Handoff
benefits, 6-50
interfaces, 9256 OMPv2, summary

of, 10-19
Internet Protocol (IP) network
defined, 9-13
defined, 6-50
how it works, 6-50
IP Soft Handoff feature, 6-50
IP/MPLS Network
Introduction to CDMA Wireless

Networks OA&M class, 3-9
IOU module, 19-20
IP Backhaul
benefits, 19-8
compared to Ethernet
Backhaul, 19-16
Converged IP Backhaul
Network, 19-10
defined, 2-10, 2-31, 19-2, 19-8
defined, 2-11
iPS
defined, 6-14
iPS-2e
defined, 6-16
iPS-h Packet Switch
defined, 6-16
enhancements, 18-13
how to access, 18-10
important points, 18-10
login administration, 18-10
process overview, 18-12
replacement for FAF and
QFAF method, 18-9
security, 18-10
(LMT)
connection to frame, 13-2
defined, 13-2
13-4
documentation on, 13-3
emergency access, 13-2
for 9259 OTAF, not the same
as the MS LMT, 15-6, 15-12
.............................................................
serial connectivity required,

13-2
L license administration
when to use, 13-2
9271 EV-DO RAS,

Local Power Distribution Cabinet

See: See LPDC
how it works, 19-8
for 3G1X CDMA,

Local Power Distribution Cabinet

(LPDC), 4-54
need for BPH, 6-47
roles for, 18-14
loop around trunks

19-15
RC/V, 19-13
RTU, 19-13
License Administration Tool

(LAT), 18-10
software requirements, 19-13
line service cards
support for service-specific

networks, 19-9
use of ML/MC-PPP, 19-8
use with converging networks,
19-8
defined, 16-15
16-15
LKDI software license generation
and delivery method
for mobile-to-mobile calls, 6-4

LPDC
defined, 6-28
LX-4048 NTS, 10-6
.............................................................
M mandatory requirement for an
OMC-RAN, 11-3
benefits of, 18-9

defined, 18-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-10
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master Diagram
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network,
2-33
backhaul networks in, 2-32,
2-32, 19-3, 19-3
MCC/TLWS
defined, 2-11, 8-5
Media Gateway (MGW)
defined, 2-11
MFFU
defined, 6-16
MGW
See: defined
mixed configuration
defined, 4-2, 10-5
mixed configurations
supported by 9256 OMPv4,
4-2, 10-5
supported by all Access
Managers, 4-2
Mixed-Mode 9271 EV-DO RAS
Mixed-mode 9271 EV-DO RAS
Packet Data Network
advantage of, 9-7
defined, 2-28, 2-28, 9-7
diagram, 2-28, 9-7
how it works, 9-8
need for additional equipment,
9-7
Mixed-mode base station

defined, 7-4
about, 4-16
MM-APCC
4-24
switches used with, 4-41

MM-SI
See: 9290 Mobility Manager Signaling Interface
defined, 5-5
functions, 5-5
hardware, 5-5
role within CMS, 5-5
MMC-AP bundle software
4-20, 4-30
MMC-AP platform software
4-20, 4-30
MMCv1
4-34
application software, 4-30
compared to MMCv2, 4-27
defined, 4-27
documentation, 4-34
external network connections,
4-31
hardware, 4-28
type of service offered, 9-8
hardware, documentation on,

4-28
defined, 2-11
MMCv2
ML-PPP, 19-8
subscriber data, provisioning

of, 9-8
mixed-mode base station
software, 4-29
training, 4-35

as used in CMS, 5-3
compared to MMCv1, 4-18
components, 4-17
defined, 4-16
documentation, 4-24
4-21
hardware, 4-17
hardware enhancements, 4-18
hardware, documentation on,
4-18
role within CMS, 5-3
server, 4-18
software, 4-19
support for IP backhaul, 4-18
supports IP and Ethernet
Backhaul, 4-22
training, 4-25
Use of Universal Network
Cabinet, 4-17
MMCv3
does not exist, 3-4
MMCv4
adding to existing Access
Manager, 4-2
all-IP backhaul, 4-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-11
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
all-IP interfaces, 4-10

4-13
availability, 4-5
benefits, 4-5
choice for upgrades, 4-5
defined, 4-5
documentation, 4-13
4-10
hardware, 4-6
no Frame Relay backhaul, 4-10
no SS7 to PS, 4-10
no SS7 to STPs, 4-10
same load line as other Access
Managers, 4-5
software layers, 4-8
support for SCTP, 4-10
support for SIGTRAN, 4-10
training, 4-14
MMCv4 Golden Image software
defined, 4-8
MMCv4 layer 2 software
description and function of, 4-8
MMCv4 platform software
Access manager, 3-7
defined, 2-11, 3-6
switch used, 3-7

components, 3-2
defined, 2-12, 3-2
3-9
Mobile units
defined, 2-12
mobile-to-mobile calls
switching for, 6-4
(MMCv4)
See: MMCv4
Modular Cell 3.0
defined, C-1
MPC
See: Mobile Packet Core
(MPC)
See: MPC
components, 3-6
MPLS
See: MultiProtocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
MSCs
available, 3-3
Multi Layer Switch (MLS)
defined, 16-17
Multiplexer (MUX)
defined, 9-14
MultiProtocol Label Switching
(MPLS)
defined, 2-12
.............................................................
N network architecture, 2-1
network connections
in 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, 17-1, A-1
network element
defined, 2-2, 2-12
ngn_platform software package,
4-9, 4-20, 4-30, 4-43
.............................................................
O OA&M
defined, 2-13
OA&M function
defined, 2-5
OA&M Network
defined, 2-13
OA&M platform
defined, 2-13, 3-2
OA&M scenarios, 3-9
OAM Proxy
training on, 11-10, 12-18
used with the 9980 PAEC

application, 16-17
OCP Communicator
used with the 9980 PAEC

application, if it goes down,
16-17
OLCS, 18-10

defined, 2-12
how it works, 2-12
defined, 15-12
OMC-RAN
for 1xEV-DO, requirements
for, 9-20
mandatory, 11-3
use of the term, 11-1, 12-1
OA&M, 3-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-12
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMC-RAN Solution
output power
contents of, 11-5, 12-13

defined, 11-5, 12-13
Omni 6840 switches
impact on carrier counts, C-1

.............................................................
P Packet Core Network
defined, 4-7, 9-27

OMPv2
defined, 2-13
packet data
connection to OA&M network,

10-7
defined, 10-14
OMPv4
defined, 2-14, 9-14

increased capacity, 10-6
Packet Switch
defined, 2-14
defined, 6-4
Packet Switching Unit (PSU)
supports only ECPless, 10-6

OP:LICENSE, 18-11
defined, 6-12
packet trunk
optional features
defined, 18-3
defined, 2-21
PAEC
methods of obtaining, 18-4
See 9980 PAEC application,

16-2
OTAPA
defined, 15-2
PC
how it works, 15-2
for MMCv1, 4-33
types of, 15-3
for MMCv2, 4-23

defined, 15-6
how it works, 15-6
OTASP
defined, 15-2
how it works, 15-2
hardware, 8-4
open R-P interface, 6-52
customer-supplied DVD drive,

10-6
not standalone, 10-6

8-6
options for providing, 8-1, 9-1
LX-4048 NTS required, 10-6
diagram, 6-52, 8-2
defined, 2-14
connections to OA&M
network, 10-7
defined, 2-24, 6-51, 8-2
comparison of options for, 9-1
Packet Data Network
use of NTS, 10-6
PCF on the PHE2 feature, 6-39,

6-51, 8-1
PCF
defined, 6-39, 6-51
PCF on PHE2
in network, 2-24
PCF on PHE2 feature
for transmission of 3G1X
CDMA packet data, 2-24
providing packet data, 8-2

user interface, 8-5
personality of an MM-AP, 4-29
PHE2
defined, 6-51, 6-51
importance of, 6-51
PHE3 for IP Backhaul PH feature,
6-47
platform software package, 9290
MM-AP
4-43
platform software package,
MMC-AP
4-20, 4-30
platform software package,
MMCv4
power distribution cabinet
defined, 4-54
types of, 4-54
Power Distribution Shelf 2
(PDS2), 4-41
Processor Cabinet
defined, 4-54
OTASP/OTAPA Network
components, 15-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-13
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protocol Handler for ETHERNET

Model 3 (PHE3) for Internet
Protocol Backhaul (IPBH)
feature, 6-47, 6-47
PSG
(CMS)
additional functions, 6-39
additional protocol handlers,
6-41
configurations available, 6-41
connections to other network
elements, 6-42
does not support Frame Relay
Backhaul, 6-39
does not support SS7 and SIP,
6-39
hardware, 6-41
supported only on PS, 6-41
use of, 6-39
use of H.248 interface, 6-40
PSm
components, 6-14, 6-14
defined, 6-14, 6-14, 6-28
hardware, 6-14
hardware diagram, 6-15
PSU, Signaling
See Signaling PSU, 6-20, 6-33
Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN)
defined, 2-14
.............................................................
Q QFAF
defined, 18-5
QFAF method
Qualified Feature Activation File

(QFAF)
See QFAF., 18-5
qualifier
defined, 18-5
.............................................................
R R1 base frame

R1 frame
diagram, 4-39
R1 growth frame
diagram, 4-39
R1SR
used with 9271 EV-DO RNC,
9-31
R1SR base frame
diagram, 4-39
R1SR frame
R1SR growth frame
diagram, 4-39
Radio Access Network (RAN)
defined, 9-13
RADIUS server
defined, 9-14
RAN router
defined, 9-14
RCS, 7-10
Reference diagram
3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network,
2-33
REFRESH:LICENSE, 18-11
Reliable Clustered Computing
(rcc) software
4-9, 4-20, 4-30, 4-43
(RMT)
accessed from the OMC-RAN,
14-3
defined, 14-2
14-4
remote access to base station,
14-2
software, 14-2
Remote Transcoder Operation
(RTO)
defined, 16-2
revisions to this document
history, B-1
Ring Peripheral Controller Node
(RPCN)
defined, 4-56
Router
defined, 2-14
RTO
See Remote Transcoder
Operation (RTO), 16-2
.............................................................
S S-HLR
defined, 2-15
use of in network, 4-45
SC blades
defined, 4-7, 9-27
defined, 18-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-14
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SCTP
support in MMCv4, 4-10
Service Provider's IP Operations
Network
defined, 11-7, 12-15
use of by the 9253 OMC-RAN,
11-7
use of by the 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact, 12-15
benefits of, 2-2
contents of, 2-2
defined, 2-1
offered by Alcatel-Lucent, 2-1
Shelf Management Module
(SMM)
defined, 4-7, 9-27
defined, 2-14
Signaling PSU
Access Manager, 6-21, 6-34
SMU6
defined, 6-11, 6-14, 6-16
soft handoff
defined, 6-50
software license generation and
delivery
enhancements, 18-13
for 9290 MM-APs, 18-10
how to access, 18-10
login administration, 18-10
process overview, 18-12
software license roles
for 3G1X CDMA, 18-14
for 9271 EV-DO RAS, 18-14
SONET, 19-17
Stand Alone Home Location
Register (S-HLR)
defined, 2-15
defined, 6-20, 6-33
benefit, 9-10
uses of, 6-20
SM-XC
defined, 6-11, 6-14, 6-16
SMPU5
diagram, 2-29, 9-10

of, 9-11
MMCv1, or MM, 6-21, 6-34
defined, 16-14
defined, 2-28, 2-28, 9-10
defined, 18-9
backhaul network, 9-10
SIPMON
benefit, 9-10
how it works, 9-11
with MMCv4, 4-10
backhaul network, 9-10
CLI commands, 18-11
connection to the PDSN, 6-33
SIGTRAN

Packet Data Network
transport layer, 9-10

Standalone HLR (S-HLR), 4-11,
4-22, 4-32
supernetting
defined, 2-9
switch
defined, 3-2
Switch
defined, 3-2
Switch Module Processor Unit
(SMPU), 6-10
switching
how it is done, 6-4
defined, 6-10, 6-10
.............................................................
defined, 9-10
T T1/E1 Concentrator
diagram, 9-10
how it works, 9-11
of, 9-11
transport layer, 9-10
defined, 2-15
T5220 server
defined, 4-18
traffic processor
defined, 9-33
defined, 6-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-15
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traffic processor (AP)

for 9271 EV-DO RNC,
defined, 9-25
training
on all user interfaces, 3-9
transcoder
defined, 16-2
Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO)
defined, 16-2
TrFO
See Transcoder Free Operation
(TrFO), 16-2
TrFO Networks
need for PAEC, 16-2
TrFO/RTO
benefits, 2-21
defined, 2-21
diagram, 2-22
how it works, 2-21
requirement for additional
equipment, 2-22
TrFO/RTO Packet Trunking
Network
benefits, 2-21
UNC
defined, 9-29
See Universal Network
Cabinet, 4-17
used with 9271 EV-DO RNC,
9-29
with MMCv2, 4-17
Universal Network ATCA Cabinet
(UNAC)
See UNAC, 4-7, 9-27, 10-8
Universal Network Cabinet, 4-17
as used for the 9271 EV-DO
RNC, 9-29
as used for the 9290 MM, 4-40
as used for the 9290
MM-APCC, 4-39
Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)
defined, 9-29
Universal Traffic Processor (UTP)
card, 9-20
User Interface Guide, 3-9
user interfaces
guide to all, 3-9
training on, 3-9
.............................................................
defined, 2-21, 2-21

V Virtual Private Network (VPN)
diagram, 2-22
Firewall
defined, 9-14
how it works, 2-21
.............................................................
requirement for additional

equipment, 2-22
W wireless network
.............................................................
U UNAC
components, 4-7, 9-27

defined, 4-7, 9-27, 10-8
architecture, 2-1
conceptual view, 2-5
defined, 2-5, 2-5
diagram, 2-6
three basic functions of, 2-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CDMA
IN-16

V1 CDMA Network Overview

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

V1 CDMA Network Overview

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Title page

CDMA | Release 35.0 and later

Supported software releases

Reason for reissue for Issue 5.1 ........................................................................................................................................... xxii

To obtain technical support, documentation, and training or submit feedback

3G1X CDMA Circuit Voice Network ............................................................................................................................. 2-18

3G1X CDMA Packet Data Network

9271 EV-DO RAS Packet Data Network ...................................................................................................................... 2-27

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

About the MMCv4 hardware ................................................................................................................................................ 4-6

Mobility Manager Compact v2

About the MMCv2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-16

MMCv2 connections to other network elements ........................................................................................................ 4-21

Mobility Manager Compact v1

About the MMCv1 ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-27

MMCv1 connections to other network elements ........................................................................................................ 4-31

9290 MM-based Access Manager

About the 9290 MM .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-37

9290 MM user interfaces ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-46

About the Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)

About the ECPC

Components of the ECPC

About the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) ........................................................................................................... 4-54

ECPC connections to other network elements ............................................................................................................. 4-58

Comparison of the Access Managers .............................................................................................................................. 4-61

CDMA Mobility Server (CMS)

9290 Mobility Manager - Signaling Interface ................................................................................................................ 5-5

9281 Packet Switches

Communications Module (CM)

About the 9281 Packet Switch software ........................................................................................................................ 6-18

About the 9281 Packet Switch Compact

Basics of the 9281 Packet Switch Compact (PSc) ..................................................................................................... 6-26

Packet Switch Gateway (PSG)

About the Packet Switch Gateway (PSG) ..................................................................................................................... 6-39

Support for Frame Relay Backhaul

Support for IP Backhaul ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-47

About base station hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 7-7

CDMA 3G1X Packet Data Service

PCF on PHE2 user interface ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5

9271 EV-DO Radio Access System (9271 EV-DO RAS)

About the Base Station OA&M Controller (BSOC) ................................................................................................. 9-17

About the 9271 EV-DO RNC

About the 9271 EV-DO RNC

Processors .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-25

9256 Operations and Management Platform (9256 OMP)

About the 9256 OMPv4

About the 9256 OMPv4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

About the 9256 OMPv4 software ..................................................................................................................................... 10-9

About the 9256 OMPv2 hardware ................................................................................................................................. 10-15

9256 OMPv2 connections to other network elements ............................................................................................ 10-19

Documentation and training ............................................................................................................................................. 10-23

About the 9253 OMC-RAN

About the 9253 OMC-RAN hardware ............................................................................................................................ 11-4

9253 OMC-RAN connections to other network elements ....................................................................................... 11-7

Documentation and training ............................................................................................................................................. 11-10

About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact ............................................................................................................................ 12-3

Configurations of the 9254 OMC Compact Cabinet

About the 9254 OMC-RAN Compact hardware ...................................................................................................... 12-10

9254 OMC-RAN Compact connections to other network elements ................................................................. 12-15

9254 OMC-RAN Compact user interfaces ................................................................................................................. 12-16

Local Maintenance Terminal

About the LMT

Documentation and training